SmartCAT Manual

Welcome to the SmartCAT user manual!
To get a printed version or if you have any other needs, please call Cheetah International Technical Support at 1-800-869-6986 Ext. 2. If your PDF Reader supports bookmarks, enable them on the left to view the interactive Table of Contents. Alternatively, you can click on the Table of Contents entries in the manual itself. Thank you for using SmartCAT and for your continued support!
Do not print this page. The manual is designed to be printed double-sided.
Professional
User Manual
December 2010 Updated for 3.5
Information in this document, including URL and other Internet Web site references, is subject to change without notice. Unless otherwise noted, the example companies, organizations, products, domain names, e-mail addresses, logos, people, places and events depicted herein are fictitious, and no association with any real company, organization, product, domain name, e-mail address, logo, person, place or event is intended or should be inferred. Complying with all applicable copyright laws is the responsibility of the user. Without limiting the rights under copyright, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the express written permission of Cheetah International. The information contained herein is the latest available at the time of printing and has been checked for both accuracy and reliability. Cheetah International, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for the contents of this manual or the results of the use thereof. Cheetah International, Inc. reserves the right to modify the contents without prior notice. The publication and dissemination of the enclosed information confer no license, by implication or otherwise, to any copyright, trademark, patent or patent rights owned by Cheetah International, Inc. All of Cheetah Internationals product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cheetah International, Inc. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Cheetah International may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights covering subject matter in this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license agreement from Cheetah International, the furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property. Please remember: You must accept the License Agreement before you can use this product. SmartCAT is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer. If you do not accept the terms of the License Agreement, you should promptly return the product for a refund. Do not make illegal copies. For further details, please refer to the License Agreement.
SmartCAT was conceived of and developed as a result of the collaborative efforts of many talented people; both Cheetah Internationals employees and customers. Our thanks go to everyone whose hard work and dedication made SmartCAT possible.
To view the SmartCAT User Manual and Quick Start Guide on a computer, you must have a .PDF reader such as Adobe Reader or Foxit Reader installed. The User Manual and Quick Start guides are installed on your hard drive in the Docs folder under the SmartCAT folder (C:\SmartCAT\Docs). The manuals are in a special format called PDF (Portable Document File). You must have a .PDF reader such as Adobe Reader or Foxit Reader installed. Both programs are free and available for download on their respective websites. This user manual and the Quick Start Guide are also available directly from the CD.
SmartCAT Professional Manual Copyright 2003-2010 Cheetah International, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transcribed, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher.
Printed in the United States of America.
SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 Introduction.......................................... 1
1.1 Overview............................................ 2 1.2 Resources and Assistance................. 2 1.2.1 In-Program Help [F1]....................... 2 1.2.2 Technical Support Hot Line............. 2 1.3 Conventions Used In This User Manual........................................................ 3 1.3.1 Menu Paths and Keystrokes............. 3 1.3.2 Sticky Notes..................................... 4 1.4 Contacting Cheetah.......................... 4 3.2.2 Edit Speaker Ids............................. 18 3.2.3 Speller............................................ 19 3.2.4 Audio.............................................. 19 3.2.5 Realtime Options............................ 19 3.2.6 Theory Settings/Translation Options. . .....................................................................19 3.2.7 Number Formatting........................ 19 3.2.8 Hotkeys.......................................... 19 3.2.9 Turbokeys....................................... 19 3.2.10 License Manager.......................... 19 3.2.11 Logging........................................ 20 3.3 Printer Setup................................... 20 3.3.1 Printer Installation.......................... 20 3.4 WordNet Setup................................ 21
CHAPTER 2 Installation........................................... 5
2.1 System Requirements....................... 6 2.2 Downloading and Installing............. 6 2.2.1 Downloading.................................... 6 2.2.2 Installing........................................... 7 2.2.3 Installer Features............................ 10 2.3 Licensing SmartCAT...................... 11 2.3.1 Licensing over the phone............... 12 2.3.2 Licensing Process........................... 12 2.4 Uninstalling SmartCAT................. 13 2.4.1 Terminating The License................ 13 2.4.2 Removing SmartCAT From The Computer.................................................... 14 2.5 Moving a license between computers. ....................................................................15
CHAPTER 4 Getting Started.................................... 23

4.1 The Transcription Process............. 24 4.2 Elements in SmartCAT.................. 25 4.2.1 Starting SmartCAT......................... 25 4.2.2 The SmartCAT Main Menu............ 25 4.2.3 The SmartCAT Job Menu............... 27 4.2.4 The Title Bar.................................. 33 4.2.5 The Menu Bar............................... 33 4.2.6 The Format Toolbar........................ 36 4.2.7 Status Bar....................................... 39 4.2.8 Using The Mouse........................... 40 4.2.9 Dialog Boxes.................................. 41 4.2.10 Text Boxes.................................... 42 4.2.11 List Boxes..................................... 42 4.2.12 Drop-down boxes......................... 43 4.2.13 Check Boxes................................ 43 4.2.14 Option (Radio) Buttons................ 43 4.2.15 Spin Boxes................................... 44 4.2.16 The Context Menu........................ 44 4.2.17 Choosing Commands................... 46 4.3 Managing Files................................ 48 III
CHAPTER 3 Configuring SmartCAT...................... 17

3.1 Your Steno Writer........................... 18 3.2 The Setup Menu.............................. 18 3.2.1 Editing Prefs................................... 18 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.1 Folders............................................ 48 4.3.2 How to Rename a Job File through SmartCAT................................................... 49 4.3.3 Deleting Files................................. 49 4.3.4 Creating A New Work Folder......... 49 4.3.5 Changing Folders........................... 51 4.3.6 Sorting............................................ 51 4.4 Exiting SmartCAT.......................... 52
7.2.7 Additional Help.............................. 85 7.2.8 Leaving Split Notes........................ 85 7.3 Extracting Notes............................. 86 7.4 Batch Notes Translation................. 86 7.4.1 Identifying Dictionaries................. 86 7.4.2 Translating The Notes File............. 87 7.4.3 Notes in Split Screen...................... 88
CHAPTER 5 Style Sheets......................................... 53

5.1 The "default" style sheet................ 54 5.1.1 Creating a Custom Style Sheet....... 54 5.2 Import TurboCAT Style Sheet....... 55 5.3 Applying Style Sheets..................... 56 5.4 Job Properties................................. 56 5.4.1 Job Properties Information............. 57 5.4.2 Customizing Job Properties........... 58
CHAPTER 8 Realtime.............................................. 89
8.1 Advantages Of Realtime................. 90 8.2 Equipment Required...................... 90 8.3 Realtime Setup................................ 90 8.3.1 Connecting the Steno Machine / Realtime Options........................................ 90 8.3.2 Other Realtime Options................. 93 8.3.3 Connecting The Writer................... 93 8.4 Starting A New Realtime Job......... 94 8.5 Starting And Stopping Realtime Translation............................................... 96 8.5.1 Starting Realtime In An Existing Transcript................................................... 96 8.5.2 Stopping Realtime.......................... 96 8.5.3 Split Screen.................................... 97 8.5.4 Timestamps.................................... 97 8.6 Phonetic Translations..................... 99 8.7 Theory/Translation Settings........ 102 8.7.1 Theory Settings............................ 102 8.7.2 Other Translation Options............ 103 8.8 Number Formatting..................... 105 8.8.1 Number Formatting Options........ 106 8.8.2 Number Triggers.......................... 107 8.8.3 Trigger Stacking....................... 109 8.8.4 Number Formatting Using Tokens 110 8.9 Oneshots......................................... 111 8.9.1 Sample Oneshots.......................... 112 8.10 Using RealEdit......................... 115 8.10.1 The RealEdit Dictionary......... 116 8.10.2 Sample RealEdit Dictionary REALEDIT-3.2.DIC................................ 117 8.11 Realtime Output.......................... 118 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
CHAPTER 6 Importing............................................ 73
6.1 Importing TurboCAT Transcripts 74 6.2 Importing .RTF Transcript Files... 75 6.3 Importing ASCII Transcripts (.TXT / .PRT)........................................... 76 6.4 Importing Notes.............................. 76 6.5 Importing TurboCAT Dictionaries 76
CHAPTER 7 Working With Notes........................... 77

7.1 Importing Notes.............................. 78 7.1.1 Files................................................ 78 7.1.2 From Diskettes............................... 79 7.2 Splitting Notes................................. 81 7.2.1 The Split Notes Screen................... 82 7.2.2 Marking Sections........................... 83 7.2.3 Naming Sections............................ 84 7.2.4 Adding Sections............................. 84 7.2.5 Saving Marked Sections................. 85 7.2.6 Transcribing Split Notes................. 85
IV
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.11.1 Setting Up Realtime Output....... 118 8.11.2 Client Format.............................. 119 8.11.3 Connection Settings................... 120 8.11.4 Suspending Realtime Output to Client Stations.......................................... 121 8.12 Realtime Output Clients............ 121 8.12.1 Total Access............................... 121 8.12.2 TCP/IP Output............................ 122 8.12.3 CaseView................................... 122 8.12.4 Livenote(RTF):........................... 123 8.12.5 Summation(RTF):...................... 123 8.12.6 Binder(Plain):............................. 123 8.12.7 As Keyboard (Output to a Text Program):................................................. 124 8.12.8 Bridge......................................... 124 8.13 Projectors And LCD Panels....... 125 8.14 Audio Support............................. 125 8.14.1 Overview.................................... 125 8.14.2 Audio Preferences...................... 127 8.14.3 Recording And Playing.............. 128 8.14.4 Synchronizing............................ 129 8.14.5 Troubleshooting Audio............... 130 8.14.6 Audio Backup and Recovery...... 132 8.15 Auto-Briefs.................................. 132 8.15.1 Auto-Brief Options..................... 133 8.15.2 Viewing Auto-briefs in Realtime 134
9.5.2 Hotkeys........................................ 149 9.5.3 Oneshots....................................... 155 9.6 Include (Get) Files....................... 155 9.6.1 Creating........................................ 155 9.6.2 Using............................................ 156 9.6.3 Auto Include................................. 157 9.7 Insert/Remove Page Break.......... 157 9.8 Picklists.......................................... 157 9.8.1 Creating Picklists......................... 158 9.8.2 Multi-line Picklists....................... 158 9.8.3 Using Picklist Markers............. 159 9.9 PreEdit........................................... 160 9.10 Moving Around In The Editor... 161 9.10.1 Moving The Cursor.................... 161 9.10.2 Go to........................................... 163 9.10.3 Finding Text............................... 164 9.10.4 Bookmarks................................. 165 9.11 Conflicts and Untranslates......... 167 9.11.1 Scan To Next Conflict/Untranslate..... 167 9.11.2 Conflicts..................................... 167 9.11.3 Untranslates................................ 168 9.12 Viewing Notes (Steno)................. 168 9.12.1 Working With Notes................... 169 9.13 Paragraph Types......................... 169 9.13.1 Changing Paragraph Types........ 170 9.13.2 Paragraph Formatting................. 171 9.13.3 The Witness Paragraph............... 171 9.14 Typing And Editing..................... 172 9.14.1 Adding Blank Lines................... 172 9.14.2 Selecting Text............................. 172 9.14.3 Swap Words................................ 172 9.14.4 Splitting And Joining Paragraphs 173 9.14.5 Capitalization............................. 173 9.14.6 Stitching And Hyphenation........ 173 9.14.7 Formatting Numbers.................. 174 9.14.8 Replacing Text........................... 175 9.14.9 Smart Punctuation...................... 175 9.14.10 Text Attributes.......................... 177 9.14.11 Redaction.................................. 178 9.15 Globals......................................... 180 9.15.1 Text Globals............................... 180
CHAPTER 9 Editing.............................................. 136

9.1 Opening a Transcript for Editing 137 9.1.1 The Transcript Editor Screen....... 137 9.2 Editing Preferences....................... 138 9.2.1 Editor............................................ 139 9.2.2 Columns Options.......................... 143 9.2.3 Customizing SmartCAT Colors.... 143 9.3 Zoom / Enlarge Display................ 146 9.4 Editing (Typing) Modes................ 147 9.4.1 Insert............................................. 147 9.4.2 Typeover....................................... 147 9.4.3 Turbokeys Mode.......................... 147 9.5 Customizable Editing Keystrokes 148 9.5.1 Turbokeys..................................... 148
CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.15.2 9.15.3 9.15.4 9.15.5
Steno Globals............................. 182 Saving Globals........................... 183 Loading Globals......................... 184 Editing Global Tables................. 184
9.16 Deleting Text................................ 186 9.16.1 Deleting Single Character.......... 186 9.16.2 Deleting Single Words............... 186 9.16.3 Deleting A Single Line............... 186 9.16.4 Deleting To The End Of A Line. 187 9.16.5 Deleting Several Lines............... 187 9.17 Correcting Accidents.................. 187 9.17.1 CTRL + Z (Undo)...................... 187 9.18 Cut, Copy, and Paste.................. 187 9.18.1 Cutting Text................................ 187 9.18.2 Copying Text.............................. 187 9.18.3 Pasting Text................................ 188 9.19 Electronic Signature Image....... 188 9.19.1 Creating a signature image......... 188 9.19.2 Attaching the image to a job (or style sheet)........................................................ 189 9.19.3 Placing the image on your page. 190 9.20 Modifying Text Format.............. 190 9.20.1 Text Format................................ 191 9.21 Numbering Questions................. 193 9.21.1 Removing Question Numbers.... 194 9.22 SpellCheck................................... 194 9.22.1 Batch SpellCheck....................... 195 9.22.2 Standard SpellCheck.................. 197 9.22.3 Check Current Word................... 198 9.22.4 Double Word / Paragraph Check 199 9.22.5 Spelling Options......................... 200 9.22.6 Custom Spelling Dictionaries.... 202 9.22.7 Adding Words To The Lexicons. 202 9.22.8 Removing Words........................ 203 9.23 WordNet Dictionary Lookup..... 203 9.23.1 Using the WordNet dialog.......... 204 9.24 Saving and Exiting...................... 205 9.24.1 Saving Changes.......................... 205 9.24.2 Leaving The Transcript Editor... 205
10.1 Indexing....................................... 207 10.1.1 Index Types................................ 207 10.1.2 Marking Index Items.................. 207 10.1.3 Editing Indexed Items................ 208 10.1.4 Index Marks............................... 209 10.1.5 Generating The Index................. 209 10.1.6 Index Error Messages................. 210 10.2 Making a Keyword Index.......... 210 10.2.1 Entering Keywords..................... 211 10.2.2 Removing Keywords.................. 211 10.2.3 Saving The List of Keywords..... 211 10.2.4 Loading A Saved Keyword List. 212 10.2.5 Displaying The Keyword Index. 212 10.2.6 Printing The Keyword Index...... 212 10.2.7 Saving The Keyword Index....... 212 10.3 Generating A Concordance........ 213 10.3.1 Excluding Words From The Concordance............................................. 214 10.3.2 Printing The Concordance.......... 215 10.3.3 Saving The Concordance........... 216 10.4 Printing........................................ 217 10.4.1 Printing Transcripts.................... 217 10.4.2 Print Dialog Options.................. 219 10.4.3 Print Preview Single / Multiple Pages Per Sheet........................................ 220 10.4.4 Printing to .pdf........................... 223 10.5 Troubleshooting / Print Management........................................... 223 10.5.1 Printing a transcript produces unexpected results.................................... 223 10.5.2 Print Queue Manager................. 223 10.6 Exporting..................................... 225 10.6.1 ASCII Transcripts....................... 225 10.6.2 Dictionaries................................ 227 10.7 Save a Copy As............................ 228 10.7.1 JOB............................................. 228 10.7.2 RTF............................................. 228 10.7.3 RTF (Notes)................................ 229 10.7.4 Text............................................. 230 10.7.5 HTML........................................ 230 10.8 E-Mailing Files (With Outlook or Thunderbird)...................................... 232
CHAPTER 10 Finishing Tools / Printing................ 206

VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 11 Dictionaries...................................... 234

11.1 Import a TurboCAT Dictionary 235 11.2 Opening Dictionaries.................. 236 11.3 Creating New Dictionaries......... 236 11.4 Saving Changes And Exiting The Dictionary............................................... 237 11.4.1 Dictionary Backup Feature......... 237 11.5 Dictionary Save a Copy As / Exporting................................................ 238 11.5.1 Steps To Export.......................... 238 11.6 Printing a Dictionary.................. 239 11.7 Merging Dictionaries.................. 240 11.8 Dictionary Maintenance............. 241 11.8.1 Locating Dictionary Entries....... 241 11.8.2 Adding New Entries................... 242 11.8.3 Editing Existing Entries............. 242 11.8.4 Check Spelling........................... 243 11.8.5 Sorting Dictionary Entries.......... 244 11.8.6 Tagging Dictionary Entries........ 244 11.8.7 Dictionary Filters....................... 246 11.9 Tokens And Special Entries........ 248 11.9.1 Punctuation Tokens.................... 248 11.9.2 Quotes........................................ 249 11.9.3 Hard Spaces................................ 249 11.9.4 Prefixes....................................... 249 11.9.5 Suffixes....................................... 250 11.9.6 Bookmarks................................. 250 11.9.7 Literals........................................ 250 11.9.8 Paragraph Tokens....................... 251 11.9.9 Attribute Tokens......................... 252 11.9.10 Finger Spelling......................... 253 11.9.11 Spacing Between Stitched Words With the <NULL> Token......................... 255 11.9.12 The Autoinclude <Get> Token.... ...................................................................255 11.9.13 The Realtime Output <SUSPEND> Token........................................................ 255 11.9.14 Speaker ID tokens.................... 256
12.1 ASCII Import and Cleanup Tool 259 12.2 Unarchiving (Restoring) TurboCAT Files......................................................... 261 12.3 Backups, Archiving & Transferring Jobs......................................................... 262 12.3.1 Backup Feature.......................... 262 12.3.2 Auto Save................................... 262 12.3.3 Manually backing up your files. 263 12.3.4 File Compression....................... 270 12.3.5 Locating and Viewing Jobs or Other Files.......................................................... 271 12.3.6 Transferring Files....................... 271 12.4 PDF995........................................ 272 12.4.1 Installing..................................... 272 12.5 Signature995................................ 273 12.6 WordNet...................................... 274 12.7 Logging........................................ 275 12.7.1 Level of Detail........................... 275 12.8 Crash Assistance......................... 275
CHAPTER 13 Keystrokes......................................... 276

13.1 SmartCAT Keystroke Layout.... 277 13.2 Turbokeys.................................... 279 13.3 Transcript Editor Keystrokes.... 281 13.4 Dictionary Editor Keystrokes.... 283
CHAPTER 14 The Computer System...................... 284

14.1 Internal / External Storage........ 285 14.1.1 Maintaining Storage Media........ 285 14.2 Input Devices............................... 287 14.3 Monitor / LCD Screen................ 287
CHAPTER 15 Using Windows.............................. 288

15.1 Windows Terms........................ 289 15.2 The Search Companion.............. 295 15.2.1 Search for beginners................... 295 VII
CHAPTER 12 Utilities.............................................. 258

TABLE OF CONTENTS
15.2.2 Advanced searching................... 296 15.3 Useful Windows Shortcuts ..... 296 15.4 Mouse & Keyboard in Windows... ..................................................................296 15.4.1 Using The Mouse....................... 297 15.4.2 Using The Keyboard.................. 298 15.5 Basic Windows Functions....... 298 15.6 Windows Vista.......................... 300 15.7 Windows 7................................ 303
17.1 Control Lines............................... 309 17.2 Importing your Phonetics Dictionary............................................... 310 17.3 Importing the RealEdit Dictionary............................................... 311 17.4 Importing a Dictionary.............. 312 17.5 Importing TurboCAT Transcripts and Style Sheets..................................... 313
Glossary............................................ 314 Figures.............................................. 320 Index of Tables................................. 325 Index................................................. 326
CHAPTER 16 Quick Reference............................... 304 CHAPTER 17 TurboCAT Migration....................... 308
VIII
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Welcome to SmartCAT, the professional transcription software from Cheetah International. SmartCAT simplifies the process of producing professional transcripts: from reading your steno notes to editing transcripts and finally, printing the finished product. SmartCAT lets you produce a transcript in Realtime, maintain and use multiple steno-to-English dictionaries, export transcripts to several different formats, generate concordances, and much, much more!
In This Chapter...
1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 Resources and Assistance ............................................................................................... 2 1.3 Conventions Used In This User Manual ....................................................................... 3 1.4 Contacting Cheetah ........................................................................................................ 4
1.1
Overview
SmartCAT runs on a personal computer with a 600MHz or faster processor and the Microsoft Windows operating system. Because SmartCAT is Windows-based, you have the flexibility to run other software programs, such as word processors, when you're not using the system for Realtime transcription. If you run SmartCAT on a computer with Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 you will need more RAM and a slightly faster processor. To get the most out of your SmartCAT system, you need a basic familiarity with the Microsoft Windows operating system installed on your computer. For more information on using these operating systems, please refer to your Microsoft Windows Manual and computer manual. For your convenience, a short Windows overview is included in Chapter 15 of this manual. Since SmartCAT is specifically designed to meet the needs of our customers, we are always interested in your input. If you have comments or suggestions to improve SmartCAT or how it may better suit your needs, let us know. We are available to take your calls 24 hours a day, 365 days a year at (800)869-6986, or contact Technical Support via email at support@cheetahinternational.com. Please leave a detailed description of suggestions for improvements and/or any problems encountered.
1.2
Resources and Assistance
We designed SmartCAT to be as easy to use as it is powerful and flexible. To help you get the most out of SmartCAT as quickly and easily as possible, we provide you with several resources for getting the help you may need. You are already using one of the most valuable help tools provided with any software: the User Manual, but other resources are available for immediate assistance as well:
1.2.1
In-Program Help [F1]
From virtually anywhere in SmartCAT, pressing [F1] opens the SmartCAT in-program help system. Once open, you can move through the help text by using the Contents and Index features, or by clicking your mouse on the various topics. The in-program help contains many pictures and hands-on demonstrations of how to use certain features. In addition, each dialog box has a Help button. When clicked, the help file will open to the appropriate page.
1.2.2
Technical Support Hot Line
If you have a current software maintenance contract, you may call the Technical Support Line, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. The number to call is: (800) 8696986.
You may also call the technical support line if you have no current maintenance agreement, but note there is a service fee charged for each call. Please have a major credit card handy if you require service and do not have a current contract. You can address questions electronically through Cheetah's Technical Support group by using electronic mail. Address questions to support@cheetahinternational.com and a technician will answer as soon as possible. For our off-maintenance customers, the same charges apply. You can also access the Cheetah Users' online forums at www.cheetahinternational.com. There are forums for both on-maintenance and off-maintenance users. Contact Cheetah Technical Support or visit www.cheetahinternational.com for further information. To reduce the amount of time on the telephone, to speed troubleshooting and to assist the technician in the troubleshooting process, try to have the following basic information available: Your System/Customer number. Your version of SmartCAT. To find the version number, click Help, then About. The version number is located at the bottom left of the About SmartCAT screen. Make and model of your computer. Operating system (e.g. Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7). Description of the problem (as detailed as possible). Other pertinent information you feel may help, including the steps you've already performed to remedy the problem.
1.3
Conventions Used In This User Manual

Menu Paths and Keystrokes
Edit [Alt+E] Index [X] Insert Index Entry [I] Mouse actions are indicated by italics, and separated with an arrow. They are always accompanied by the keystrokes that perform the same function. Keyboard actions are indicated with italics surrounded by square brackets.
1.3.1
Example:
The following conventions are used to clarify steps you must perform:
Menu Options
[Keystrokes]
1.3.2
Sticky Notes
If you see a sticky note, read it. These are filled with useful (and sometimes critical) information.
Sticky Note
Critical Sticky Note
1.4
Contacting Cheetah
For inquiries regarding sales or customer service, please use the following information to contact Cheetah International, Inc. Sales inquiries: Cheetah International, Inc. Phone: Phone: Fax: 877-333-2287 (in the US) 303-468-7575 (Canadian callers) 720-293-0017 sales@cheetahinternational.com
Email:
Customer Support inquiries: 655 Broadway Suite 600 Denver, CO 80203 Phone: Email: 800-869-6986 support@cheetahinternational.com
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
Installation
In order to use SmartCAT you'll need to install and license it. This chapter covers downloading, installing, licensing, uninstalling and moving SmartCAT to another computer.
In This Chapter...
2.1 System Requirements ..................................................................................................... 6 2.2 Downloading and Installing ........................................................................................... 6 2.3 Licensing SmartCAT .................................................................................................... 11 2.4 Uninstalling SmartCAT ................................................................................................ 13 2.5 Moving a license between computers .......................................................................... 15
2.1
System Requirements
In order for SmartCAT to operate efficiently, your computer system must meet certain minimum requirements: A personal computer with a Pentium processor with a minimum speed of 600 MHz for Windows XP and 1.2GHz for Vista or 7. The Microsoft Windows operating system (Windows 98 and newer). A minimum of 64 MB of RAM memory, 512 MB if using Windows 2000, XP. 2 GB+ for Windows Vista and 7 (3 GB+ recommended). A Compact Disc drive is required if installing from a CD; a 3.5 floppy drive is strongly recommended. A floppy drive can be internal or external (USB). A hard disk drive with a minimum of 800 MB free (10 GB for XP and 80 GB for Vista and 7); more is recommended, especially if recording audio. A sound card and a microphone is required if recording audio. A minimum of one serial (COM) port or USB to Serial adapter (consult with technical support for recommended brands) with one available USB port. A minimum of one printer (LPT or USB) port. A mouse.
If you're not sure whether your computer meets minimum requirements, look at the specifications in the manual that came with the computer, have a local computer technician look at it, or call Cheetah International's technical hotline for assistance.
2.2
Downloading and Installing

Downloading
2.2.1
Before you install SmartCAT, you must download the installer from the website. 1) Go to http://www.cheetahinternational.com/English/Support/Downloads.php 2) Choose the appropriate installer and click on the link provided. 3) Fill out the information on the Restricted Access page. 4) Click Get File.
5) Choose whether you want to Run or Save the installer from the website.
(Figure 1)
If you choose to save the file (which is helpful if you want to install SmartCAT on a second computer, or if you want a copy of the installer in case you need to reinstall later) you need to specify where you want it to go. We recommend saving the file to your Desktop for easy access.
Figure 1: Security Warning
2.2.2
Installing
You can install SmartCAT from a CD obtained from Cheetah International, Inc. or from a downloaded installer file obtained from the website (see Section 2.2.1).
From CD
Insert the CD into your CD/DVD drive. The SmartCAT installer should auto-start and the Installer Splash Screen will display. Move on to the License Agreement section on the next page.
From Download
When the installer has finished downloading, the Orange Cheetah Icon will appear wherever you have saved it. Double-click this icon to run the installer.
(Figure 2)
If you chose to 'Run' the installer before downloading, it will start the install process as soon as it has finished downloading. In Windows XP, you will receive a Security Warning once you run the installer (Figure 3). If you have downloaded this file from the Cheetah International website, or are running a program from a CD you received from Cheetah International, then it is safe to select 'Run'. Otherwise, exercise caution. In Windows Vista, the User Account Control is designed to prevent unauthorized programs from accessing your computer. When you run the installer, you may see this screen.
(Figure 4)
Figure 2: SmartCAT Installer Icon
Figure 3: Installer Security Warning
When this prompt appears, the rest of your screen will dim and become unusable. you must click an option to continue.
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION If you have downloaded this file from the Cheetah International website, or are running a program from a CD you received from Cheetah International, then it is safe to select 'Allow'. Otherwise, exercise caution.
Figure 4: Windows Vista User Account Control
Installer Splash The first screen to appear is the Installer Splash Screen.
(Figure 5) Figure 5: Cheetah Installer Splash
License Agreement After the splash screen, the EULA screen will automatically appear. Please read the license agreement, then click the I Agree button to continue. (Figure 6)
Components Here you can specify whether or not you want desktop shortcuts. You can also choose to install the PDF creator (see Section 12.4) and/or WordNet (see Section 12.6).
(Figure 7)
Figure 6: License Agreement
Install SmartCAT, Copy Extras
Installs SmartCAT and will copy the support files for the extra utilities such as WordNet and PDF995.
Figure 7: Components
Install SmartCAT, Copy and Install Extras
Installs SmartCAT and the extra utilities such as WordNet and PDF995.
Install SmartCAT, No Extras (Lightweight)
Installs SmartCAT only.

Custom
Allows you to pick and choose which features you want to install or copy. Release Notes New features and changes to the SmartCAT software are listed here. If you would like, you can read through them. If you choose not to read the release notes now, they are included in the help file for future reference. Click Cool! Next > to continue. (Figure 8)
Figure 8: Release Notes
Destination Folder Click on the Install button to actually install the program. This will install SmartCAT to the default folder. It is strongly advised that you install SmartCat to the default folder. (Figure 9) If you have chosen to install the extras, they will now begin their own install process. Follow the prompts for each.
Figure 9: Install Destination Folder
Install Complete When the installation has complete the installer will say, Completed. Click Close to finish the installation (Figure 10).
Figure 10: Install Complete
2.2.3
Installer Features
The SmartCAT Installer installs several Start Menu shortcuts, including links to the Quick Start Guide, Update, and Home pages. It also creates a SmartCAT icon at the top of the Start menu, and any other SmartCAT utilities will go into this program group as well.
Figure 11: SmartCAT in Start Menu
Icons and file associations The installer establishes the Work Directory as a System folder with a recognizable icon that will appear throughout Windows (in some of the smaller views it just looks like a green cheetah face). The installer also makes a shortcut to the work directory on the Desktop. It will also remove any other SmartCAT shortcuts (e.g. SmartCAT_Beta, SmartCAT_Update, etc.), since the main SmartCAT shortcut is all you need. Also, the installer establishes the work directory in the user's "Places Bar". Other types of SmartCAT files get their own icons as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 12: SmartCAT Icons
10
Figure 13: Icons and File Associations
Send To SC Work Directory Send To SC Work Directory is available from the right-click menu. Use this to copy a file from anywhere on your computer (e.g. My Documents) to your Work Directory.
SmartCAT Relocalizer Utility

This can be found in C:\SmartCAT\Utils. When run, it will re-establish all of the file associations, set up the registry Figure 15: SmartCAT appropriately, set up the work Relocalizer directory, etc. This utility is Figure 14: Send to SC Work Directory w/ Right-Click extremely handy if you back up your SmartCAT directory and copy it onto another computer, or if you log into Windows under a different user name.
2.3
Licensing SmartCAT
Follow the following steps to obtain the license key for your software: 1) Copy the Reference Code number into an e-mail. 2) Address the e-mail to support@cheetahinternational.com. 3) You will receive an e-mail back with a License key number. 4) Copy the License key number in the box and click the OK button. The License Key only needs to be entered once. From this point forward you can double-click on the desktop icon and run SmartCAT.
License key emails are processed only during the hours of 7 AM and 10 PM mountain time, Monday through Friday.
11
2.3.1
Licensing over the phone
You can register SmartCAT via the telephone if you do not have access to e-mail. Call 800869-6986, option 2, when you are ready to enter the License Code, and we'll get you taken care of.
2.3.2
Licensing Process
1) Double-click on the SmartCAT icon appearing on the Windows Desktop. 2) SmartCAT automatically creates a user directory for you. 3) After creating the user directory, the SmartCAT for Windows dialog box opens: 4) The registration screen displays two fields: a. A 24-digit number called the registration Reference Code.
Figure 16: Registration Screen
b. The second field is for the registration License Key. 5) Email the Reference Code to support@cheetahinternational.com or call the technical support telephone number, (800) 869-6986 x2 to receive your unique license key. Have the 24-digit number available when calling, as well as your System Number. You need both numbers for licensing and registration confirmation. 6) After registration is complete, the main menu pops up and you are ready to get started. See Section 4.2.2 for more on the main menu.
12
2.4
Uninstalling SmartCAT
We recommend technical assistance with the termination code in order to be able to re-license SmartCAT later. Call the technical support hot line at 1-800-869-6986 x2.
EXTREMELY IMPORTANT! BE SURE IMPORTANT FILES ARE BACKED UP PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE UNINSTALL PROCEDURE. ONCE THE RECYCLE BIN IS EMPTIED, FILES AND FOLDERS ARE UNRECOVERABLE.
IMPORTANT: Always read the procedures thoroughly and understand them first before performing them. Failure to read and understand all steps can result in permanent deletion of important files such as transcripts and dictionaries. Back up important files. Once the procedure is completed, Cheetah International Inc. cannot assist in recovering files that were not backed up. If you need assistance, contact Cheetah International technical support. To permanently remove SmartCAT and the license, perform the following procedure:
2.4.1
Terminating The License
1) Open the License Manager by clicking on Setup [Alt+S] License Manager [M]. 2) Click License [Alt+L] Terminate [T]. (Figure 17) 3) The Terminate Products dialog box appears. (Figure 18)
2
Figure 17: Terminate License Option
Figure 18: Terminate SmartCAT License
4) Click Terminate. 5) You are asked if you're sure you wish to terminate the license. Select Yes or No.
(Figure 19) Figure 19: Terminate Confirmation Dialog
13
6) A second window appears giving you one last chance to back out. If you are absolutely sure, click OK. 7) A third window appears with a 40-digit termination code. Call or e-mail Technical Support and give us this number. We will confirm and record the license termination. This is required should you desire to re-license SmartCAT on the same computer or if you install SmartCAT on another computer. (Figure 20)
Figure 20: Termination Code Dialog
8) Click OK and the license is permanently terminated. SmartCAT will not run on this computer unless a new license code is generated.
2.4.2
Removing SmartCAT From The Computer
1) Be sure SmartCAT is not running. If it is, save and close any open transcripts or dictionaries. 2) Make backups of your working directories. (During uninstall, the uninstaller will move your work directory to the desktop, just in case you need the files for later.) 3) At the Windows Desktop, click Start [Windows Key] Settings [S] Control Panel[C] (or Control Panel from the XP-Style Menu) In the Control Panel , double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
(Figure 21)
4) Scroll through the list of programs until you see SmartCAT. 14
Figure 21: Control Panel In Category View
Figure 22: Add or Remove Programs Dialog
5) Click Remove. (Figure 22) 6) Follow the directions to remove SmartCAT. 7) Once SmartCAT is removed, close the Control Panel.
Uninstalling SmartCAT using the Add/Remove procedure does not remove your folder of files. It only removes the SmartCAT program. Your files are left intact.
2.5
Moving a license between computers
Source computer: The computer that currently has the active SmartCAT license on it. Destination computer: The computer to which you would like to move the license. Example: You are using SmartCAT on your desktop computer at home, and you want to temporarily transfer your license to your laptop so you can take it to work. In this case, the source computer is your desktop computer, and the destination computer is your laptop. 1) Ensure that SmartCAT is installed on the Destination computer. When you Figure 23: Move License Registration double-click the SmartCAT icon, you will get a pop-up screen with a 24digit reference code and a space for a license key. Carefully write down the 24-digit reference code and double-check it, but leave the window open. (Figure 23) 2) Take the reference code to the Source computer. Ensure that SmartCAT is not running. Run the Sheriff License Administrator (Start [Windows Key] All Programs [P] SmartCAT [S] License Tools [L then Enter]). (Figure 24)
Figure 24: Sheriff Administrator
15
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 3) Click License [Alt+L] Move [M]. (Figure 25)
4) Select the proper software from the list under Product Name. (There is most likely only one, and it is most likely labeled SmartCAT for Windows). Click the Move button. (Figure 26)
Figure 25: License Move Option
Figure 26: Move Licence Dialog
(Note: 'licence' is spelled that way intentionally, as Sheriff is a Canadian program.) 5) A new window will pop up. You will be prompted to enter the 24-digit reference code from the Destination computer. Carefully enter it and click Generate. Carefully write down and double-check the 40-digit License Key that is now displayed. After this point, SmartCAT will no longer be operational on the Source computer. Leave the window open until you are certain the process is completed successfully.
Figure 27: Move License Reference Code Dialog
6) Return to the Destination computer and enter the 40-digit license key in the proper box. Double-check it, and then hit OK. SmartCAT will now be operational on the Destination computer. To switch the license back to the first computer, simply repeat the process switching the Source and Destination computer.
16
CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING SMARTCAT
CHAPTER 3
Configuring SmartCAT
You must configure and set up SmartCAT in order to work efficiently. Important items such as the steno writer you use and the port its connected to, if you output to a CIC (Computer Integrated Courtroom) program such as CaseView, and style sheets are just a few of the items you need to consider. The following pages describe many of the items requiring set up prior to using SmartCAT for the first time. Style Sheets have many options to set and require a chapter of their own. Chapter 5 covers Style Sheets in detail.
In This Chapter...
3.1 Your Steno Writer ......................................................................................................... 18 3.2 The Setup Menu ............................................................................................................ 18 3.3 Printer Setup ................................................................................................................. 20 3.4 WordNet Setup .............................................................................................................. 21
17
3.1
Your Steno Writer
Since you'll probably be using a steno machine to write the raw notes into SmartCAT, you want to set it up first thing. To start a Realtime session, SmartCAT must know the type of steno machine you use and where it is connected to your computer. Your computer may also have an interface port known as a Universal Serial Bus (USB). The USB port could be in addition to the serial ports, or may have replaced the serial ports altogether on the latest computers. If so, it may be possible to use the USB port with an adapter in order to use the steno machine. If youre using Windows XP/Vista/7 with a newer computer, you may not have any serial ports available. You must use a USB adapter to provide the necessary connection for your steno machine. Realtime is covered in depth in Chapter 8. Some computers (mostly laptops) also use another type of port, the PCMCIA. Adapters that fit into this port look like thick credit cards. Adapters are made for many types of connections. If you need a PCMCIA port adapter card, be sure it has the type of connection that interfaces with your steno machine. Some newer laptops come with an Express card slot instead of PCMCIA. Be sure you know what your computer will have if you are considering purchasing a new laptop.
It is best to confirm the type of ports available on your computer, and especially if you're going to purchase a new computer. If you are unfamiliar with computer ports, check with your local computer dealer to determine the best solution for your situation.
3.2
The Setup Menu
Click on Setup [ALT+S] at the job menu to access the Setup drop-down menu. To select an option in Setup, click on the option you want or press the underlined letter for the option.
3.2.1
Editing Prefs
Set your editing preferences, column display and color settings here. This is covered in depth in Section 9.2.
3.2.2
Edit Speaker Ids

Figure 28: Setup Menu
This is where you can store Speaker ID information for your Speaker ID tokens. This is covered in depth in Section 11.9.14.
18
3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5
Speller Audio Realtime Options
Set your Spellcheck options here. This is covered in depth in Section 9.22.5.
Set your audio recording / playback options here. This is covered in depth in Section 8.14.
This is where you setup your steno machine to work with Realtime, setup Realtime output, set your RealEdit dictionary and more. This is covered in depth in Section 8.3.
3.2.6
Theory Settings/Translation Options
This is where you change how SmartCAT translates strokes according to particular Realtime steno. This is covered in depth in Section 8.7.
3.2.7
Number Formatting
Numbers can be formatted according to whichever of these number formats is active. Number formats are activated either by stroking special number formatting tokens, or automatically when certain trigger words are translated. This is covered in depth in Section 8.8.
3.2.8
Hotkeys
Hotkeys are written as a series of keystrokes. When SmartCAT executes a hotkey, it does so exactly as though you had pressed that sequence of keystrokes on your keyboard. SmartCAT provides you with a list of default hotkeys which you can use, or you can create new hotkeys to meet your specific needs. This is where you would view and edit your hotkeys. They are covered in depth in Section 9.5.2.
3.2.9
Turbokeys
Turbokeys let you edit your transcripts while keeping your hands on the keyboard's home row, without frequently using the [Alt] or [Ctrl] keys. This is where you would view and edit your Turbokeys. They are covered in depth in Section 9.5.1.
3.2.10
License Manager
The license manager is a tool that is able to move or terminate your SmartCAT license. It is highly recommended that you avoid using this tool without the guidance of a Cheetah International support technician.
19
3.2.11
Logging
SmartCAT contains a logging feature which can aid in the event of an unexpected program crash or error. This menu option toggles exactly how detailed a record SmartCAT keeps of its own processes. Usually, this should be set to Normal. Do not alter this unless otherwise instructed by a Cheetah International support technician.
3.3
Printer Setup
Printer Installation
Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions for your printer. This is very important. If you do not follow these instructions, your printer may not function correctly. Most printers these days connect to your computer via a USB cable. Older printers are usually connected with a parallel cable. Check your printer's documentation to see which connection your printer uses.
Some printers do not come with the necessary cables and you may need to buy them separately.
3.3.1
After installation is complete a printer icon will be added to your Printers folder and it will become usable.
Printer Drivers Print Drivers are the software that control an installed printer. Each make and model of printer Should you have a specific may have its own unique set of print drivers. Print problem installing your Drivers allow your Windows programs, such as printer, please contact your printer manufacturer for SmartCAT, to work with your printer. Because the assistance. print drivers handle the communication between a program and the printer, programs can interact with a variety of printers. With SmartCAT, any printer can be used. The previous statement is made in general. Cheetah International has not tested every make and model of printer with SmartCAT. Cheetah International makes no warranty either specific or implied about the use of any printer with any version of SmartCAT. Specify a default printer To open the Printers folder in Windows XP, click on the Start button, point to Settings, and then click on the Printers menu option. A check mark appears in the upper left corner of a printer icon in the Printers folder. If you have more than one printer installed on your computer, the icon with the check mark is the default printer being used by SmartCAT and your other Windows programs. To change the default printer (if you have more than one installed) right-click the printer you want to use as the default printer, and from the pop-up shortcut menu, click the Set as Default Printer menu option.
20
Printing transcripts, a concordance, a keyword index, or to a PDF is covered in depth in Chapter 10.
3.4
WordNet Setup
Some versions of the SmartCAT installer include the 2.1 version of the WordNet installer as a convenience, so you may already have it installed. If you do not have WordNet installed, you can run the installer located on your computer here: C:\SmartCAT\Util\Wordnet or you can download it from Princeton's website at: http://wordnet.princeton.edu/obtain You will need to download the current version of WordNet 2.1 for Windows and install it from there. Please be sure to read the license agreement when you install WordNet. Information about using the WordNet Dictionary Lookup Tool is covered in Section 9.23.
21
22
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED
CHAPTER 4
Getting Started
It is important to familiarize yourself with SmartCAT and gain a basic knowledge of Windows. An abbreviated introductory tutorial follows, providing a quick introduction to a few of the SmartCAT commands. It contains valuable information on using the keyboard and mouse, and general information that is useful as you begin using SmartCAT. Check out Chapter 15 for general Windows usage.
In This Chapter...
4.1 The Transcription Process ........................................................................................... 24 4.2 Elements in SmartCAT ................................................................................................ 25 4.3 Managing Files .............................................................................................................. 48 4.4 Exiting SmartCAT ........................................................................................................ 52
23
4.1
The Transcription Process
Although SmartCAT is a comprehensive CAT (Computer Aided Transcription) software package, the primary function is to assist in the editing and production of finished transcripts from your electronic steno notes. Transcription from start to finish is a basic, four-step process: Reading Notes First, copy your electronic steno notes from your writer onto your computers hard drive. This moves your steno notes to a place where SmartCAT can quickly and easily work with them. It also converts the steno notes to a format SmartCAT works with. Reading notes files is explained in more detail in Chapter 7. In order to read in your steno, SmartCAT must know what type of writer the notes are from. This tells SmartCAT what format the notes are in, and what the notes must be read from (e.g. floppy diskette, flash card, or SD card). Translating Notes Once you read your steno notes into the computer, you will need to translate them into English. Translating (transcribing) is the process of converting steno notes to English text. A detailed explanation of translating notes is found in Section 7.4.
To translate notes, you need a permanent (main) dictionary assigned in a style sheet. For more information on dictionaries, refer to Chapter 11. If you do not have a dictionary already created, creating a new dictionary is explained in Section 11.3. Editing Once you translate the notes, you must edit the English transcript to resolve conflicts, define untranslated steno, enter litigants' names, correct mis-strokes, etc. The Transcript Editor is explained in full detail in Chapter 9. Output When you finish editing the text of a transcript, you will probably want to either print it out or export it as an ASCII or PDF. This is generally the final step in the process of transcription. Printing transcripts is explained in detail in Section 10.4. Exporting is also explained in this chapter, in Section 10.6.
24
4.2
Elements in SmartCAT
This chapter describes some basic concepts behind SmartCAT to help you get started. A Windows overview can be found in Chapter 15.
4.2.1
(Figure 29)
Starting SmartCAT
Figure 29: SmartCAT Icon
To run SmartCAT from the desktop, locate the SmartCAT icon appearing on the Desktop or click Start [Windows key] Programs [P] SmartCAT [S].
4.2.2
The SmartCAT Main Menu
When you run SmartCAT, the first screen to appear is the main menu. You can disable this screen- then you would go straight to the job menu. Here you can access SmartCATs main functions.
Figure 30: SmartCAT Main Menu
25
Job Menu Selecting "J" or clicking the Job Menu button from the main menu will take you to your job menu (Figure 31). If you would like to change the foreground or background color of the job menu, go to the Editing Preferences (Section 9.2.3 ).
4
Figure 31: Job Menu
Realtime Selecting "R" or clicking the Realtime button from the main menu will create a new job so that you can begin Realtime. Files in Work Directory Selecting "W" or clicking the Work Directory button from the main menu will open up your work directory as a Windows Explorer folder. This is useful, for instance, if you wanted easy access to all your SmartCAT files to archive them to a CD. Help! Selecting "H" or clicking the Help button from the main menu will open up the SmartCAT help file.
26
Dictionary Selecting "D" or clicking the Dictionary button from the main menu allows you to edit into a dictionary. Import Notes Selecting "I" or clicking the Import Notes button from the main menu opens up a window to import notes from your writer. Style Sheet Selecting "S" or clicking the Style Sheet button from the main menu opens a list of your style sheets. Quick Start Guide Selecting "Q" or clicking the Quick Start Guide button from the main menu opens the included SmartCAT Quick Start Guide. Do Not Show Main Menu on Startup Selecting this check box will make SmartCAT, on subsequent openings, skip the main menu and go directly to the job menu. This disables the main menu only at startup. You can always access the main menus functions by pressing [F10] from the job menu. If you are already accustomed to SmartCAT opening straight to the job menu, you might want to check this option. If you have fond memories of the TurboCAT startup screen, try the main menu out for a few days. You might find it makes you more productive!
4.2.3
The SmartCAT Job Menu
The job menu is essentially a listing of all the SmartCAT transcripts that are in the current working directory. In addition to editing into a job from here, you are able to move, copy, rename, delete, mark complete, etc.. The job menu also shows any job dictionary assigned to each transcript, the number of pages and steno notes, which style sheet each job is using, the date the job was created, the date the job was last edited, whether or not the transcript has an audio file, and the date the job was marked complete. Job Menu options are available in Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q]:
Editor Tab
Use check boxes to select jobs on the job menu Make grid lines invisible
Columns Tab
Here you can select which job menu columns you'd like to show/hide.
27

Colors
Near the bottom of this list you can set the text and background color of your job menu.
Job Menu Actions You can select several jobs to perform an action on (copy, mark Complete, etc.). If you have the "check boxes" option set in the Editing Preferences, you can use those. Otherwise, you can hold down the Control key and click on multiple jobs, following the Windows convention. You can also, of course, use the arrow keys and the space bar instead of the mouse. These actions can be executed with their keystrokes, through the right-click context menu, or by going to File [Alt+F] Job Menu Actions [U]. Import Notes [Ctrl+I] New Job [INS] Select/Unselect Job(s) [Ctrl+Space] Remove Selection [ESC] Select All Jobs [Ctrl+Shift+A] Edit Job [ENTER], [Ctrl+E] Translate Job [Ctrl+T] Rename [Ctrl+R] Job Dictionary [Ctrl+J] Job Properties [Ctrl+P], [Ctrl+Enter] Delete Job(s) [DEL] Move Job(s) to Folder [Ctrl+M] Copy Job(s) to Folder [Ctrl+C] Send jobs to a CD/DVD [Ctrl+S] Mark Job(s) Complete [Ctrl+K] Unmark Job(s) Complete [Ctrl+U] Select All Jobs [Ctrl+Shift+A] Open Backup [Ctrl+B] Refresh Job menu [Ctrl+W] Change Work Directory [Ctrl+D] CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
28
Import Notes This opens the Import Notes dialog so you can bring notes into a job, from what your writer had stored on a disc. See CHAPTER 7 on Reading Notes for more information. Creating a New Job There are many ways to create a new job. The simplest is from the Job Menu: hit the [Insert] key, type the name, and hit [Enter]. Selecting Jobs To interact with only one job, simply use the movement keys to highlight the job you want. To select more than one job, you can hold down the Control key while you're clicking. Alternately, you can use Control with the arrow keys, and hit the Space bar when you want to select the file you've moved to. If you decide that you don't want to work with the files you have selected, hit the Escape key to make the selection disappear. If you need to do something with all of the jobs in your work directory, hit [Control+Shift+A] to select them all. If using the Control, Space, and Arrow keys is inconvenient for you, you can display check boxes that you can click on. You can go into the Editing Preferences to change this setting. Editing Into a Job To edit into a job, hit the Enter key, or hit [Ctrl+E]. Translating a Job To translate (transcribe) a job from the Job Menu, highlight the job, then hit [Ctrl+T]. You can also right-click on the job, and select Transcribe Job from the context menu. Or, you can use the menus: click on Tools [Alt-T] Transcribe notes [R]. See the section 7.4.2 on Transcribing Notes for more information. Deleting or Renaming a Job See Section 4.3 for instructions. Job Dictionary If you highlight a job in the Job Menu, and hit [Ctrl+J], you can add or change that job's job dictionary. Simply type the name of the new or existing job dictionary, and hit [ENTER].
Figure 32: Job Dictionary
29
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED Job Properties
Hitting [Ctrl+P] or [Ctrl+Enter] from the job menu will open the highlighted job's job properties. Copying or Moving a Job to Other Folders To copy/move one or more jobs: Select the jobs in the job menu Hit Ctrl+C to copy or Ctrl+M to move Navigate to and select the destination folder Hit OK and the jobs will be copied or moved.
Sending Files to be Burned to Disc Sending jobs to your CD/DVD burner works slightly differently. First, you must have Windows XP or higher, and you must have a CD/DVD-R drive in order to burn discs. To archive your jobs to a CD/DVD: 1. Put a blank disc in the drive, and select the jobs in the Job Menu. 2. Hit [Ctrl+S]. 3. You will see a message come up near the bottom of the screen, saying you have files waiting to be written. Click on the message. 4. A Windows file browser window will appear, listing the files you've sent. 5. Click on File Write these files to CD (or Burn to disc in Windows 7). 6. The Write (Burn) Files wizard will come up. Follow the prompts to name your disc (today's date is a good idea) and burn the files onto it. 7. It is a very wise move to write the date and contents with a felt tip pen on the CD when it's done burning. ONLY use a felt tip pen to do this. Marking Jobs Complete In the job menu you can mark a job complete when you are finished working on it. To do this: Select the job in the job menu. Hit Ctrl+K or Right-Click Mark Complete. To unmark a job complete: Select the job and press Ctrl+U. Also, you can select multiple jobs and mark them all complete at the same time.
30
Retrieving Job Backups You can retrieve a job's backup copy while in the job menu. To do this: 1) Select the job and hit Ctrl+B or click File [Alt+F] Job Menu Actions [U] Open Backup [B]. 2) Select the backup you wish to retrieve. 3) If this backup is a good copy, you'll need to save it to your work directory over the original or as a copy. To do this: Click File [Alt+F] Save a copy as [A]. Change the Save In field to your work directory. Rename the job and click Save. Refreshing the Job Menu SmartCAT contains a Refresh Job Window Option under the View Menu. By selecting View [Alt+V] Refresh Job Window [W], the menu will update the listing of job files it finds in your work directory. You can also select it from the context menu by right-clicking on a job, or by hitting [CtrlW] as shown in the Job Menu's instruction panel.
Figure 34: Right-Click Job Menu Figure 33: Refresh Job Window
This option is used most often when copying files to the Work Directory while SmartCAT is open. To save time and memory, SmartCAT only checks your work directory when it displays the Job Menu (at startup or when returning to the job menu from a job). If you copy files into your work directory while SmartCAT is running, you must refresh the Job Menu in order for your new files to appear on the list.
31
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED Changing the Work Directory To change the current work directory, press [Ctrl+W], go to File [Alt+F] Work Directory[W] menu option. The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
Figure 35: Work Directory
Figure 36: Browse for Work dir
To choose a particular directory, just click on it so that it's highlighted, and then click [OK]. If you click Cancel or hit Escape, SmartCAT will automatically take you back "home" to your default work directory. We call this the "ruby slippers trick". Multiple Job Select You can select several jobs to perform an action on (copy, mark complete, etc.). If you have the "check boxes" option set in the Editing Preferences you can use those, otherwise you can hold down the Control key and click on multiple jobs, following the Windows convention. You can also, of course, use the arrow keys and the space bar instead of the mouse. Job Menu Instruction Panel The instruction panel displays the actions available to you while in the job menu. You can show/hide this panel by hitting the / key or going to View [Alt+V] show/hide instruction panel [I]. Options displayed in this panel vary depending on the job menu check box setting in the editing preferences.
32
4.2.4
The Title Bar

Figure 37: Title Bar
The screen provides a lot of information at a glance. First is the Title Bar. The title bar tells you the working directory and transcript you currently have open. The title bar indicates the currently working directory and transcript if one is open for editing. Changing to a different working directory will change the title bar. You can use this to know exactly where you are currently working on the computer. If you are editing a transcript, and changes have been made that haven't been saved yet, there will be an asterisk (*) just after the file name. If you have a dictionary in use (e.g. for making globals), that will also be noted.
4.2.5
The Menu Bar

Figure 38: Menu Bar
Below the title bar is the menu bar. The menu bar provides access to the SmartCAT menu commands. The standard menu bar options are:
33
File
Left click on this to work with directories, open, close, save, and print files.
Edit
Presents you with the various functions for use while editing transcripts, notes, and/or dictionaries.
View
Change how the transcript is viewed on the screen.
Figure 41: View Menu
Figure 39: File Menu
Figure 40: Edit Menu
34
Dictionary
Create new dictionaries, edit, merge, remove entries and more.
Realtime
Stop and start Realtime.
Audio
Control Audio functions (play, record, etc.) and setup audio options.
Figure 43: Realtime Menu
Figure 44: Audio Menu
Figure 42: Dictionary Menu
Tools
Several items here to import files, unarchive, redact, run SpellCheck, and much more.
Setup
Many options to set your preferences, including Realtime setup.
Help
A help guide to assist in answering many of your questions.
Figure 47: Help Menu
Figure 46: Setup Menu
Figure 45: Tools Menu
35
4.2.6
The Format Toolbar
The format toolbar presents you with icons to make it easy to perform several functions while editing the transcript. While editing in the transcript, select text using the mouse or keyboard, then click on one of the icons to quickly execute the function. The format icons are: Open Job
Opens your current directory to select a job. Save
Saves your current job. Print
Prints the job with your default print settings ignoring redactions.
Print with Redaction
Prints the job with your default print settings while concealing redactions. New Job
Creates a blank job. New Dictionary
Creates a blank dictionary. Open Dictionary
Opens your current directory to select a dictionary.
36
Cut
Represented by the scissors icon. This icon cuts text out of the transcript and places it on the Windows clipboard for later use using the Paste feature. Copy
Copies the selected text into the clipboard for later use with the Paste feature. Paste
Copies the text put into the clipboard into a new location. Bold
Makes the selected text bold. Selecting the text again and clicking on the Bold icon again changes the text back to normal. Italicize
Italicizes selected text. Selecting again changes text back to normal. Underline
Selected text is underlined after clicking on this icon. Clicking it again normalizes the text. Redaction Pen
Turns the cursor into the redaction pen, so you can select text to be redacted. More info found in Section 9.14.11 . The next three icons are used to change paragraph alignment: Left Justified
37
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED Makes text line up on the left side of the paragraph. Centered
Makes the text centered within the margins of the transcript. Right Justified
Makes text line up on the right side of the paragraph. The last three icons give you a quick way to find and/or replace text: Find
Type text to search for in the dialog box, then choose options on how to search, such as case sensitive, top to bottom, etc. Find Next
Continue searching for the text specified when you performed the find function. Replace
Search for, then replace text by in the text you wish to find in the first dialog box, then replace with text typed into the Replace dialog box. The last four buttons and the bar at the end are audio controls for use with recording and playing back audio from Realtime: Play
To start an audio playing while edited into a transcript, the cursor can follow along with the audio if the tag-along option is enabled. Pressing play while audio is playing will cause it to stop. Stop
38
To stop audio from either playing or recording. Pause
To temporarily pause audio from playing or recording. Record
To start audio recording while Realtime is running. Microphone volume level
This bar will move up and down to show that SmartCAT is receiving input from the microphone. The bar will turn from gray to colored when the record button is pressed.
4.2.7
Status Bar
When a transcript is open, the status bar appears at the bottom of the transcript edit screen. The status bar provides a lot of information about the current transcript loaded in the edit window:
Figure 48: Status Bar
The Page, Line, and Column numbers the cursor is currently positioned at and the total number of pages and lines in the transcript (ABS stands for absolute).
Figure 49: Page Number Line Number Current/Total
Figure 50: Absolute Page Current/Total Absolute Line Current/Total
The Steno stroke the cursor is currently on and total number of strokes in the transcript.
Figure 51: Strokes Current/Total
39
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED If timecodes are available for the current word.
Figure 52: Job Time/Audio Time
Figure 53: No Time codes
If Realtime and/or Audio Recording are running.
Figure 54: RT and REC in Status Bar
Current typing mode (Turbokey, Insert, or Typeover) and current character number the cursor is on. (the cursor will also change depending on which typing mode is the current one)
Figure 55: Typing Modes in Status Bar
4.2.8
Using The Mouse
Another feature of SmartCAT, not available with TurboCAT, is the ability to use the computer mouse. The mouse allows you to "click" on menus, options, etc. without having to use multiple keystrokes on the keyboard. The mouse may have two or three buttons on top which are tapped to execute specific functions and commands. To use the mouse, rest it on a flat surface or a mouse pad and your wrist resting on the desk surface. Put the palm of your hand over the mouse with your index and middle fingers resting lightly on the mouse buttons. As you move the mouse on the flat surface, a corresponding pointer moves on the computer screen.
In the case of a laptop, the "mouse" may be a flat pad somewhere on the keyboard. To move the pointer, you lightly move your finger on the flat pad surface. In some cases, tapping on the flat pad performs the same function as left clicking, while other keyboards have separate buttons near the pad to tap. Check your computer manual for the correct operation of the mouse.
When using the mouse, there are some terms you need to understand: Point - positioning the mouse arrow or pointer over the specific command, button, or icon. Click - tapping one of the mouse buttons.
40
Left-Click - tapping once on the left mouse button. Used interchangeably with Click. Right-Click - tapping once on the right mouse button. Double-click - tapping twice on the left mouse button. Drag - pressing and holding the mouse button while moving the pointer to a specific location, then releasing the button.
The mouse pointer changes appearance, depending on the function being performed and where the pointer is positioned.
4.2.9
Dialog Boxes
A dialog box contains one or more of the following elements: text boxes, list boxes, check boxes, option buttons, spin boxes, and command buttons. Some dialog boxes provide a set of options. These options are contained on separate tabs. For example, the Job Properties dialog box contains a tab at the top of the dialog box with the word Page on it. To the right of that tab are several more tabs; Margins, Header/Footer, Boxes/Lines, Text, and Dictionaries. To make a tab active using the mouse, position the arrow pointer on the desired tab then click the left mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, press [Ctrl+Tab]. To choose options from a dialog box with the mouse, position the arrow pointer on the desired option, then click the left mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, press the [Tab] key to move the insertion point forward Figure 56: Job Properties Dialog from option to option. Press [Shift + Tab] key to move the insertion point backward from option to option. When an option is selected, it will appear either in reverse video (white letters on blue background in these examples) or surrounded by a dashed box called a marquee.
41
4.2.10
Text Boxes
Some options in a dialog box require text to be entered. For example, if you wish to identify the Witness and Scopist, boxes to the right of Witness: and Scopist: options in the Job Properties dialog box require you to type in the names of the Witness and Scopist, respectively. In a text box, you key text or edit existing text. Edit text in a text box in the same manner as normal text. Use the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard to move the insertion point without deleting text, and use the Delete key or Backspace key to delete text.
4.2.11
List Boxes
Some dialog boxes, such as the Open dialog box, may contain a list box.
4
Figure 57: Open Dialog
To make a selection from a list box with the mouse, move the arrow pointer to the desired option and click the left mouse button. Some list boxes may contain a scroll bar. This scroll bar is used to move through the list if there are more files in the last than what the list box can appear at one time. To move through the list, position the arrow pointer on the up or down scroll triangle and hold down the left mouse button. You can also move the scroll bar up or down by clicking and holding the left mouse button down on the scroll bar and moving the mouse forwards or backwards. To select a file from the list with the keyboard, move the insertion point into the box by holding down the Alt key and pressing the underlined letter of the desired option. Press the up and/or down arrow keys on the keyboard to move through the list.
42
4.2.12
Drop-down boxes
In some dialog boxes where there is not enough room for a list box, list of options are inserted in a drop-down list box. Options that contain a drop-down list box appear with a down-pointing triangle. For example, the Open dialog box in Figure 58 contains the drop-down list for locating a directory. To display the list, click the down-pointing triangle to the right of the Look in: box. If you are using the keyboard, press [Alt+I], then press the down cursor key.
4.2.13
Check Boxes
Figure 58: Drop-down list for "Look in:"
Some dialog boxes contain options preceded by a box. A check mark may or may not appear in the box. The Editing Preferences dialog box in the Setup Menu is a good example, showing a variety of check boxes. If a check mark appears in the box, the option is active (turned on). If there is no check mark in the check box, the option is Some check boxes do not have an underlined letter. In those cases, inactive (turned off). Any number of check you can use the mouse or the space boxes can be active. For example, in the bar to check or uncheck the box. Editing Preferences dialog box, you can insert a check mark in any or all of the boxes and those options will be active. To make a check box active or inactive with the mouse, position the tip of the arrow pointer in the check box, then click the left mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, press Alt + the underlined letter of the desired option.
4.2.14
Option (Radio) Buttons
In the Job Properties dialog box, the options for Page Number Position are preceded by option (radio) buttons. Only one option button can be selected at one time. When an option button is selected, a dark circle (bullet hole) appears in the button. To select an option button with the mouse, position the tip of the arrow pointer inside the option button, then click the left mouse button.
Figure 59: Radio Buttons
43
4.2.15
Spin Boxes
Some options in a dialog box contain measurements or numbers that can be increased or decreased. These options are generally located in a spin box. For example, the Boxes/Lines dialog box contains a variety of spin boxes. To increase a number in a spin box, position the tip of the arrow pointer on the up-pointing arrow to the right of the desired option, then click the left mouse button. To decrease the number, click the down-pointing arrow.
Figure 60: Spin Box Example
4.2.16
The Context Menu
While in the editor, another menu is available, the context menu. A context menu is a menu which gives you options. Depending on where you bring it up, you can bring up the context menu you in one of several ways: You can right click. For example, right clicking on text brings up the text context menu. (Figure 64) Right-clicking in the Job Menu brings up options for that job. Right-clicking on steno notes in the window brings up the steno notes context menu.
(Figure 62)
You can also bring up a context menu with the menu key. (Figure 61)
This key can also be assigned to a Turbokey with <MENU> or as part of a Hotkey with <MENU>. For example, you could assign it to the H key to resemble TurboCAT Home menu functionality. Menu Button Display Options
Figure 62: Notes Context Menu
Figure 61: Context Menu Key
You can have the menu button set to bring up one of two menus while in the editor, one is the SmartCAT context menu (Figure 64) the other is a 'TC Home menu' (Figure 63) which brings up a replica of the home menu from TurboCAT. Set the desired menu in Editing Preferences covered in Section 9.2.1 . This option does not effect what happens when you use the mouse to right click in the document, only what happens when you press the menu key, or when you press a Turbokey or Hotkey with the menu token in it.
Figure 63: TC Home Menu
44
Context menu options:

Copy [C], Cut [T], Paste [P]
These perform the same operations as the C, X, and V Turbokeys. Note that Copy and Cut are only available if you have text selected.
Delete [D]
This deletes selected text as if you had pressed the <DELETE> key. This option is only available with text selected.
Add Header [H] (or Footer [F]) starting here
Figure 64: Context Menu
These options will bring up the 'add new header' or 'add new footer' window with the current page selected (does the same thing as [F11] or [F12]).
Para Format [A]
This will bring up the paragraph formatting option allowing you to override the indentation or other paragraph attributes (e.g. line spacing) for the current paragraph (same as the menu option under Edit).
Page Number Format [N]
This will allow you to start or stop renumbering pages, starting on the current page (same as the menu option under Edit).
Insert index entry [E]
Creates a new index entry from the currently highlighted/selected text (same as Edit[Alt+E] Index[X] Insert Entry[I])
Insert Index Mark [M]
Creates a location mark in in the transcript which lets SmartCAT know where to put indices when building them. Same as Edit [Alt+E] Index[X] Insert Mark[M].
Create Bookmark [B]
Bookmarks the currently highlighted/selected text (same as [F4]).

Spell Check This Word [K]
Spell checks the currently selected word(s). This is the same as pressing [Alt+F9].
Change Paragraph Type [G]
Allows you to select a different paragraph type for the current paragraph.
45
4.2.17
Choosing Commands
In SmartCAT, several methods are used to choose commands. A command is an instruction that tells SmartCAT to do something. You choose commands using one of the following methods: Click a toolbar button with the mouse. Choose a command from a menu. Use shortcut keys. Use a shortcut menu.
Choosing Commands On Toolbars SmartCAT provides several toolbars containing buttons for common tasks. Generally, toolbars are visible unless your system is customized. The first toolbar is the Menu toolbar. There are no icons in this toolbar, only text. Clicking on each word opens a drop-down menu. The toolbar below the Menu toolbar is called the Standard toolbar. Beneath the Standard toolbar is the Formatting toolbar. To choose a command from a toolbar, position the tip of the arrow pointer on a button, then click the left mouse button. For example, to print the transcript currently loaded in the transcript edit screen, position the tip of the arrow pointer on the Print button on the Standard toolbar then click the left mouse button. Choosing Commands On The Menu Bar The menu bar at the top of the SmartCAT screen contains a variety of options you can use to format a SmartCAT transcript or complete file management tasks. SmartCAT features are grouped logically into options that appear on the menu bar. For example, features that allow you to work with transcript files are grouped in the File option. Either the mouse or the keyboard can be used to make choices from the menu bar or make a choice at a dialog box. To use the mouse to make a choice from the menu bar, move the pointer to the menu bar. Position the tip of the arrow pointer on the desired option then click the left mouse button. To use the keyboard, press the Alt key to make the menu bar active. Options on the menu bar appear with an underline below one of the letters. To choose an option from the menu bar, key the underlined letter of the desired option, or move the insertion point with the left or right arrow keys to the option desired then press Enter. This causes a drop-down menu to appear. For example, to display the File drop-down menu using the mouse, position the arrow pointer on File on the menu bar, and then click the left mouse button. To display the file drop-down menu using the keyboard, press and hold the Alt key and F key on the keyboard for File.
46
Choosing Commands From Drop-Down Menus To choose a command from a drop-down menu with the mouse, position the arrow pointer on the desired option, then click the left mouse button. Drag the arrow pointer to the desired option, then click the left mouse button. To make a selection from the drop-down menu from the keyboard, press the Alt key then key the underlined letter of the desired option. At the drop-down menu, click the underlined letter of the desired option. If you want to close a drop-down menu without making a choice, click in the transcript screen outside the drop-down menu; or, press the ESC key twice. Some menu options may be grayed out (dimmed). When an option is grayed out, it is currently not available. For example, if you choose the Edit option from the menu bar, the Edit drop-down menu appears with several grayed out options including Undo and Find. If text is selected before the Edit drop-down menu is displayed, these options are available and appear in black. Some menu options are preceded by a check mark. The check mark indicates that the option is currently active. To make an option inactive (turn it off) using the mouse, position the arrow pointer on the option, then click the left mouse button. To make an option inactive (turn it off) with the keyboard, key the underlined letter of the option. If an option from a drop-down menu appears followed by an ellipsis (), a dialog box will appear when that option is chosen. The dialog box provides a variety of options to let you specify how a command is to be carried out. For example, if you choose File, then Open Job, the Open dialog box appears. Or, if you choose Setup, then Realtime Options from the menu bar, the Realtime Options dialog box appears. Command Buttons In the Page Setup box (Figure 65), the boxes at the bottom of the dialog box are command buttons. A command button is used to execute or cancel a command. Some command buttons appear with an ellipsis (). A command button appearing with an Figure 65: Dialog With Command Buttons ellipsis will open another dialog box. Most dialog boxes have an OK and Cancel button to accept or cancel any changes, respectively. To choose a command button with the mouse, position the arrow on the desired button, then click the left mouse button. To choose a command button with the keyboard, press the Tab key until the desired command button appears with the marquee (dashed line outline) then press the Enter key. Choosing Commands With Shortcut Keys The left side of a drop-down menu contains a list of options. Some of the options may have shortcut keys associated with the option.
Figure 66: Menu with Shortcut Keys
47
For example, the Shortcut Key, [Ctrl+V] in the edit drop-down menu, Figure 66 is a shortcut to paste text from the clipboard that was previously copied, (using the [Ctrl+C] shortcut key). To use the shortcut keys to choose a command, press and hold down the CTRL key, key the letter for the command, then release the CTRL key. Accelerators Throughout SmartCAT's menus and dialog boxes you will see certain letter underlined. These letters are known as accelerators. For menus, press the accelerator key to select that option. For dialog boxes, press Figure 67: Accelerator Sample Alt+Accelerator key to select the option. In (Figure 67), pressing [G] in the edit menu will open the Change Paragraph Type dialog box and pressing [A] will open the Paragraph Format dialog box.
4.3
Managing Files
Folders
4.3.1
In a paper driven office, files are kept in filing cabinets. In an ideal "paperless" office, files are kept on computers. Of course, there are no ideal offices, so offices usually have paper and computers.
Think of the hard drive as a filing cabinet with large numbers of drawers. Within those drawers are hanging file folders. Let's call those hanging files as folders. You put manila folders into the hanging file folders. Those we'll call subfolders. Finally, transcripts, concordances, indexes, and more are placed into those subfolders. These are the files. To stay organized in a paper office, you probably have drawers for courts, law offices, or other clients. You may have hanging files, manila folders and the paper files themselves. You can be as organized, if not better organized, using the capabilities of Windows and SmartCAT. To work efficiently in SmartCAT, it is recommended you create working folders for your clients. When you work for a specific client, all you have to do is change to their folder. All the work you do will then be saved there, making it easier to locate important files later on. Any valid Windows name for a working folder is usable in SmartCAT. One folder is automatically created for you when you run SmartCAT the first time. This folder is located in C:\SmartCAT\Users\YOUR NAME, where YOUR NAME is your computers user name (which you set up when you first get your computer. If you never specified a user name, it will likely be called owner or default.) Folders can be created anywhere on the computer hard drive; but it is highly recommended that subfolders are created within the C:\SmartCAT\Users folder. This way, it is easy to keep track of clients and jobs without hunting throughout your hard drive.
48
4.3.2
How to Rename a Job File through SmartCAT
1) Select/highlight a job on the job menu. 2) Go to File [Alt+F] Job Menu Actions [U] Rename Job File[R]. A dialog will pop up. Simply start typing the new name of the file; do not add the ".job" at the end. 3) Click OK [Enter], to complete the renaming of the job.
Figure 68: Rename Job File Dialog
4.3.3
Deleting Files
To delete a file from the job menu, select the file or multiple files to delete and press [Delete] or click File [Alt+F] Delete Job [O]. The following confirmation box pops up.
(Figure 69)
Clicking Yes will delete the job file and any associated notes. The files will be placed in the Windows Recycle Bin if later you need to recover it. SmartCAT can also delete all associated backup files. (Figure 70) It will also delete the associated audio file (if any). (Figure 71)
Figure 69: Delete Job Confirmation Dialog
Figure 70: Delete Backups Confirmation
Figure 71: Delete Audio Confirmation
4.3.4
Creating A New Work Folder
It is easy to create sub-folders for use in SmartCAT and just as easy to use them. 1) Open the SmartCAT Work Directory. The easiest way is to double-click the green cheetahface icon on your desktop.
49
Figure 72: SmartCAT Work Directory
2) The contents of the work directory folder will display. (Figure 72) 3) If you have File and Folder Tasks visible on the left hand panel, you can simply click the Make new folder button. Otherwise, using the right mouse button, right click in a blank white area of the right-hand pane. A drop-down list appears with several options. Click on New [N] Folder [F]. (Figure 73) 4) The new folder is created and the name is highlighted just next to the icon.
(Figure 74)
5) Type a name for the new folder- you can name it anything you wish- then press [Enter].
Figure 73: Create New Folder
Figure 74: New Folder
50
6) Once the folder is created, start SmartCAT and change to the folder by following the directions in the following section.
4.3.5
Changing Folders
The current drive and work folder are displayed at the top of the SmartCAT window, in the Title Bar. To change folders: 1) Click on File [Alt+F] Work Directory [W]. 2) A Browse for Folder dialog box opens, listing all the folders on the current disk drive. (Figure 75) 3) Locate the folder you wish to use. Use the [+] and [-] buttons to expand and collapse folders. 4) Click on the folder, or arrow to it, to highlight it. Press OK [Enter]. 5) The Ruby Slippers Trick: If you hit Cancel [Escape] while in the Browse for Folder dialog, you will be brought back to your SmartCAT Work Directory.
Figure 75: Browse for Work Directory
4.3.6
Sorting
After using SmartCAT for a while, your transcript list will grow larger and larger. As it grows, you may want to sort your jobs in order to locate them by certain attributes. For example, you may want to list jobs by the most recent revision date so the newest are always listed from the top down. You can sort jobs at the job menu in several different ways: Alphabetically To sort alphabetically, in ascending order (a to z), click on the Name column at the job menu. To sort in descending order (z to a), again click on the Name column. The files immediately change their order. Dictionaries To sort jobs by job dictionaries used, ascending (a to z), click on the Dict column at the job menu. To sort in descending order, again click on the Dict column. The files change their order.
51
CHAPTER 4 GETTING STARTED Pages
To sort by number of pages in the transcripts, click on the Pages column. To reverse the order, click once again on the Pages column. Notes Click on the Notes column to sort by number of notes in transcripts. Reverse the order by clicking on the Notes column again. Style Sheet To sort by style sheet, click on the Style column. To reverse the sort order, click on the Style column once again. Created On To sort by the date jobs were created, click on the Created On column. Again, reverse the order by clicking on the Created On column a second time. Last Revised Click the Revised On column to sort by revised dates and reverse the order by clicking on the Revised On column a second time. Audio
A dot appears to indicate the presence of an audio file (no dot, no audio). Sort your jobs based on whether or not they have audio files by clicking on the Audio column, and reverse the order by clicking on the Audio column again. This will group the jobs with audio together.
4.4
Exiting SmartCAT
When you finish using SmartCAT and want to exit or turn off the computer, you must completely exit the program first. To exit from the job menu, press [F10] to return to the Main Menu, then press [F10] again to exit the program. Always use Windows' Start menu, not the power button, to turn the computer off.
WARNING! Never turn off your computer while SmartCAT is running! Doing so could cause file corruption or damage to the program. If the program is damaged, it requires re-installation. If files are corrupted, there is a chance they may not be recoverable.
52
CHAPTER 5 STYLE SHEETS
CHAPTER 5
Style Sheets
In SmartCAT, there are two types of style sheets: style sheets and Job Properties. Style sheets are default settings which are copied to Job Properties when a job is first created. After its initial creation, each job retains its own unique style sheet which is called the Job Properties. Changes made to Job Properties will remain solely in the job itself. Changes made to a style sheet will not affect jobs that have already been created. In short: Style Sheets are global, Job properties are job-specific. If you make changes in a style sheet, it will apply to all future jobs you make with that style sheet (but not jobs you've already done). Changes to a job's Job Properties affect only the current job you're working in.
In This Chapter...
5.1 The "default" style sheet .............................................................................................. 54 5.2 Import TurboCAT Style Sheet ..................................................................................... 55 5.3 Applying Style Sheets ................................................................................................... 56 5.4 Job Properties ............................................................................................................... 56
53
5.1
The "default" style sheet
SmartCAT includes a style sheet template called "default". This style sheet template comes with the program and is used for Job Properties or to create other custom style sheet templates. You are not limited to the number of custom style sheet templates that can be created. To access the "default" (or any) style sheet, click on File [Alt+F] Open Style Sheet... [H]. Click on the name of the style sheet you want to open in the list box and click OK [Enter].
5.1.1
Creating a Custom Style Sheet
Figure 76: Style Sheets Dialog
The best way to create a new style sheet (or update an existing one) is to adjust a single job and then create a style sheet from it. To do that: 1) From the job menu, double-click on the Horse job. 2) File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T], or just [Ctrl+T], to bring up the Job Properties. (Figure 76)
3) (If you are creating an entirely new style sheet, you can skip this step.) Select the style sheet you'd like to change in the Active Style Sheet. Click the Apply Style Sheet to Job button. (Figure 77) 4) Adjust the Job Properties to fit your needs and tastes. Use File [Alt+F] Print Preview [V] to view your changes as you make them. Sometimes, this will involve making a change and viewing it several times to tweak the settings just so. 5) Once the single job looks just right, bring the Job Properties back up (File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T], or just [Ctrl+T), and click on the Save To A Style Sheet button. Make sure the correct style sheet is named in the little dialog that comes up, and click OK [Enter]. (Figure 78)
Figure 77: Active Style Sheet
Figure 78: Naming A New Style Sheet
Changes made to a style sheet after a job is created do not affect existing jobs using the same style sheet. Go to the Job Properties and choose the style sheet and click the Apply Style Sheet to Job button. This will reformat the transcript to reflect the applied style sheet settings.
54
5.2
Import TurboCAT Style Sheet
A useful function included in SmartCAT is importing TurboCAT style sheets. This is for previous users of TurboCAT who have upgraded to SmartCAT. The imported style sheet retains the settings from TurboCAT and can be applied to new transcripts as well as previously created transcripts in SmartCAT. To import a TurboCAT style sheet: 1) Click File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Style Sheet [S]. (Figure 79) 2) Navigate to the appropriate directory. Click on the style sheet and click Open. (Figure 80) 3) The Save As dialog box opens. Type in a name. It can be the same as the original, or you can give a new name.
(Figure 81)
4) Click Save and the style sheet is saved in your SmartCAT Styles directory.
Figure 79: Importing TurboCAT Style Sheets
Figure 81: Naming The Imported Style Sheet Figure 80: Choosing The Style Sheet
55
5.3
Applying Style Sheets
To apply a style sheet to a job already created: 1) Open the job. 2) Click File [Alt+F] Properties [T], or hit [Ctrl+T]. 3) Choose the style sheet from the drop down list. (Figure 82) 4) Click Apply Style Sheet to Job and click OK [Enter].
5.4
Job Properties
In SmartCAT, each job contains its own style sheet, otherwise known as the Job Properties. The Job Properties are created from the default style sheet, an imported Figure 82: Selecting A Style Sheet TurboCAT style sheet, or others created within SmartCAT. When a job is created, the New Job dialog box allows you to choose a style sheet. If you have created customized style sheets, you can choose from a list of them, or choose the default. You will see the name of the style sheet in the job menu.
Figure 83: Jobs and Style sheets
When the job is saved, it remembers the style settings copied from the style sheet. If you have changed the Job Properties for that job, those are saved as well. For example, when a job is created, a style sheet is associated with the job. Once the job is created, the style sheet used to create the Job Properties is listed in the job menu. The Job Properties are available for modifications to that job and do not affect the style sheet they were created from, or other jobs, even though they may have used the same style sheet. To open the Job Properties, edit into the job and press File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T] or [Ctrl+T]. The Job Properties open and the Information screen for the job is displayed.
56
To distinguish between a Job Properties style sheet or style sheet template, SmartCAT displays two types of information screens: The Info tab for Job Properties displays information for the particular job. The Info tab of a style sheet contains only the location of this template file, the default job zoom size, and the Save As button for creating a brand new style sheet.
The following pages describe setting up Job Properties. Except for the Info tab everything discussed applies equally to both style sheets and to Job Properties. To set or change job properties from inside the transcript editor, click File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T] or hit [Ctrl+T].
5.4.1
Job Properties Information
The Info tab on the Job Properties screen displays information about the transcript highlighted in the job menu or currently open in the Transcript Editor. You can view the location of the transcript, witnesses, scopists names, digital signature image, audio, a job dictionary assigned to the transcript, and the style sheet used for the transcript. The Audio field shows the location of the associated audio file. To change/specify the location, click the [] button and navigate to the audio file. See Section 8.14 for further information. The Image field shows the location of the electronic signature image file. See Section 9.19 for further information.
5
Figure 84: Job Properties Info Tab
The Info tab displays information on the number of pages, word, strokes, conflicts, and untranslates in the transcript. This is also the place to add job dictionaries, change the active style sheet, make a new style sheet from these settings, and reformat a job with changes that are made in the Job Properties tabs.
To add a job dictionary:
1) Click on the arrow to view a list of dictionaries 2) Click on the dictionary you wish to use.
To change the active style sheet:
The job does not have to be open in the editor in order to change settings and options in the job properties.
1) Click on the drop-down arrow next to the Style Sheet field to view a list of available style sheets. 2) Click on the style sheet you want to make active and click OK. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 57
5.4.2
Customizing Job Properties
SmartCAT provides a wide variety of options and settings to make working and printing with transcripts easier and more efficient. You can change properties associated with a job to reflect the requirements of judges, courts, lawyers and other clients. Page Setup Screen The page setup screen is where you set paper size, the page to begin numbering on printed pages and where the page number is located on the page. In Page setup, you:
Choose paper size
The standard business size, 8.5 X 11 is the SmartCAT default, but you can change both width and height by clicking in the spin boxes and typing new numbers to match the size of paper you are using.
Choose The Page Number
Generally, if using a cover or title page, you may want to start page numbering on page 2 Figure 85: Job Properties Page Tab and begin page numbers with the number 2. Page number begins on page represents the actual, absolute page number, so if you have renumbered your transcript to begin on page 100, and you want page numbers to begin printing on actual page 2 (page 101 of the transcript), then put page 2 in that box. To change which page and the page number to begin with, click in the boxes and type the numbers you require.
Page Number Positioning
Select one of six areas (or None) to display the page number in the printed transcript. Margin Settings The Margin tab displays settings for margin widths, columns to display and print, and the position of the columns relative to the transcript text.
Margins
Margins are controlled by clicking in the spin boxes and typing the size of the margin (in inches) that you need for your transcript. 58
Figure 86: Job Properties Margin Tab
Margins define the boundaries within where text appears on the page. For instance, a left margin of 1.00 determines that text begins one inch from the left edge of the paper. A right margin of 1.00 means text will print no closer than one inch to the right-hand edge of the paper. Margin sizes are determined by your specifications, the number and size of columns on the left and right sides of the text, and the amount of text in a header and footer. The difference between top and bottom margins should fall somewhere between 8.5 and 9.5. For example, if your top margin is 1.0 and your bottom margin is 1.0, then it is 11 (height of a page) minus 1 (top) minus 1 (bottom) equals 9. Condensed margin settings are located in the Condensed Tab.
Characters Per Line
You can specify a number of how many characters per line SmartCAT will display. If the number of characters per line is too large for the page, SmartCAT will show a warning:
Figure 87: Job Properties Settings Conflict
You can either choose to reduce the font size, reduce the left margin, or reduce the number of characters per line to make the text fit on the page.
Headers/Footers From Edge
Choose how far from the bottom or top edge of the paper for Footers and Headers to begin; the larger the number, the further from the edge. The minimum is one-tenth of an inch (a setting of 0.1).
Left/Right Margins
Determine what columns to display in the left and right margins and the position for each column. You can choose to display Line Numbers, Absolute Line Numbers, Timestamps, or the Time Elapsed. To choose the columns, select the information you want printed from the drop-down menu. For example, you can click on Starting Timestamp in First position, then Line Number for the second position, and none for the third position in the left margin. Then choose Absolute Line Numbers for the first position, Ending Timestamps in the second position and none for the third position for the right margin.
59
You can also choose the interval on which the margin printing should happen with the Every field. For example, if you only wanted to print a timestamp every fifth line, you could set it to Every 5 Lines. There are many possible combinations of positions and types of columns to display. Choose only the options you need for the transcript. If all options and columns are selected, it's nearly guaranteed that you won't like the result.
Margin Printing begins on Page
Near the bottom of the Margin tab, there is a field to set what page begins printing the margin columns. For instance, typing a "2" in the Margin Printing Begins on Page field tells SmartCAT to print the margin columns to page two and higher, and that page 1 does not get the margin columns printed on it. This is the absolute page, NOT the relative page. Headers and Footers Headers and Footers are easy to set up in SmartCAT. The Header/Footer screen in Job Properties shows six blank boxes where text is typed in depending on the position on the page where you want a header or footer to appear. For example: You want a header to appear in the center top of the page and two footers to appear on the left and right sides of the page.
Type the header text in the top center dialog box, then the first footer text in left bottom box and the second footer in the right bottom box. Use text sparingly in headers and footers, or the text could run into the transcript area of the page. To use long headers or footers, you must change the pages margin settings. For default margins and paper size, headers and footers 3 lines long or less are recommended.
Header/Footer Begins Printing on page
Figure 88: Header/Footer Tab
This option determines what page the Headers and Footers will begin printing on. This is the absolute page, NOT the relative page.
Header and Footer Tokens
SmartCAT has the ability to use Tokens in its Headers and Footers, so that Pages, Total Pages, File Creation Date and Witness will display dynamically.
60
These are accepted tokens: $P = Current Page $N = Total Pages $W = Witness $D = File Creation Date $T = Starting Timecode $O = Offset (elapsed time) and <B-> = Bold on and off <_> and <_-> = Underline on and off and <I-> = Italics on and off <SPKID1> = Speaker Ids (See Section 11.9.14) Witness can be defined in the Info tab of the Job Properties, or when the job is created. For the example in Figure 89, $P will be replaced with the current page number and $N with the total number of pages:
Figure 89: Header/Footer Tokens
5
Figure 90: Page $P of $N - Example of Token Output
Current Page will display the relative page number, but Total Pages can only show the absolute (actual) number of total pages. If your relative page number goes higher than your total number of absolute pages, you may see something like this:
Figure 91: Example of Relative/Absolute Page Overflow
In this case, SmartCAT can only report the real total number of pages. One way you could work around this is by adding the needed number of blank pages at the end of the job (if you renumber the first page to 99, add 99 blank pages), then just don't print those pages! CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 61

Multiple Headers
SmartCAT has the ability to add many headers/footers, and to print/export those headers on line 1 of the transcript.
Adding Headers/Footers
Press [F11] for a header, or [F12] for a footer. Or go to Edit [Alt+E] Header [H] (footers [R]) Add header (footer) here [A].
Figure 92: Add Header Dialog
Or you can right-click on any page and select Add Header (Footer) starting here, which opens up the Add Header (Footer) dialog.
Previous header
This will show (in the little window below) whichever header is on the previous pages (depending on which Alignment button is pressed).
Alignment [Alt+L,C,R]
Choose whether to left-, center-, or right-justify your new header.

Enabled [Alt+E]
This check box will usually be on. It just means you want to use this header at this place in your transcript. Only uncheck this option if you don't want to include this particular header in the transcript.
(ABS) Start Page [Alt+P]
This is the ABSOLUTE page number where the header should begin.
New Header
Type the text of the header in this box.

Multiple lines [Alt+M]
If you need a multi-line header (up to 3 lines), check this box. It will expand the field. If you have a 'regular' header present in your style sheet/job properties, this option is disabled.
Editing Headers/Footers
To view and edit your existing headers/footers, you can go to Edit [Alt+E] Header [H] Edit existing header [E], or you can also access them via the setup button in the MultiHeader/Footer tab of the Job Properties.
62
Figure 93: Multi-Header Setup
The Setup window has columns Page, Use, and Left, Center, and Right. The Page column indicates which page the header/footer starts on (this is absolute page number, so if you start the numbering the pages of your transcript at page 100, to start headers on page 101, you would have to select to begin on page 2). The Use column indicates whether or not the header is active or not. The Enable/Disable Selected buttons toggle this. The above example shows that this header is currently active and will print Center aligned starting on the first page of the job. The next three columns: Left, Center, and Right, indicate what text is entered for a left, centered, or right aligned header (or footer). You can have text for all three columns enabled at the same time, but if you have two or more of the same alignment enabled at the same time, each subsequent header will take the place of the prior headers. It's important to note here that if you have a header aligned a certain way, then your next header is aligned differently (for example, on the right if the previous was left), it will not automatically remove the previous one (i.e., you will have both a left and a center/right header). If this isn't what you want, you will need to insert a blank header with same alignment after the previous to turn it off. Click the Edit button to change a header (or footer) and the edit dialog box will display. (Figure 94) Here you can edit the alignment, the start page, the text, whether or not the text has multiple lines, and whether or not the header (or footer) is enabled.
63
Figure 94: Edit Current Header Dialog
Transcript Boxes The Boxes tab gives the SmartCAT user complete control of transcript boxes. If you are required to have a box surrounding the transcript, all you need are the measurements required by the State, Federal, or local agency. You can make boxes with single or double lines in any combination you wish. Line widths and placement are adjustable on the page and you can see how the box will print using Print Preview. Boxes for condensed printing are controlled in the Condensed Tab.
Position
Figure 95: Boxes Tab
In the Boxes screen (Figure 95): Type in the number, in inches, for the sides of the box. You can also click on the spin arrows to change the position of each line.
Line Type
Choose the type of line you wish to use: None, Single, or Double. Again, choose the type of line for each side of the transcript box.
Line Weight (Thickness)
Figure 96: Box Lines of Varying Widths/Thickness
64
Choose the thickness for each line of the box by either typing a number in the spin box or clicking on the up-or-down arrows to change the settings. Numbers less than 1.5 are identical; they default to 1.
Box Printing begins on Page
Set which page on which the box settings will begin printing. This is the absolute page, NOT the relative page. Text Formatting Click the Text tab to set text preferences.
Period Following Q&A
Figure 96 shows double lines on top (0 thick) and left (1.5 thick), and single lines on right (1.5 thick) and bottom (0 thick).
Choose this option to place a period after the Q beginning question paragraphs, and the A that begins answer paragraphs.
Spaces Before/After Q
In the first box, enter the number of spaces to precede your question symbol. In the second box, enter the number of spaces to follow your question symbol. If you have a period following your Q, it is counted in this setting as a space.
Spaces Before/After A
Figure 97: Text Tab In the first box, enter the number of spaces to precede your answer symbol. In the second box, enter the number of spaces to follow your answer symbol. If you have a period following your A, it is counted by this setting as a space.
Q&A Subsequent Line Indent
Determines how many spaces to indent the second and each subsequent line of your Question and Answer paragraphs.
Colloquy 1st/Subsequent Line Indent
Determines the indent for the first line of a Colloquy paragraph. The second number is the indent of all subsequent lines for the paragraph.
Continuation 1st/Subsequent Line Indent
Determines the indent for the first line of a Continuation paragraph. The second number is the indent of all subsequent lines of the paragraph.
65

Paren 1st/Subsequent Line Indent
Determines the indent for the first line of Parenthetical paragraphs. The second number is the indent of all subsequent lines in the paragraph.
Paren II 1st/Subsequent Line Indent
Determines the indent for the first line of Parenthetical II paragraphs. The second number is the indent of all subsequent lines in the paragraph.
Readback 1st/Subsequent Line Indent
Determines the indent for the first line of Readback paragraphs. The second number is the indent of all subsequent lines in the paragraph.
Readback Right Indent
Determines the number of spaces to indent Readback paragraphs from the right margin.
Bolded
Placing a check in this check box will bold every paragraph of that type.
Font Size
To change the font size of the transcript, click on the arrow next to font size and choose the size. The default is set to 12 and sizes range from six to fifteen.
Changing font size does not affect lines per page. Also note that font size is not the same as screen display size, which is described in Section 9.2.
Font Type
You can choose between Courier New, Lucida Console or DejaVu Sans Mono. This is a matter of preference. Lucida Console offers slightly darker text.
Line Spacing / Lines Per Page
Click in the drop down box to change the line spacing of your transcript. Currently, SmartCAT supports line spacing of 10 to 50 lines per page. Line spacing does not affect index spacing.
Index Spacing
Click in the radio buttons to change the line spacing in an index from single, double, or triple. Index spacing does not affect line spacing. They are independent of each other, even though both are in the same document.
Tab Spacing
Type a number in this field to tell SmartCAT how many spaces are inserted when the [Tab] key is pressed on the keyboard.
Margin Spacing
Margin spaces are set here to determine how far from the text your margin columns will appear. Spacing can be set from 1 to 99. It is recommended to keep spacing 5 or less.
66
# Lines in Page Up/Down
This is used to determine how many lines the cursor moves when pressing the [PageUp] or [PageDown] keys on the keyboard. For example, if 12 is used as the number of lines, then pressing the [PageUp] or [PageDown] keys will move the cursor 12 lines up or down. Continuing to press the keys moves the cursor the same number of lines each time. The higher the number, the more lines the cursor will move. Indexing Click the next to last tab in the Job Properties to go to the index setup. This page is where you set up indices for inclusion in transcripts.
Use
In order to use an index, the check box beside the index number must be checked. If no boxes are checked, the index will not print within the transcript.
Index Names
Figure 98: Indexing Tab
Type in the title for the index created. The text typed can appear as a centered header above the actual index. This text can be up to 50 characters in length.
There are two types of indexes in SmartCAT: standard and folded.

Standard Index
A standard index displays the page number of each indexed item.

(Figure 99) Figure 99: Standard Index Example
Folded Index
A folded index generally will contain more than two columns and will generally only display page numbers.
(Figure 100)
Figure 100: Folded Index Example
67
Setup Clicking the Setup button produces the following screen:

Number of Columns
Up to seven columns are available for each index. The columns used are counted from left to right with the letter designation starting with A. For example, in the Index Setup dialog box shown in Figure 101, two columns are chosen, and the Column Header boxes, A and B, Figure 101: Index Set Up are filled in with the words PAGE and LINE. Had four columns been chosen, the first four columns would have become active. (Figure 102) In this case, the header names for four columns are filled in, and the first active column remains A. No matter how many columns are used, A is always the first (left-most) column listed.
Column Header
After the number of columns needed is selected, the header name should be typed in that will appear at the top of that column. Each header, and the column below it, can be up to eight characters wide and the header is centered in the column. When the index is generated, the page or line number appears under the appropriate header, centered.
Column Display
Figure 102: Folded Index Setup with Four Columns
Each active column has the option of displaying page, line, absolute line, time stamp, or offset information. Select one of the options from the drop down menu for each column.
Show display numbers on 1st (not last) line
If the index text of entry is multiple lines long, checking this option will move the page and line numbers to the first line of text. Unchecking it will display the numbers on the last line of text.
"Text of Entry" Column header
This field is to put a label above the index text entries on the same level as the column headers, for example "Description" in an exhibit index.
68
The following options affect the way the index is displayed:

1st/Subsequent Indent
The first number entered is the indent for the first line of the index descriptions, while the second number is the indent for all subsequent lines. For example, if this were set to 0/5, the first line of any multiple line descriptions will be on the left margin and subsequent lines will indent five spaces, as below.
Figure 103: Subsequently Indented Index
Right Indent
The number of spaces of indentation you want the entire index to have from the right hand side of the page.
Show Headers
The Index and Column headers can be turned on or off. This is especially useful if you use special formatting (bold, underline, italics) in your index or column headers.
Show Periods
This option displays the dot leaders between index entries and their page numbers (as in the example above). When this is unchecked, the dot leaders are not displayed.
# Number Entries
This option will automatically number all of the entries in the index sequentially. Index entries can be automatically numbered with numbers only. When using this option, you can specify the starting number or tell it to use the Identifier Number.
Add A Blank Line Between Entries
Each index entry will be separated by a blank line.

Sort By Number In Text Of Entry
The index will scan for the first number in the text of each index entry and sort according to that number. This is especially useful for indexing exhibits.
Sort Alphabetically
The index will sort the entries alphabetically.

No Sorting
The index will display the index entries in the order they are found in the transcript.
Sort by ID field
The index will sort the entries by their IDs.
69
CHAPTER 5 STYLE SHEETS Dictionaries
The Dictionary tab of the Job Properties is where dictionaries are assigned for use when translating jobs, and provide access to the Theory Settings/Translation Options dialog (discussed in Section 3.2.6). Click the Dictionary tab at the top of Job Properties to move to the Dictionary Settings page.
Assigning Dictionaries
SmartCAT allows the use of several dictionaries to use for translating notes. The dictionary settings page shows which dictionaries are available for use and which are already in use. To assign dictionaries to a job: 1) Click on a dictionary in the Available column that you wish to use. 2) Click Add to move the dictionary to the In Use column.
3) The dictionary moves from the Available column to the In Use column.
Removing Dictionaries
Figure 104:Dictionary Selection
1) Click on the dictionary in the In Use column. 2) Click Remove. 3) The dictionary moves to the Available column.
Prioritizing Dictionaries
Clicking on Add or Remove does not physically add or remove a dictionary in the work directory. Add/Remove only tells SmartCAT which dictionaries are assigned for use by the job.
You can prioritize the dictionary order, telling SmartCAT which dictionaries to look at in a specific sequence. Highlight the dictionary you wish to move in the In Use column, then click on the Up or Down buttons to move the dictionary higher or lower in the list. For example: you have four dictionaries assigned in the In Use column; Demo1, Demo2, Demo3, and Demo4, in that order. You want to make Demo2 the primary dictionary to use for translating a job. Click on Demo2 to highlight it, then click Up to move the dictionary to the top of the list.
70
Do not specify your main dictionary as your job dictionary for the job. This will cause it to be listed twice. SmartCAT will generate a warning and remove the dictionary as the job dictionary if you do so.
Displaying/Printing All Uppercase
One other item in the Dictionary tab is the option to display or print in all capitals. This option tells SmartCAT to display or print the entire transcript in uppercase letters, whether it translated this way or not. Any lowercase characters will be displayed/printed in uppercase. Condensed Options SmartCAT offers options in addition to the standard setup for printing condensed transcripts (aka minis). These options are available in the Condensed tab of your job properties and style sheet. To print a condensed transcript, go to File [Alt+F] Print Preview [V] and hit 2, 4 or 6. See Section 10.4.3 for info.
Condensed Page Layout Begin printing condensed pages on page __ of the transcript
5
Figure 105: Condensed Options
Tell SmartCAT on which page you would like to start printing condensed. For example, you would set this to '2' if you want the first page to print on a sheet by itself if it's the title page.
Reset all condensed settings
Press this to reset all condensed settings back to their defaults.

Use exterior margins (with page borders)
Checked: It removes the margin from between the pages and inserts a border to delineate the pages. Unchecked: Each page is a replica of a full transcript page including margins and boxes. This is the way SmartCAT functions by default.
71

One header per sheet
Setting this will print one header per printed sheet as opposed to one header per transcript page.
One footer per sheet
Setting this will print one footer per printed sheet as opposed to one footer per transcript page.
Margin
Adjust the margin spacing around all four pages if Use exterior margins is checked. If not checked, it will adjust the margin spacing around each page. These are the only settings that affect the condensed margins.
Box Pos
Adjust the printed box position that goes around each page when Use exterior margins is not checked. These are the only settings that affect the condensed boxes.
Font Selection Automatic (largest font that fits)
When checked, SmartCAT will automatically use the largest font size that will fit. Automatic font sizes are only available when 'Use exterior margins' is unchecked.
Automatic Settings
Remove Double Spacing when checked, this will allow you to remove double spacing and do one of the following: When there are single spaced lines: Shrink the font for those lines Shrink the font for those sub pages Shrink the font for those condensed sheets Remove Double Spacing allows the Automatic font size to remove the spacing between double-spaced lines.
Manual Settings
Condensed font size set the font size manually for the condensed transcript Condensed font face set the font face manually for the condensed transcript
72
CHAPTER 6 IMPORTING
CHAPTER 6
Importing
Importing is the process of bringing something into SmartCAT from an outside source such as ASCII transcripts and steno notes.
In This Chapter...
6.1 Importing TurboCAT Transcripts .............................................................................. 74 6.2 Importing .RTF Transcript Files ................................................................................. 75 6.3 Importing ASCII Transcripts (.TXT / .PRT) ............................................................. 76 6.4 Importing Notes ............................................................................................................ 76 6.5 Importing TurboCAT Dictionaries ............................................................................. 76
73
CHAPTER 6 IMPORTING
6.1
Importing TurboCAT Transcripts
If your transcript is in a TurboCAT archive you will need to unarchive it before you can import it. Refer to section 12.2 for instructions on how to unarchive a TurboCAT transcript. 1) Click on File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Transcript [T]. 2) In the Open window, click on the arrow on the right side of the Look In dialog box. (Figure 107) 3) Click on the drive containing the file, locate the folder you wish to open, then double-click on that folder. 4) Locate the desired transcript to import, then click on that file to highlight. 5) Click Open. 6) A new dialog box, New Job, opens. (Figure 108)
Figure 106:Import Transcript Menu Option
Figure 107: Locating TurboCAT Transcript To Import
74
CHAPTER 6 IMPORTING
Figure 108: Import Transcript New Job Dialog Box
7) Fill in the information. You can type in a new name for the Job, add a witness name, scopist, and the name of an audio file if there is one associated with the job. You also choose the job dictionary for the job and assign a style sheet. In order to assign a job dictionary 8) Click OK. 9) The job is created and appears on the SmartCAT job menu. 10) Highlight the job by clicking on it with the mouse.
for the job you must type the name you wish to use as the new job dictionary, import a dictionary, or create a new dictionary prior to assigning a dictionary to this job. Please follow the instructions found later in this section to import a dictionary, or go to Chapter 11 for instructions on creating dictionaries.
11) Press [Enter] or double-click to open the transcript. You can alternatively open the transcript file by clicking on File [Alt+F] Open Job [J]. When the Open dialog window opens, click on the desired job, then click the Open button to finish opening the transcript.
6.2
Importing .RTF Transcript Files
Occasionally, you may need to import RTF/CRE files into SmartCAT. Importing these files is much like importing a TurboCAT transcript. Follow the instructions above, and after step 4, click the drop-down arrow in the Files of Type drop-down list and choose the format you wish to import. Follow the rest of the directions as above to import and open the file.
75
CHAPTER 6 IMPORTING
6.3
Importing ASCII Transcripts (.TXT / .PRT)
To import an ASCII transcript select Import ASCII transcript from the Tools menu, it will prompt you to select a file. Once you've selected a file, click Open. It will open the ASCII import tool. See the ASCII import tool instructions in Section 12.1.
6.4
Importing Notes Importing TurboCAT Dictionaries
Importing notes is covered in depth in Section 7.1.
6.5
1) At the SmartCAT job menu, click File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import dictionary [D]. 2) Click on the arrow to the right of the Open dialog box, then click on the drive where the dictionary is located. 3) Click on the dictionary name or continue clicking on folders until the proper one is located, finally clicking on the dictionary name. Change the files of type to the desired type. The options here are: .RTF, .DIC and .JOB. 4) Click Open. The dictionary imports into your SmartCAT working directory. Importing the dictionary may take a few moments as it processes. The new dictionary is automatically saved in your default work directory, UNLESS you purposely change folders to save it in a different folder other than the default.
Figure 109: Import Dictionary from File Menu
5) After the dictionary is imported, you can open it for editing, adding or deleting entries, or any other operation involving the dictionary. See Chapter 11.
76
CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH NOTES
CHAPTER 7
Working With Notes

Working with notes includes importing, splitting, extracting, translating and editing. This chapter explains the process of working with notes from beginning to end.
In This Chapter...
7.1 Importing Notes ............................................................................................................ 78 7.2 Splitting Notes ............................................................................................................... 81 7.3 Extracting Notes ........................................................................................................... 86 7.4 Batch Notes Translation ............................................................................................... 86
77
7.1
Importing Notes
To bring in Notes from any location, click on the Tools [Alt+T] Import Steno Notes [N] menu option or the File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Steno Notes [N] menu option (they both do the same thing). Notes can be imported from the following locations:
7.1.1
Files
Use this option to choose an existing RTF/CRE notes file, a TurboCAT .not file, or a Mira .sgstn note file from a folder on the computer, memory card, or diskette. Use the button to display the Open dialog box and then choose the notes file. Then click Open.
(Figure 112)
Figure 110: Import Notes Menu Option for Tools Menu
Figure 111: Import Notes Dialog Showing File Formats
Figure 112: Open Dialog showing RTF/CRE Files
78
Once you have selected the notes file, click the [OK] button to bring up the New Job dialog box.
Figure 113: New Job Dialog
The New Job dialog appears and will name the job the current date by default (or job date if available). You can now change the name of the job, such as to the witness' name or the date the transcript was taken. Make sure that the correct style sheet is selected (usually "Master") and then click the [OK] button to finish importing the file.
7.1.2
From Diskettes
Use this option to choose a notes file from a diskette created by your steno writer (not including Mira .sgstn note files). Choose the steno machine that you used to create the diskette from the drop down list. Choose the drive letter from the Drive drop down list (most likely A:\) that contains the diskette with the notes. Click the [OK] button to import the file. The Create Job from Diskette dialog box opens.
Figure 114: Imports Notes Dialog Showing Diskette
79
CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH NOTES The window is laid out with options on the left and information on the right. Here are the components: Number of Jobs on Disk The number of jobs that are on this diskette. Available Jobs Lists the jobs available on this disk. Showing Job Which job is selected and being shown on the right. Number of Files to Read How many files to read from the disk.
Figure 115: Create Job Form Diskette Dialog
If, for example, there are 7 jobs on the disk, and you want to read jobs 1 through 4 you would choose Currently Showing Job: 1 and Number of Jobs to Read 4. If you wanted to read jobs 2 through 6 from the disk, you would choose Currently Showing Job: 2 and Number of Jobs to Read 5. All of the jobs read at once will be imported into one SmartCAT job. This is used as a method of combining jobs. Read Job Pressing this or [Enter] will take you to the next step of importing notes into SmartCAT, which is New Job. Currently Selected Job Shows the notes for the currently selected job. Created On The creation date of the notes file, according to the diskette you used. This field may not appear if the diskette lists a blank or invalid creation date or your writer doesn't keep track of job creation date. You can choose to use this for the job name and/or the creation date in the job menu.
Use this date for job name
Will use the date this job was created according to the diskette as the SmartCAT job name. 80 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Use this date for job date
Will use the date this job was created according to the diskette as the SmartCAT job date. Strokes How many strokes for the current job showing. New Job The new job dialog appears will name the job the current date by default. (This will be the notes file's creation date, if you'd selected so in the Import Notes dialog.) You can now change the name of the job, such as to the witness' name or the date the transcript was taken. Make sure that the correct style sheet is selected (usually "Master") and then click the [OK] button to finish importing the file.
(Figure 116) and
After you read in the notes, the next step is to transcribe them. Help for translating notes files is later in this chapter.
7.2
Splitting Notes
The Split Notes utility lets you select portions of notes files and create separate notes files containing only the specified portions. When you split out separate notes files, the original notes file is not changed. Say you took a job in which some parts are marked confidential, or perhaps there were many different items on the calendar that day. You may be called upon to transcribe only the unsealed testimony. The Split Notes screen lets you mark specific parts of the
Figure 117: Split Notes Dialog
81
notes file and write them to a separate notes file. This lets you translate and edit only the specified testimony. To run the Split Notes utility, highlight the transcript for the notes you want to split by clicking on it. Click on Tools [Alt+T] Split Notes [S] to open Split Notes. The left side of the screen lists the notes, one stroke per line. Each stroke has a stroke number in the left margin. The cursor is a highlighted bar across the current stroke. The right side of the screen is the area where you copy selected portions of the notes file. You give each portion a name, and you can see the stroke numbers selected. The search feature allows you to type in a steno stroke and search for that stroke. There is also a check mark option to match steno strokes exactly when performing a search.
7.2.1
The Split Notes Screen
While in the Split Notes utility, you can easily move around the screen by using the mouse and/or keyboard. Press the Up and Down arrow keys to move the cursor one stroke at a time, or PageUp and PageDown to move up or down by one screen full of notes. Move to the top of the notes file by pressing [Ctrl+PageDown], to the end of the file by pressing [Ctrl+PageDown].
To select notes using the mouse, click on the first From stroke number, then, while continuing to hold down the mouse button, drag down the screen to the To stroke number. Once selected, click on the Right pointing arrow (>) on the right side of the screen to copy the strokes into a new job. SmartCAT automatically gives the selection a name of Job1. To rename the split note file, click in the Job Name box and type in a new name. Youll notice the From and To boxes automatically fill in with the first and last strokes selected. Another way to select multiple strokes is to click in the notes window to highlight the first stroke, then press and hold the Shift key and use the arrow keys to move through the notes file. Continue doing this until all strokes you need are selected. To quickly find any steno stroke or group of strokes, click in the Search dialog box. Type the steno to search for, separating each stroke with a slash, then click Search or press Enter to begin the search. When entering the steno, you can type steno, or type in English text and SmartCAT will do its best to phonetically convert it to Click on the Match Exactly check box steno for you.
option to perform a search for steno that matches exactly what you put in the search field. This will prevent a search from finding your steno that may be within another stroke.
Once youve performed a steno find, you can click Search again to repeat the find.
82
All steno from the cursor position to the first occurrence of the stroke you search for becomes highlighted. Any subsequent searches will continue highlighting strokes unless you change the cursor position by clicking once again within the steno window to select a new stroke number.
7.2.2
Marking Sections
In order to split groups of notes, you must first add (or mark) the notes to a section. You can mark up to nine sections of notes. Each section corresponds to a new notes file. To add a group of notes to a section, click on the first stroke in the group. This highlights If you have large numbers of strokes to mark in a section, you can quickly the stroke. Next, press [Shift+Down Arrow] mark those strokes by pressing and continue holding Shift while pressing [Shift+Page Down]. Pressing the the Down Arrow to move the cursor through PageDown key marks many strokes at one time, rather than one stroke per the strokes until you come to the last stroke Down Arrow key press. in the group you wish to create. The strokes are highlighted as you move the cursor. When the group of notes you want to split is highlighted, click on the right-pointing arrow of the section in which you want to add the notes. The number of the section you select appears to the right of each stroke. For example, to mark strokes 100-250 as section one, put the cursor on stroke 100 and press [S]. Move the cursor down to stroke 250 with PageDown. Strokes 100 through 250 will be highlighted. Press [1] and lines 100-250 are added to section one.
83
Figure 118: Split Notes Dialog showing Sections
If you start marking a section but wish to cancel the selection, press [Escape].
7.2.3
Naming Sections
Once note segments to split are marked, you must name the sections. The names you give to sections are file names the notes file(s) will have when they are created. To specify names for each section, click in the Job Name dialog box and type in a new name for the section.
SmartCAT automatically names each section as Job1, Job2Job9. You must rename each section if you wish them to correlate them with your original transcript.
7.2.4
Adding Sections
In Split Notes, the right side of the window displays the names of each section you have marked and the from and to strokes in each section. You can add additional note segments to a section, add whole new sections, and also remove sections. To add a notes segment: 1) Select the segment to add.
84
2) Click on the right pointing (>) arrow. 3) To remove a notes segment, click on the left pointing (<) arrow.
7.2.5
Saving Marked Sections
Once all the note segments to split are marked and you have named each section, you are ready to save the sections to files. Click OK and the individual files are saved in your working directory. The file names also appear on the job menu. To cancel the Split Notes utility, click Cancel and SmartCAT returns to the job menu.
Figure 119: Marked Sections Saved in the Job Menu
7.2.6
Transcribing Split Notes
After performing the Split Notes utility, transcribe the notes files from Steno into English and edit them.
Do not transcribe notes from inside a job. Transcribe from the job menu.
Figure 120: Transcribe Notes Menu Option
To translate the notes file, click on Tools [Alt+T] Transcribe Notes [R]. After clicking on Transcribe Notes, a window appears listing numbers and percentages of translates, untranslates, conflicts, and pages. (Figure 122) Click OK to complete the translation, then open the file for editing.
7.2.7
Additional Help
In Split Notes, as is the case throughout SmartCAT, pressing [F1] opens context sensitive help. You can also get specific help on marking strokes in sections and a list of keystroke shortcuts.
7.2.8
Leaving Split Notes
To exit Split Notes, click Cancel if you do not wish to save your work, or click OK to save the files and exit.
85
7.3
Extracting Notes
SmartCAT text files (transcripts) contain both text and the steno notes that generated the text. Do the following to extract notes from a text file: 1) At the job menu, select the text file. 2) Click Tools [Alt+T] Split Notes [S]. 3) Perform a split notes operation, but instead of selecting multiple sections, select all the notes in the file and create one notes file.
7.4
Batch Notes Translation

Identifying Dictionaries
Once you import a notes file, it requires translating to create an English transcript.
7.4.1
To translate the notes file, you must first specify a dictionary to translate against. This may already be done via your style sheet. To identify a dictionary before translating notes files: 1) Highlight the notes file on the job menu.
2) Click on File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T]. 3) This opens the Job Properties menu. 4) Click on the Down arrow next to the Job Dictionary drop-down field. You will see a list of dictionaries currently in your working directory. 5) Choose the dictionary to use for the translation by clicking on its name. Remember, do not set this to be your main dictionary! If you select a dictionary that is already set to be used (via the Style Sheet), SmartCAT will give you an error message when you attempt to start Realtime or attempt a Steno Global:
86
Figure 121: Duplicate Dictionary Error
6) Click OK to close the Job Properties.
7.4.2
Translating The Notes File
To translate a notes file: 1) Highlight the job name (that has at least 1 in the Notes column) on the job menu. 2) Click Tools [Alt+T] Transcribe Notes [R]. The notes file is translated using the dictionaries specified in the style sheet. CAUTION: If you tell SmartCAT to translate a notes file, and you see a warning message, this means the job is already translated. To cancel translation, press [N]. To replace an existing text file, press [Y]. If you have done any editing in the existing text file, pressing [Y] will throw away all of your editing changes. The Translating Window While you translate, the computer keeps track of several important statistics and displays them in the Translating window as shown in Figure 122. The numbers change as the translation process progresses, giving you an idea how far along the translation is. Once the transcription is complete, you will the Translation Complete window.
(Figure 123)
Figure 122: Translation Progress Dialog
This window displays the total number of matches (translates), the number of CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 123: Translation Complete
87
strokes not found (untranslates), the total number of unresolved conflicts, and the percentages of each. The Translation Complete window also displays the total number of pages in the transcript. Automatic [a/an] Conflict Resolution SmartCAT automatically differentiates between the word a and the word an if you write them the same way. For SmartCAT to automatically resolve this conflict, both words must be in your dictionary as two separate entries with the same steno, creating a conflict. If the word following the [a/an] conflict begins with a vowel, SmartCAT automatically chooses an, otherwise it chooses a. There are certain situations where this automatic conflict resolution does not work. These are some examples of where this vowel rule does not apply. It is an honor to meet you. It was a unified effort.
You do not need any special settings in SmartCAT for this conflict resolution to work.
You must edit these exceptions manually or phrase them together into your dictionary. Since the [a/an] resolution only works specifically on this conflict, it will not affect phrases ending in a or an, such as is a or in a. They will be properly capitalized if at the beginning of a sentence. Automatic Punctuation
Frequently, you may stroke a new paragraph without stroking any ending punctuation for the previous sentence. In these circumstances, SmartCAT will automatically insert the appropriate punctuation before starting the new paragraph. SmartCAT will automatically insert a question mark at the end of a question paragraph, and will insert a period at the end of all other paragraph types. Paragraph types are described in the table in Section 9.13.
7.4.3
Notes in Split Screen
When you create a text file by translating steno notes, or when you create a file in Realtime, the steno is embedded in the transcript file. This provides the ability to access the steno from within the transcript file. To view the steno from the Transcript Editor, press the [ESC] key. This splits the screen, with the text in the left half and steno on the right half. Refer to Section 9.12.1 for further information on editing in the steno window.
88
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
CHAPTER 8
Realtime
What is Realtime? When you write in Realtime, your steno writer is connected to a computer running SmartCAT and your strokes are translated as you write them, virtually instantaneously. Realtime translation is used in courtrooms, for closed captioning, for display to the deaf and hard-of-hearing, and more. Realtime is only available in the Professional version of SmartCAT.
In This Chapter...
8.1 Advantages Of Realtime ............................................................................................... 90 8.2 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 90 8.3 Realtime Setup .............................................................................................................. 90 8.4 Starting A New Realtime Job ....................................................................................... 94 8.5 Starting And Stopping Realtime Translation ............................................................. 96 8.6 Phonetic Translations ................................................................................................... 99 8.7 Theory/Translation Settings ...................................................................................... 102 8.8 Number Formatting ................................................................................................... 105 8.9 Oneshots ....................................................................................................................... 111 8.10 Using RealEdit ....................................................................................................... 115 8.11 Realtime Output ........................................................................................................ 118 8.12 Realtime Output Clients .......................................................................................... 121 8.13 Projectors And LCD Panels ..................................................................................... 125 8.14 Audio Support ........................................................................................................... 125 8.15 Auto-Briefs ................................................................................................................ 132
89
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.1
Advantages Of Realtime
Using Realtime, conflicts can be corrected automatically with Automatic Conflict Resolution (described in Section ). You can correct untranslates, misspellings, and other problems right from the steno keyboard. When you write in Realtime, speech is instantly displayed as text. This lets anyone viewing the Realtime screen to reference the transcript without having to wait for a printed transcript. Court reporters running Realtime can connect to computers running litigation support software, sending a transcript to one or more computers at one time.
8.2
Equipment Required
During Realtime, your steno writer is connected to a serial port (COM port) on a computer running SmartCAT. The following list is the minimum required hardware for running Realtime: 1) A Realtime-capable writer, 2) the correct cable for your writer type,
3) and a computer with at least one serial port and SmartCAT software installed. 4) If you wish to send Realtime output to CIC client stations using serial cables, you must have a second serial port. (If you are not sure whether your writer is Realtime-capable or what type of Realtime cable you need, refer to Steno Writer Features located in Section 3.1.) For Realtime, Cheetah recommends having 1 Gb of system RAM for efficiency.
8.3
Realtime Setup
Connecting the Steno Machine / Realtime Options
8.3.1
1) Make sure the computer and steno machine are OFF. 2) Turn your computer on. 3) Find and identify a serial port on your computer that is not in use. Look for a nine-pin male connector on the back of your computer. If you have none, youll need to go to a local computer store and purchase an approved USB-to-serial adapter or PCMCIA-to-serial adapter card. Contact Cheetah International support for approved brands.
90
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
4) Once youve identified the port and connected your machine to the computer, turn the steno machine on. 5) Allow the computer to complete the boot-up process, then double-click on the SmartCAT icon and start SmartCAT. 6) Click on Setup [Alt+S] Realtime Options [R]. The Realtime Options dialog box opens. (Figure 124) 7) Choose your steno machine from the list by clicking on the drop-down arrow to the right of the Steno dialog field. Highlight your machine by clicking on it. 8) After selecting your steno machine, click the Setup button next to the writer list.
Figure 124: Realtime Options showing writer choices
9) The Config COM Port window opens (Figure 125) for setting port configuration options. The COM port is where you connected the steno machine cable to the computer. On the computer, it may be designated as COM1, Serial 1, or may be unmarked. 10) Select the port (COM1, COM2, etc.) from the drop-down menu by clicking on the dropdown arrow on the right side of the dialog box. 11) Consult your steno writer manual to select the baud rate (communications speed that your steno machine is set to talk to the computer), byte size, parity, and stop bits. These can be left at their default settings. 12) Use the drop-down dialog boxes to set each COM port parameter to match those of your steno machine. Click OK.
Figure 125: Communications Port Settings
General Troubleshooting Tips for Steno Machines Here are some troubleshooting tips to try if you cannot get the writer to communicate with SmartCAT. 1) If the first COM port you select doesn't work, try selecting another COM port. Try COM2, COM3 or COM4. Next, look for another serial port on the back of your computer (if available), and go through the process again. 2) You can use the Windows Device Manager to see the serial ports available: CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 91
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
a) Go to the Start menu and right-click on My Computer. Click on Properties. b) When the Properties window opens, select the Device Manager tab. c) In Device Manager, click on the plus in the box in front of the Ports item to expand it. d) Double-click on each COM port and check its status and check for resource conflicts. 3) If you know someone using court-reporting software, try your machine on their computer or borrow their steno machine and try it with SmartCAT. 4) Have your steno machine cable checked to be sure no wires are broken. If the cable is frequently connected and disconnected, stress is placed on the cable, generally at the connector. This stress causes the small wires inside the cable to break. If another cable is available, use it to try to get the steno machine working. 5) If your steno machine still does not communicate with SmartCAT, either consult with a computer expert or call Cheetah Internationals Technical Support Hotline at (800) 869-6986, option 2 for further assistance. 6) Many laptop computers have an option to connect an external, larger screen size monitor. The connector on the back of the laptop, at first glance, appears similar to the nine-pin serial connector. They are of equal size, but the monitor connector is female and there are 15 holes in it. 7) Use the interface cable that came with your steno machine or purchase one specifically for your machine. You must use this cable or an EXACT pin-to-pin duplicate of this cable. Just because a cable fits between your computer and steno machine does not mean it has the correct pin-out. 8) If you have a computer with a 25-pin serial port and your interface cable is 9-pin, youll need to purchase a 9-pin male to 25-pin female serial adapter plug. 9) Some newer laptop computers have only one COM port available, and most have none. Adapters are available that convert the serial cable to USB, Express Card or PCMCIA. Consult with a local computer dealer to purchase an adapter. 10) The default settings for the COM port configuration generally work for the steno machine youve selected. Try the machine first to see if it works. If not, youll need to consult your manual for the correct settings. 11) The COM port and steno machine parameters must match each other in order for the computer and steno machine to talk to each other. Consult your steno machine manual for the correct parameters. 12) If you are unable to get your steno machine to work with SmartCAT, call the technical support hotline for further assistance.
92
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.3.2
Other Realtime Options
Realtime Output You may need to send Realtime text to a judges, lawyers or other computer. See section 8.11 for information on Realtime Output. Choosing RealEdit Dictionaries Using RealEdit is covered in depth in Section 8.10.
8.3.3
Connecting The Writer
Follow these steps to connect your writer to your computer before starting Realtime: 1) Turn your steno writer and the computer OFF. 2) Connect the correct Realtime cable to your writer. 3) Connect the Realtime cable to a serial port (COM port) on your computer or to a USB-to-Serial or PCMCIA adapter. 4) Turn the writer ON then turn the computer ON. 5) Enter 6-10 strokes to wake up the writer. If the writer is a Transcriptor X, press the BOLT button. Adjusting Your Steno Writer The Realtime notes display feature lets you know if your writer needs adjustment. In a properly adjusted steno writer, paper notes will exactly match what is displayed on the screen. If you see any discrepancies, the writer may need adjustment, or service. Consult the manual that comes with your steno writer for instructions on adjusting the stroke depth and pickup mechanism. Check with your writer manufacturer frequently to make sure you have the most current firmware and drivers for your writer. Also, be sure to have your writer serviced one a year.
Using most writers for Realtime cuts their battery life in half. You should use an AC outlet and the power adapter plug that comes with your steno machine during Realtime whenever possible. This is also true for laptop computers. Instead of running on the battery, use AC outlet power.
93
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.4
Starting A New Realtime Job

Prior to creating a new job, be sure your steno machine is connected and set up properly (Setup Realtime Options).
To start a new Realtime job: 1) From the main menu, hit 'R':
Figure 126: Main Menu
Or, from the job menu, click on the File New Job menu option, or hit the Insert key.
8
Figure 127: File New Job
Either method opens up the New Job dialog box. 2) Fill in information pertinent to the job, and make sure the Start Realtime check box is checked. 3) New jobs are automatically named using the current date. If it is the first job of the day, the suffix -a is added. The second job is the date and a suffix of -b and so on.
94
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
4) You can name your transcript anything by clicking in the Name field and typing the job name. After naming the job: a) Type a Witness name, if needed. b) Type the name of your Scopist if you use one. c) Click Edit Speaker IDs [Alt+I] to enter Edit Speaker IDs for this job. d) Type the name of the audio file if you will be using the audio record/playback function and want to use a different name than the job file. e) Choose a Job Dictionary if desired. f) Select a style sheet if different from the default. 5) Click OK. 6) Select a job dictionary to use for Realtime translation. 7) Check Start Realtime. 8) Click OK. 9) SmartCAT establishes communication with your steno machine. 10) If you selected an existing file, the file opens. Otherwise, a blank area appears, waiting for Realtime to begin.
To delete a stroke, stroke the asterisk key. To delete a multi-stroke entry, stroke the asterisk key one time for each stroke to be deleted. You may stroke the asterisk key as many times as necessary to delete the desired number of strokes. This does, of course, depend on your Theory Options- see Section 8.7.1. Realtime Tagalong As you are writing in Realtime the cursor will tagalong with the transcript. You can While in Realtime mode, strokes pressed on the steno machine will be enable/disable the tagalong with inserted at the end of the file. [Shift+F10]. When you do, SmartCAT will display Realtime Tagalong On/Off in the title bar (Table 1). By default, the line which the cursor is on stays in the center of the screen. This option will prevent the cursor from going below half-way down the screen so that your eyes can stay in the same position while you're writing or editing. You can turn the centering off in the Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q] Cursor Line Centered Unless in Realtime + Tagalong [Alt+G]. Editing Preferences are further explained in Section 9.2.
To familiarize yourself with Realtime, listen to an audio tape or television program and stroke what is being said.
Table 1 Realtime Tagalong Status
95
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME Simplifying The Screen For Audience Viewing
The editor screen contains a lot of information in columns, including text, line numbers, timestamps, etc. If you output to a video projection system for an audience, you may not want all the information displayed while writing in Realtime. To remove the information during the session: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Editing Preferences [E] or hit [Ctrl+Q]. 2) Click on the Columns tab. 3) Choose None for each column you do not want to display. You control the columns displayed by choosing what you want to show. Hit OK when done. 4) You may also want to turn off toolbars in the View menu.
8.5
Starting And Stopping Realtime Translation
Before you can start Realtime, you must make sure the proper Realtime writer type and port are selected in the SmartCAT Device Setup (described in Section 8.3). You must also connect your writer to your computer at the serial port you specified in the Device Setup using the correct cable for your writer type. For more information on connecting your writer to your computer, see Section 8.3.
8.5.1 Starting Realtime In An Existing Transcript

When you start Realtime in an existing text file, your Realtime text is attached to the end of that file. To add Realtime text to the end of an existing file, follow these steps: 1) Connect the steno writer.
With some steno writers, starting Realtime causes the machine to dump all or some of its stored data. This can potentially be hundreds of pages. To avoid this, always start a new job on the steno writer, or, in the case of a StenoRAM, erase the RAM before starting Realtime.
2) Give it any wake up strokes (if necessary). 3) Go to the job menu. 4) Highlight the file you want to attach Realtime text to, then open it by double clicking on the job or pressing [Enter]. 5) Click Realtime [Alt+R] Start Realtime [Enter] to begin Realtime.
8.5.2
Stopping Realtime
To stop Realtime, click Realtime [Alt+R] Stop Realtime [I], or simply hit [F10] to stop Realtime, save the file, and exit.
96
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Figure 129: Display Notes / Split Screen
8.5.3
Split Screen
Split Screen lets you view your steno notes scrolling on the right-hand side of the screen during Realtime translation. To View Steno During Realtime: 1) Create a new job or edit into an existing job. 2) Start Realtime. 3) Hit [Esc]. Hitting [F5] will shift SmartCAT's focus to the notes window. 4) When you see steno displayed, press [Shift+F10] to go into tag-along mode. The cursor tracks with text as you write. You can also set the option to display Notes automatically whenever you start a Realtime session: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Realtime Options [R]. 2) Click in the check box Enable Realtime Steno Display.
8.5.4
Timestamps
Timestamps are numbers assigned to each line in the transcript as it is written in Realtime Later, while editing, it is easy to go to a precise line in the transcript by clicking Edit [Alt+E] Go To [O] Timecodes [T], and typing in the time. When in Realtime, SmartCAT attaches timestamps to each translated word or phrase. These times are optionally displayed in the SmartCAT Transcript Editor, printed on the final transcript, included in ASCII files, or used to synchronize testimony to a videotape. Timestamps are a more accurate way to reference testimony than using page and line numbers. For example, if an attorney is viewing a rough copy of your Realtime transcript and references testimony on page 51, line 17, that testimony will probably move to a CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 97
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
different page and line number after the transcript is edited and a title page and/or indexes are added. This leaves a reference on the record that is incorrect. With timestamps, the attorney can reference the time, such as 01:04:12, which does not change, regardless of subsequent editing. Printing Timestamps SmartCAT uses the internal computer clock to timestamp your Realtime text. Using the internal clock provides an easy way to keep track of testimony because its stamped in the transcript at the same time as the time of day. To show timestamps in your final product (printing, ASCII, etc.): 1) Go to Job Properties [Ctrl+T] Margin. 2) Click left or right margin dropdown options to insert timestamps in the column positions where you want them to appear.
3) Click back to the Info tab. 4) Click the Save to a Style Sheet button, type in the name of the style sheet (new or existing), and hit [Enter]. 5) Click OK. Once Timestamp options are set and saved in the style sheet, SmartCAT uses the setting each time you run Realtime.
You may need to adjust margin settings to include timestamps and any other columns in the printed transcript. Use the Print Preview feature to view the way your transcript will print.
Figure 130: Timestamp Display in Second Position
98
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Viewing Timestamps in the Transcript Editor To view timestamps on the Transcript Editor screen: 1) Click Setup Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q]. 2) Click the Columns tab. 3) Click in the drop-down fields to choose where to display timestamps. You can choose to display Starting Timestamps, Ending Timestamps, or both.
Figure 131: Setting Time Stamp Columns
If the timestamp columns are chosen, but no timestamps appear, the transcript file most likely does not have timestamps attached. This may occur if a TurboCAT file is imported or a SmartCAT transcript is imported from a writer's disk.
8.6
Phonetic Translations
No matter how large your dictionary, or how accurately you write, you will probably have occasional untranslates. SmartCAT has a feature to let you automatically translate untranslated steno phonetically. SmartCAT compares untranslated steno to a phonetics table that you customize to your theory. A phoneticized untranslate is displayed without the curly braces that normally surround untranslates, but is highlighted. For example, if the steno /SKWREUPL is not in your dictionary, but your phonetics table has entries like: SKWR EU -PL J I M
Translation without phonetic translation produces the following: ...and you said {SKWREUPL} opened the door? CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 99
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME Translation with phonetic translation produces: ...and you said JIM opened the door?
If you used that stroke for the word gym, it would also show up as JIM, but that is much easier for the average reader to understand than {SKWREUPL}. It is a good idea to phoneticize your untranslates if anyone unfamiliar with steno will view your Realtime output. For ease of editing, phoneticized words do count as untranslates (i.e. they are cursor stops). You can easily make them return to their untranslate form by selecting Tools [Alt+T] Dephoneticize Transcript [H]. Enabling Phonetic Translations Refer to Section 8.6 for enabling/disabling phonetic translations. Customizing Phonetics Dictionaries A phonetics table is a SmartCAT dictionary file. The file extension used is .PHN. There is no limit to the amount of entries it may contain. It should be opened and edited in the SmartCAT dictionary editor. A default phonetics dictionary, default.phn, is installed with SmartCAT. A phonetics dictionary lists steno keys and their corresponding English sound. When SmartCAT phoneticizes one stroke, it might use several entries in the phonetics table.
To indicate final consonants (as opposed to initial consonants), you may put a hyphen at the beginning of the steno (as shown in the tables below). There is no special order to the entries.
100
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Sample DEFAULT.PHN Phonetics Dictionary Copyright (C)1993-2009 Cheetah International, Inc. For use with Cheetah products only.
Initial Consonants
SE SR SKWR TPH TPHR TP TKPW TK KWR KH KW PH PHR PW HR Z V J N FL F G D Y CH Q M PL B L -PLT -PLTS G GS GSZ EUFPL EUFPL -SZ FPD FPS FPG FR -PBGD SPW -TD
Word Endings
MENT MENTS ING TION TIONS ISM ISMS SES CHED CHES CHING FER NGED INT TED
Final Consonants
*F FP -PL -PBLG -PB BGS BG -TSDZ V CH M J N X K TH AEU AOU AOEU AOE AO OEU OE EU
Vowels
A U I EE OO OI O I
Table 2 Phonetics Dictionary Entry Samples
101
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.7
Theory/Translation Settings
Theory Settings
Use * for Correction With this option checked, stroking the asterisk on your writer will ignore the preceding stroke. Unchecked, the asterisk stroke is treated like any other steno stroke. Using the asterisk for corrections, the previous stroke is not deleted. The corrected steno can still be seen in your notes. When translated, the previous stroke is ignored. The asterisk key can be used as part of a longer stroke (such as /HA*F for have), regardless of how this option is set. Multiple * Delete Multiple Strokes
8.7.1
Figure 132: Theory Settings
This option corrects multiple strokes when you press the asterisk key on your writer multiple times. For example, if you mis-stroke a three-stroke word, you can stroke the asterisk three times to remove the whole word. If this option is unchecked, only the last single stroke is Don't set this option if the Use * for correction option is not corrected with the asterisk.
checked.
Treat R* and *R as Normal * Some reporters commonly stroke the /R key (either initial or final) by accident when they stroke the asterisk. Checking this option treats this stroke as a plain asterisk (as if the /R weren't there) when stroking the asterisk for correction. If unchecked, /R* and /*R are treated like any other steno stroke. */* (double *) Creates a New Paragraph This setting can only be used if the Use * for correction option or the Multiple * delete multiple strokes option is unchecked. With this option checked, pressing the asterisk twice will start a new Continuation paragraph. Number Bar Auto translates as Numbers This option automatically translates any numbers stroked using the number bar even if there is not an entry for the stroke in your dictionary. If there is an entry in your dictionary, that entry takes precedence and the stroke is not automatically translated as a number.
*/* and multiple * for delete are mutually exclusive.
102
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Automatically translated numbers are translated without any spaces between them. For example, if you use the number bar and stroke 1, 2, 3, etc., they appear as 123, not as 1 2 3. If this option is unchecked, strokes with the number bar act like any other steno stroke and appear as untranslates if they are not defined in the dictionary. Ignore Number bar in all strokes This option will ignore all occurrences of the number bar while translating notes of your transcripts, as if it was never pressed. Resolve an/and Conflict If an and and are stroked the same way, check this option. Both words must be defined in your dictionary using the same steno, and they must be the only two defined for that steno. When translating, if the word following the conflict begins with a vowel, an is automatically chosen, otherwise and is chosen. They will be properly capitalized if at the beginning of a sentence. Stitch With Lower Case Check this option to capitalize the first letter of stitched words; all others will be lower case. If unchecked, all letters in a stitched word will be upper case. See below. Checked: S-m-i-t-h Unchecked: S-M-I-T-H
8.7.2
Other Translation Options
Phonetics Options Click on a bullet option to tell SmartCAT whether to phoneticize in uppercase, lowercase, or not at all.
Phoneticize Untranslates in UPPER CASE
Choosing this option allows SmartCAT to phoneticize untranslates and displays them in all UPPER CASE letters.
Phoneticize Untranslates in Lower Case
Figure 133: Other Translation Options
Choose this option if you want SmartCAT to phoneticize untranslates in all lower case letters.
Dont Phoneticize Untranslates
Choose this option, and SmartCAT won't phoneticize untranslates. All untranslates appear as untranslates, steno and all.
103
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME Choosing a Phonetics Dictionary
While in the Theory Settings / Translation Options dialog box, you can choose the phonetics dictionary you wish to use. To set the phonetics dictionary: 1) Click on the ellipsis () next to the Phonetics Dictionary dialog field. 2) The Open dialog box opens. 3) Navigate to the folder containing the phonetics dictionary you wish to use. 4) Click on the phonetics dictionary (default extension is .phn). The Phonetics Dictionary is selected. 5) Click Open. The phonetics dictionary appears in the dialog field. Creating a Phonetics Dictionary You can create a phonetics dictionary with the following steps:
Figure 134: Open Phonetic Dictionary
1) Create a new dictionary: File [Alt+F] New Dictionary [I]. 2) Add entries to your phonetics dictionary as needed. 3) Hit File [Alt+F] Save s copy as [A], changing the Save As Type to Phonetics Dictionary, and hit save. You could also import your TurboCAT phonetics dictionary. See Section 11.1.
104
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.8
Number Formatting
You can select numbers within your transcript, either digits or written text, and change the way the numbers are displayed. Simply highlight or select the number and press # [Shift+3]. The number format dialog will come up and display the options appropriate for the number of digits selected. With Intelligent Number Formatting, SmartCAT can automatically format numbers to customize the way you want numbers to appear in the transcript.
Figure 135: Format Number Dialog
105
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.8.1
Number Formatting Options
Figure 136: Number Formatting Options
Access number formatting options by clicking Setup [Alt+S] Number Formatting... [N] or by using the Number Formatting Setup Button in Realtime Options. Numbers can be formatted according to whichever of these number formats is active. Number formats are activated either by stroking special number formatting tokens, or automatically when certain trigger words are translated (described later in this section). Disable All translation number formatting If this option is checked, none of the number formatting options in this window will work. This allows you to have your options remain saved even if you don't want to use automatic number formatting for a certain job. Always use auto-number formatting If this option is checked, it will attempt to format all numbers as 'auto' numbers if no trigger applies.
106
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Use Digits for numbers Controls when to switch from using words (e.g., ten) to using digits (e.g., 11) for automatically formatted numbers. The default setting is 11, meaning that eleven is the first number written with digits. Use Commas for 5 or more digits Simply enough, any number with 5 or more digits will be separated by commas (e.g., "10,000"). Use unit words instead of 0 starting with This setting controls when to start using a units word at the end of a number (e.g., 100 million) instead of putting the entire number in digits (e.g., 100,000,000). Phone number options With this option checked, the text in front of the area code is put there regardless of whether there is a 1 in front of the phone number. With this option unchecked, the text is only included if the 1 is there. Time Formatting Options Zero Fill hour puts a zero in front of hour numbers that are single digit. 24-hour time formats time to appear 00:00 to 23:59. Date Formatting Options Zero Fill dates puts a zero in front of date numbers that are single digit. Date separator character allows you to choose what character that will separate your date values.
8.8.2
Number Triggers
A trigger word is a word that, when translated, causes SmartCAT to automatically set a number format for subsequently translated numbers. This lets you be sure that numbers will be correctly formatted without having to write any special strokes or add any new entries to your dictionary. For example, if the word 'phone' is set as a trigger for the Phone number format, then when SmartCAT translates My phone number is... it will see the word 'phone', set the number format for a telephone number, and automatically format the number that follows as a phone number. The Automatic Realtime Number Format Triggers CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 137: Trigger Dialog
107
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
list is broken into three parts: Word, Format, and Expiration. The Word is the text trigger that causes SmartCAT to set a number format. The Format is the number format that the word triggers. The Expiration is when the number format for that trigger is canceled. For example, if a number formatting trigger is set to expire In Two Paragraphs, then after SmartCAT sees that two paragraphs have gone by, that trigger is no longer active. If no triggers are active, SmartCAT will format numbers using the default auto number format. To delete an entry from the list, select the entry and click the Remove button. To add a new trigger to the list, click the Add New button. This opens the Trigger dialog box: In the Word field, type the trigger word to add. Press [Tab] to move to the Format field and hit the down arrow to select the number format for the trigger word you entered.
Figure 138: Trigger Dialog with Format Drop Down
Then, press [Tab] again to move to the Expiration field. Click on the black drop down arrow to select the drop down menu option to expire the trigger.
Figure 139: Trigger with Expiration Drop down
108
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.8.3
Trigger Stacking
If SmartCAT sees a new trigger word before the previous trigger word expires, the two number formats will stack. This means that both number formats are active. SmartCAT will format all numbers according to the first trigger unless a number is not valid for the first trigger, in which case it will format the number according to the second trigger. You can have several number formats stacked in this way. For example, in the sentence What time did you drive past that address?, there are two potential number format triggers: time and address. If the next number you write is 1234, it will automatically be formatted as 12:34, because this is a valid time. However, if the next number you write is 5634, it will automatically be formatted as 5634 (assuming your Address trigger is set to the All Numerals number format), because this is not a valid time but any number is a valid address. Numbers formatted with the Realtime Number Formatting option are also sent to Realtime output. Check the box to turn on Realtime Number Formatting. Once Realtime number formatting is enabled, SmartCAT can automatically format the numbers you stroke in one of 15 different number formats. The table lists the different number formats that SmartCAT can use: Number Format
All Numerals As Written Auto Date Dollars Dollars and Cents Lower Case Roman Numerals with Commas Ordinal Numbers Phone Social Security Number Time Upper Case Roman Words Zip Code
Description
Formats up to 15 digits as all numerals without special formatting. For example: 1234 Turns off number auto-formatting. Numbers will be translated as they are written. Formats any number as either all text, all digits, or a combination of text and digits. Formats numbers, 3 to 8 digits, as a date. Uses the date separator and zero-fill option defined in your Number Formatting Options. For example: 01/11/69 Formats up to 15 digits as dollars. Inserts a dollar sign before the number and uses comma separators. For example: $1,234 Formats numbers as dollars and cents. Inserts a dollar sign before the number and uses comma separators. If you dont stroke cents, SmartCAT inserts .00 at the end of the number automatically. For example: $12.34 Formats numbers up to 3,999 as lower case roman numerals. For example: mccxxxiv Formats numbers with commas. For example: 1,234 Formats up to 15 digits as ordinal numbers. For example: 1,234th Formats 7-, 10-, or 11-digit numbers as phone numbers. Formats nine digit numbers as social security numbers. For example: 123-45-6789 Formats up to 4 digits as a time by inserting a colon in the appropriate position. It will not format invalid times, but will accept military time (00:00 - 23:59) as valid. For example: 12:34 Formats numbers up to 3,999 as upper case roman numerals. For example: MCCXXXIV Converts up to 15 digits to words. For example: One thousand two hundred thirtyfour Formats 5 or 9 digits as a zip code. For example: 12345-6789
Table 3 Intelligent Number Formatting
109
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
During Realtime, numbers are formatted according to whichever of these number formats is active. Number formats are activated either by stroking special number formatting tokens, or automatically when certain trigger words are translated (described earlier in this section).
8.8.4
Number Formatting Using Tokens
There are several dictionary entries that automatically format numbers during Realtime translation. When you stroke one of these number formatting tokens, it tells SmartCAT how to format all subsequently stroked numbers (i.e., as phone number, zip code, date, etc.) Before you can use these number format tokens, you must add them to your dictionary. The following table lists the number formatting tokens. You may use the suggested sample steno or any steno you want. These tokens can be added to your permanent dictionary or to a job dictionary. SAMPLE STENO
AL / TPHUPL TPHO / TPHUPL AUT / TPHUPL TKAEUT / TPHUPL TKAEUT / TPHUPL / 1# TKAEUT / TPHUPL / 2#
TOKEN (ENGLISH DEFINITION)

<#> <#none> <#auto> <#date> <#date1> <#date2> <#date3> <#$> <#$cents> <#l> (lower case L) <#,> <#st> <#phone> <#ssn> <#time> <#L> <#words> <#zip>
FORMAT
All Numerals As Written Auto Date Toggle (see following note) Date1 (see following note) Date2 (see following note) Date3 (see following note) Dollars Dollars and Cents Lower Case Roman Numerals with Commas Ordinal Numbers Phone Social Security Number Time Upper Case Roman Words Zip Code
TKAEUT / TPHUPL / 3# DZ SEPBTS HRO / ROEPL -RBGS / ROEPL ORD / TPHUPL TPOPB / TPHUPL SORB / TPHUPL TAOEUPL / TPHUPL UP / ROEPL WORD / TPHUPL SEUP / TPHUPL
Table 4 Number Formatting With Tokens
Once you stroke a number-formatting token, SmartCAT will try to format all subsequent numbers to that format until you stroke a different number formatting token. This is useful if you know that a certain type of number is coming up. For example, If an attorney asks a witness What is your phone number, you know that the next number you write will be a phone number. Before the witness gives the number, you can stroke your steno for the token <#phone>. The next series of numbers you stroke will automatically be formatted as a phone number. You can even define dictionary entries that will handle number 110 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
formatting without requiring you to make any extra strokes. For example, you can define the steno: TPOPB/TPHUPL/STPH as: phone number<?><#phone> Because the speaker is asking for a phone number, it is assumed that the next number you stroke will need to be formatted as a phone number. This dictionary entry automatically sets the phone number format without you having to separately stroke that token.
Once you have stroked a number formatting token, you cannot undo it with the asterisk key on your writer.
Some number formatting tokens will only be able to format numbers of a certain length. For example, the token <#ssn>, which formats numbers to be social security numbers, will only work on numbers that have nine digits. If you dont stroke the right number of digits for the format you specified, SmartCAT will format numbers using the default Auto number format. You can customize the Auto number format in your Editing Preferences (described in Section 9.2).
8.9
Oneshots
Oneshots are dictionary entries that perform a single editing function (such as resolving a conflict, capping the last word or deleting a word) during Realtime.
edit during Realtime if you use Oneshots. Oneshot dictionary entries can go in Oneshots often change the cursors position any of your dictionaries. They which can cause a Scopist to make editing always begin with <EDIT>, changes in the wrong place. followed by the keystrokes you want the Oneshot to execute. The syntax for keystrokes in Oneshots is exactly the same as the syntax for keystrokes in Hotkeys. In many ways, Oneshots work just like Hotkeys, except they are used from your writer. You cannot use the When you stroke the steno for a Oneshot entry, the asterisk to erase a Oneshot <EDIT> at the beginning of the Oneshot tells or to remove the stroke before it. SmartCAT that this entry is a Oneshot and to go into Edit mode. SmartCAT then executes each keystroke in the Oneshot as though you had pressed that key on your computer keyboard. Oneshots can interact with dialog boxes provided they are written in Hotkey syntax. For example, the following oneshot is written in hotkey syntax. It will change this paragraph's type to Answer. WARNING! You should not use a Scopist to
<EDIT><ALT-E>ga<ENTER>
111
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.9.1
Sample Oneshots
The following are the Oneshots automatically included with the SmartCAT software in a dictionary called oneshots-3.2.dic located in your work directory. The list of SmartCAT sample Oneshots is provided in the following tables. You may find some of these sample Oneshots useful. You can also create as many new Oneshots as best suits your needs. If you would like to use the default oneshots dictionary, make sure oneshots-3.2 is listed in the In-Use column under the Dictionary tab in your style sheet (see Section 5.4.2 ). Preceding Word(s) The Oneshots in Table 5 deal with the word(s) immediately preceding the Oneshot. Some entries are duplicated giving extra steno options. Steno
*UPBD TK*L PWA* SKWOET 1bg# 2bg# 3bg# 4bg# 1d# 2d# 3d# 4d# K*P k6# k7# k8# k9# KEU6# KEU7# KEU8# KEU9#
Function
Underlines last word Deletes last word Attaches the last two words together Quotes last word Quotes last word Quotes last two words Quotes last three words Quotes last four words Stitched that last w-o-r-d Dashes last two-words Dashes last-three-words Dashes-last-four-words Capitalizes last Word Capitalizes last Word Capitalizes last Two Words Capitalizes Last Three Words Capitalizes Last Four Words Text globals last word and capitalizes it Text globals last two words and capitalizes them Text globals last three words and capitalizes them Text globals last four words and capitalizes them
Definition
<EDIT><S-F9>Ej<C-U>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejd<BACK>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>j<BACK> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejs"s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejs"s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjss"s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjsss"s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjjssss"s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejs-s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjss-s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjsss-s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjjssss-s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ej<C-F5>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ej<C-F5>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjss<C-F5>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjsss<C-F5>s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjjssss<C-F5>s<ESC> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>jst<CTRL-K><ENTER> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>jjsst<CTRL-K><ENTER> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>jjjssst<CTRL-K><ENTER> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>jjjjsssst<CTRL-K><ENTER>
Table 5 Oneshots for preceding words
112
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Numbers These Oneshots deal with numbers and must be used immediately following the number. Steno
PH*D T*D P*D TKHRRS AEP SS T*PL TL/TL
Function
Formats last entry into $ format, e.g. 500 = $500 e.g. 1,000 = $1,000 e.g. 3,200,500 = $3,200,500 Formats last entry into $ and cents, e.g. 500 = $5.00 Puts apostrophe in for year Social Security format Time format Telephone format (with/without area code)
Definition
<EDIT><SHIFT-F9>js#$<ENTER> <EDIT><S-F9>jja$<S-F9><END> <EDIT><S-F9>jjja$<S-F9><END> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>js#c<ENTER> <EDIT><S-F9>E<C-F7><C-F7><C-F7>a'/E <EDIT><S-F9>j<C-F8><C-F8><C-F8>a-<CF8><C-F8>-/E <EDIT><S-F9>E<C-F7><C-F7><C-F7>a:/E <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>js#p<ENTER>
Table 6 Oneshots for numbers
Resolving Last Conflict These Oneshots deal with resolving the last conflict. Steno
1r# 2r# 3r# 4r#
Function
Choose first word of conflict Choose second word of conflict Choose third word of conflict Choose fourth word of conflict
Definition
<EDIT><S-F9>EN1s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>EN2s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>EN3s<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>EN4s<ESC>
Table 7 Oneshots To Resolve Conflicts
Change The Last Untranslated Stroke These Oneshots deal with the last untranslated stroke. Steno
SA*P TP*BGS TPBGS/TPBGS TWBGS THRBGS STPH* STPHFPLT T*G
Function
Deletes the last untranslate Replaces the last untranslate with the last word written Replaces the last untranslate and the next word with the last word written Replaces the last untranslate with the last two words written Replaces the last untranslate with the last three words written Changes last untranslate to a Question paragraph <Q> Changes last untranslate to an Answer paragraph <A> Text globals the last untranslate with the last word written
Definition
<EDIT><S-F9>ENds<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejx<BACK>ENsvEs<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejx<BACK>ENjssvEs<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjssx<BACK>ENsvEs<ESC> <EDIT><S-F9>Ejjjsssx<BACK>ENsvEs<ESC> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>ENr<Q><ENTER> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>ENr<A><ENTER> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>Ej<CTRL-X>Nt<CTRLV><ENTER>
Table 8 Oneshots for Untranslates
113
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Other Useful Oneshots Steno

SKA*EP KHRRB S*F KOPLD P*RD
Function
Cancel select mode Clear Auto-Briefs Windows Saves file Changes the last period to a comma Changes the last comma to a period
Definition
<EDIT>s<ESC> <EDIT><CS-B> <EDIT><F9> <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>f<.><ALT-U><ENTER>j, <EDIT><SHIFT-F9>f<,><ALT-U><ENTER>j.
Table 9 Miscellaneous Oneshots
114
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.10
Using RealEdit
RealEdit lets you edit your Realtime text directly from the steno keyboard. Using RealEdit, you write strokes on your writer, but SmartCAT interprets them as keys being pressed on your computer keyboard. To use RealEdit, a Realtime job must be running. Go into RealEdit by stroking the steno for a dictionary entry defined as <START-EDIT>. If you do not have a stroke defined as <STARTEDIT> in your permanent dictionary, you must add one before you can use RealEdit. (Adding new dictionary entries is described in Section 11.8.2.)
WARNING! You should not use a Scopist to edit during Realtime if you use RealEdit. Editing with RealEdit often changes the cursors position, causing a Scopist to make editing changes in the wrong place.
When you stroke <START-EDIT>, the abbreviation RT in the status bar of the Transcript Editor screen changes to RE, reminding you that you are in RealEdit mode. SmartCAT stops looking at your permanent dictionaries and instead only translates against your RealEdit dictionary. To use a RealEdit Dictionary, it must first be selected in Realtime options. To select a RealEdit dictionary: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Realtime Options [R], the Realtime Options box will appear:
Figure 140: RealEdit Dictionary is Set
2) In the Realtime options box, locate the Realedit dictionary field. 3) Click the ellipses to the right of the field. [...] 4) A Realtime options dialog box opens. 5) Choose the Realedit dictionary you wish to use. 6) Click Open. 7) Click OK to save the choice in Realtime Options and close the Realtime Options dialog box. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 141: Open RealEdit Dictionary
115
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Entries in your RealEdit Dictionary correspond to keys on your computer keyboard. When you stroke an entry in the REALEDIT.DIC dictionary, SmartCAT interprets that stroke as though you pressed a key on your computer keyboard. For example, when you are in RealEdit mode and you stroke A (assuming you are using SmartCATs sample REALEDIT-3.2.RED dictionary), SmartCAT translates that as the letter 'a'. This is interpreted as though you pressed the A key on your keyboard. To return to normal Realtime, stroke the steno for an entry in your RealEdit dictionary defined as <START-REALTIME>. (In the sample RealEdit Dictionary, stroke the steno /RT to return to Realtime) SmartCAT returns to using your permanent dictionaries.
8.10.1
The RealEdit Dictionary
The syntax for keystrokes in the REALEDIT-3.2.RED dictionary is exactly the same as the syntax for keystrokes in Hotkeys. To use SmartCATs sample RealEdit Dictionary, or any dictionary, you must define the dictionary in Realtime Options as discussed before. The sample dictionary, REALEDIT-3.2.RED, is located in your user directory, and a backup is in C:\SmartCAT\Demo.
IMPORTANT! Your RealEdit dictionary must have at least one entry defined as <START-REALTIME>. That stroke is the only way, short of stopping Realtime, to return to normal Realtime from RealEdit.
The following entries are included in the sample RealEdit Dictionary installed with your SmartCAT software. You can change the steno to best match your steno theory.
WARNING! You cannot have conflicts in the RealEdit dictionary. If you do, both entries are ignored. You can only have single-stroke definitions in the RealEdit dictionary.
116
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.10.2
Sample RealEdit Dictionary REALEDIT-3.2.DIC

Steno
#e# #eu# #u# * *E *EU *U *UP -RBGS 0# 0## 1# 1## 1#e# 1kwr## 1r## 2# 23## 23h## 2k# 2k3w## 3# 3## 34## 3w## 4# 4## 4r## 5# 5## 6# 7# 8# 9# A A* APLSD DZ E EPBT EU
Definition
<ALT-E> <ALT-I> <ALT-U> <BACK> E I U <PGUP> , 0 <ALT-O> 1 <ALT-S> <ALT-Z> <ALT-J> <ALT-V> 2 <ALT-F> <ALT-N> <ALT-D> <ALT-G> 3 <ALT-P> <ALT-M> <ALT-B> 4 <ALT-H> <ALT-L> 5 <ALT-A> 6 7 8 9 a A & $ e <ENTER> i
Steno
O* P P* PH PH* PHEPB PAOEUP POS PRE*PB PREPB PW PW* PWRA*BG PWRABG R R* RT S S* S*E S*EPBT SE SKAP SKWR SKWR* SPA SPAE*US SPEL SR SR* STPH T T* TAB TAOEUP TE*PB TEULD TK TK* TKO*UPB TKOUPB
Definition
O p P m M <MENU> | ' ) ( b B > < r R <START-REALTIME> s S Z % z <ESC> j J <SPACE> ^ <ALT-F9> v V ? t T <TAB> <CTRL-F4> <F10> ~ d D <PGDN> <DOWN>
117
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME Steno

FPLT H H* HAOEUF HR HR* K K* KAP KO*L KOL KP KP* KR KR* KW KW* KWOET KWR KWR* O
Definition
. h H l L k K <CTRL-K> ; : x X c C q Q " y Y o
Steno
TKPW TKPW* TP TP* TPH TPH* TPHUPL TURB U UP W W* k## k3## kr## kw## kwr## r## t## w##
Definition
g G f F n N # <SHIFT-F9> u <UP> w W <ALT-K> <ALT-X> <ALT-C> <ALT-Q> <ALT-Y> <ALT-R> <ALT-T> <ALT-W>
Table 10 RealEdit Dictionary Sample Entries
8.11
Realtime Output
IMPORTANT: SmartCAT will show an error message if it cannot connect to an output system when Output is enabled. Even though it cannot connect to the output system, Realtime input will start after hitting [OK], as though no Realtime output option was selected. Still, it is best to disable Realtime output if you're not using it, by unchecking the "enable Realtime output" check box.
Figure 142: Realtime Output Failed
8.11.1
Setting Up Realtime Output
Using special CIC (Computer Integrated Courtroom) equipment, SmartCAT can send Realtime text to other computers in the room. As your steno is translated into English and displayed in Realtime by SmartCAT, the text is simultaneously transmitted to each client computer. To output to someone's litigation software:
118
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
1. To set up SmartCAT to output to litigation software, click on the Setup [Alt+S] Realtime Options[R] menu option, to open the Realtime Options dialog box.
Figure 143: Realtime Options
2. Then, click the Add button in the Output section.
8
Figure 144: Add Realtime Ouput
Description This is simply your name for this particular connection. Type in whatever you'd like to call it- the name of the client, perhaps, or just the type of connection. You will need to choose a different description for each Realtime Output connection.
8.11.2
Client Format
This is the "meat" of the output: which format SmartCAT will need to send the Realtime Output in. It can be a type of software such as CaseView or Bridge, or a special destination such as the keyboard or a file. Each individual format has its own set of options, which will show when you choose that format. For information about each client format, see section 8.12 on Realtime Output Clients. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 119
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Choose the appropriate format option from the drop-down list.
8.11.3
Connection Settings
The connection setting is the medium in which SmartCAT will communicate with the Output client. Each client format (discussed above) has its own connection settings, though most formats share the same three options (Serial Port, Ethernet Port, and File). For more information on which connection settings belong with which client format, see section 8.12 on Realtime Output Clients. Serial Port The traditional connection for any kind of Realtime activity, and still the default for most of the Output formats. You can select the serial port on your computer that is connected to the client computer, and select the baud rate as well, though this is best left at the default values. Ethernet Port You can also send your Realtime Output across a network. Just fill in the host and port information; this will generally be given to you by your client. This connection is the default for the TCP/IP client format. Host: The IP address of the computer you are trying to connect to. (e.g. 192.168.2.100 or www.domainname.com) Port: The port the output system is listening on. Refer to your provider for this information. File Still a third option for most of the available client formats is to send the Output to a file. This is especially useful if you are taking a job that will be read later by your client, in whichever format they need. You can even send your Realtime data to a file that is on a remote server. Several CIC systems can read from a file on a file share, allowing you to use this option to distribute realtime output to many clients over a local network. Keyboard This connection setting is reserved for the "As Keyboard" format. The Output will be sent to whichever program you have open while you're running Realtime, as if you had typed the words in the keyboard. To aid you in sending the cleanest output possible, SmartCAT holds a few strokes from being output. You ccan set Realtime to flush its output after a certain amount of idle time, in the Realtime Options dialog. When you stop Realtime, SmartCAT will flush all strokes out to the client system.
120
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.11.4
Suspending Realtime Output to Client Stations
SmartCAT lets you temporarily suspend realtime output to output client stations while continuing to input Realtime text to your "host" computer. This feature lets you transcribe conferences "in chambers" or other "off the record" dialog without having to stop and later restart Realtime. Three dictionary entries (called "tokens") let you easily tell SmarCAT when to suspend realtime output and when to continue again: <SUSPEND ON> , <SUSPEND OFF> , and <SUSPEND>. For more information on these dictionary entries, see Section 11.9.13.
8.12
Realtime Output Clients

Total Access
8.12.1
Click on the Setup button to the right of the chosen Output option to open the Settings dialog box. Case Name: The "case name" is the subdirectory that your realtime text file will be kept in on each Total Access client computer. TAC Name: This is the file name of the realtime text file. Password: Each Total Access transcript generated can be password protected, allowing access only to authorized parties. Connection Settings: Total Access gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default. Refreshing Total Access Client Stations If you have a scopist editing the Realtime text as it comes in, or if you take advantage of breaks in the proceedings to edit the text yourself, you can easily update the text on Total Access client systems' computers. This is called "refreshing" the client systems. IMPORTANT: When you're using Total Access over a network, refreshing the client systems takes twenty to thirty seconds, depending on the size of the Realtime text file CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 121
Figure 145: Total Access Setup
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
and the type of network. However, If you are connected to Total Access using serial cables, this can take up to fifteen minutes for a 200 page file.
8.12.2
TCP/IP Output
Note that TCP/IP output is text-only; special features like paragraph types are ignored. Connection Settings: The TCP/IP format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet Figure 146: TCP/IP Setup port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Though you do have these options, it would be a rare case indeed when you used something other than a standard IP address and port number. Thus, "ethernet port" is the default.
8.12.3
CaseView
Indent Lines: Indents all lines according to the SmartCAT transcript's job properties. Allow Recipient to Save File:
Allows the Caseview user to save a copy of the transcript. Starting Page Number:
Figure 147: Realtime CaseView Setup
Useful for, e.g., the second day of a trial. Similar to the effect of the similar setting on the Page tab of the Job Properties. Send Timestamps: Displays the timestamps for the transcript in Caseview. Max Marked Lines: The maximum number of lines that the Caseview user can mark in their software. Exceeding this number will prompt an error message. Setting this to 0 allows an unlimited number of marked lines. Connection Settings: The Caseview format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default.
122
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.12.4
Livenote(RTF):
This is a legacy format, for working with older Livenote systems that used an RTFCRE format, rather than the now-standard Caseview format. Connection Settings:
Figure 148: LiveNote Setup The Livenote format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default.
8.12.5
Summation(RTF):
This is a legacy format, for working with older Summation systems that used an RTF-CRE format, rather than the nowstandard Caseview format. Connection Settings: The Summation format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default.
Figure 149: Summation Setup
8.12.6
Binder(Plain):
This is a legacy format, for working with older Binder systems that used a plain-text format. Connection Settings: The Binder format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default.
Figure 150: Binder Setup
123
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.12.7
As Keyboard (Output to a Text Program):
You can send your Realtime output to a text program, such as Word, Notepad, Realtime Coach, or any other program that you can type in. Just set the Realtime Options Output line to "As Keyboard", start Realtime, and then start the program you wish to write text into. As long as that Figure 151: As Keyboard Setup program is "focused" (in front of any other windows, such as the SmartCAT window), the text will output to that program, and show up on your screen as if you were using the computer's keyboard to type. You can even use Oneshots! SmartCAT will automatically "focus" itself when you write a oneshot, then return to the background when the oneshot activity is complete. Connection Settings: When you are sending your Realtime text to the keyboard, that is the only kind of connection you could possibly have. Thus, the "keyboard" connection is set, and greyed out so that you cannot change it.
8.12.8
Bridge
Allow recipient to save file: Allows the Realtime session to be saved on the Bridge computer. Indent lines: Lines will be indented in Bridge just as they are in SmartCAT. Send edits to client when made: When an edit is made in SmartCAT, such as text replacement or conflict resolution, the edit is sent to and updated on the Bridge computer. Refresh transcript when global changes are made: When a global change is made in SmartCAT, such as text or steno global, the entire transcript is refreshed on the Bridge computer.
Figure 152: Realtime Bridge Setup
124
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Refresh Bridge manually To refresh the Bridge output manually by keystroke, press [Ctrl+Shift+F]. Any edits or global changes will be sent to and updated on the Bridge computer. You can also create a Oneshot with this keystroke to refresh the Bridge output from your steno keyboard. Connection Settings: The Binder format gives you the option to output your Realtime via serial port, ethernet port, or to a file. See the descriptions in the Realtime Output topic for more information about each of these. Serial Port is still the most common type of connection, and thus is the default.
8.13
Projectors And LCD Panels
If you are doing Realtime for a large group, your computer screen probably isnt large enough for everyone to read. There are projectors available that connect to a computer just like a normal computer monitor. You can also use a device known as an LCD panel (also called an LCD plate or LCD palette) that sits on an overhead projector. Devices like these can often be rented at major hotels and convention centers. To get the most out of these large display devices follow the suggestions below. Dim the lights if possible. Make sure the device works properly with the computer. Most notebook computers have VGA/S-Video output connectors. For color LCD panels, allow time before the session begins to adjust the colors.
8.14
Audio Support
Overview
8.14.1
SmartCAT has the capability to digitally record synchronized audio files as you write in Realtime. You can synchronize the recorded audio with the Realtime transcript through the use of time codes, then play back the audio as the transcript is edited. Hardware Required In order to use the audio support functions, you must have the necessary hardware installed on your computer. There are three pieces of hardware required to operate the audio functions:
IMPORTANT! Your computer must have a sound card installed in order to use the audio support functions in SmartCAT. This includes any required sound drivers for recording and playback. Please check with your local computer dealer or the vendor you purchased the computer from if you have questions regarding installing a sound card and/or necessary drivers. The computer must also have a hard drive capable of holding the large audio files created when recording.
125
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME sound card microphone speaker(s)
A sound card is a specialized computer component allowing you to record and play back digital audio files. Sound cards are internal boards that may be an integrated part of the computer motherboard or an add-on board that must first be installed (if your sound Most laptops will come with all of the card is an add-on to your computer, make components already built-in, however, laptops are not usually designed for sure you have the proper drivers installed high-quality audio recording, which often to run it). results in scratchy or otherwise poorTo record digital audio, a microphone microphones, sound cards, and speakers can all be purchased to be used as addmust be connected to the sound card ons for your laptop. For suggestions on microphone input jack. Some laptop specific brands and models, please call computers have microphones built our technical support line. directly into the computer; however, it is recommended that the built-in microphone be disabled (turned off), and an external microphone used for the best sound quality possible. The sound card jacks are generally located on the back or side of the computer. Consult your computer and/or sound card owners manual to locate and identify the jacks. Plug the microphone into the correct jack prior to the recording session. Make sure the microphone volume control, called a "fader," is at the maximum position and there is a check mark in the Select check box. (Figure 153) To hear the digital audio playback, you must have at least one speaker. On laptop computers with built-in sound cards, there is generally at least one speaker installed. If not, or if the computer is a desktop computer, you will need to add speakers. Plug the speaker connector into the output jack of the sound card, be sure power is available and speaker power is turned on.
sounding audio. Better quality external
Figure 153: Recording Control Console
126
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
Audio Files Audio is recorded as a digital file in .wav format, compatible with the Windows operating system. Since files are Windows compatible, they can be played using the Windows Media Player or other programs that play .wav files, including SmartCAT.
Instead of using the built-in microphone in a laptop computer, purchase an external microphone of medium to high quality. Using the built-in microphone deteriorates the quality and volume level of audio recorded. An external microphone provides for best positioning, better quality and higher volume level.
It's important to note that audio files recorded with SmartCAT are actually a separate file from the job itself, and when you copy, back up or move the job file, you need to be aware that if you want the audio you will have to bring it along separately
8.14.2
Audio Preferences
Before you use the audio record and playback features, you should set up the Audio Preferences in SmartCAT. Click Audio [Alt+A] Setup [S] to open the audio dialog box. (Figure 154) There are several items to choose in this dialog box. Turn off Tagalong when Audio Playback starts [Shift+F10] This check box will prevent the cursor from "tagging along" with the audio as it is played. Your cursor will stay in position as the audio plays. [Shift+F10] will enable/disable the audio playback tagalong but has no effect on the Realtime tagalong. Recording Quality Select the quality of audio to record while in Realtime. The amount of hard drive space required depends on the quality of recorded audio. The higher the quality, the more drive Figure 154: Audio Setup Dialog Box space that is used. It is recommended to try Standard quality to preserve drive space. If the quality of audio is not to your liking, try selecting High or Highest.
127
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME Audio Recording Meter Visible
Choose when you would like to have the recording meter display on the toolbar. The meter indicates how much sound is being picked up by the microphone. When not recording, this bar (on the far right of the Standard Toolbar) will show gray bars; those bars show in color while audio is being recorded. Drive Statistics If you have more than one hard drive installed on your computer, choose the hard drive you wish to use. To choose the hard drive, click on the drop-down arrow, then click on the drive letter. Other Fields The rest of the drive statistics fields display the amount of drive space available and the number of hours of audio that may be recorded.
8.14.3
Recording And Playing
To record an audio file, you must first begin a Realtime session: 1) Create a new job.
Never record audio unless Realtime is running!
2) Assign a name for the audio file in the AUDIO field. (or leave it as the default). (Figure 155) 3) Start Realtime.
4) Click on the Audio [Alt+A] menu. 5) Select Record [R], or press [Alt+F5] to begin recording. When the Realtime session is complete: 6) Press [Alt+F2] to stop recording, or click Audio [Alt+A] Stop [S]. Playing Recorded Audio To play the audio file, synchronized with the transcript file: 1) Open the transcript in the editor.
Figure 155: Naming Audio Files
128
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
2) Press [Alt+F1] or click Audio [Alt+A] Play [P]. An audio file must be associated with the transcript. If there is no audio file associated with the transcript, an error message appears:
Figure 156: No Audio File Error Message
8.14.4
Synchronizing
Synchronization may be required if the audio file begins recording with a timecode of 00:00:00.00 (HH:MM:SS:FF) while the transcript records timecode using time of day (based on the computer clock). In order to do this, the file must be created in Realtime. Go to Audio [Alt+A] Timecodes [T] to open the Timecode Editor. (Figure 157) In Figure 157, the Realtime transcript (job timecode) started at 11:28:59, while the audio timecode always starts at 00:00:00:00. This is the initial sync SmartCAT will do at the beginning of audio recording. If you take a break during a Realtime session, when you resume, the audio timecode and the job timecodes may be out of sync. You can minimize this by stopping the recording during breaks.
Figure 157: Job Audio Timecodes Editor
The status bar of SmartCAT will tell you both the current job timecode and audio timecode at any point in the transcript.
Figure 159: Timecode status bar
If the timecodes become out of sync after a break in the transcript, go to the last word before the break, note the
Figure 158: Audio Timecode Editor
129
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
timecodes, then go to the first word after the break, and note the timecodes. This is where the discrepancy may occur. Open the Timecode editor by going to Audio [Alt+A] Timecodes [T], then select the offset you want to edit, and click Edit. The audio and job timecodes may need to be altered if the offset does not match up exactly.
8.14.5
Troubleshooting Audio
If you have trouble recording, playing back, hearing or synchronizing audio files, try the following troubleshooting items: Audio Not Recording Check the following items: 1) Is a sound card installed? SmartCAT requires a sound card to be installed in order to record and playback audio files. Consult a local computer store to have a sound card installed.
Check your computer time on a regular basis to make sure it is accurate. The built-in computer clock can gain or lose time, making it more difficult to locate the correct area in the transcript. Consult your Windows manual for more information on checking and setting computer time.
2) Do you have a built-in microphone or an external microphone connected? You must have a microphone in order to record audio. Laptop computers generally have a built-in microphone. If there is a built-in microphone, make sure it is working. In Windows, use the Sound Recorder to test the microphone. If it records in Sound Recorder, there is another problem. If it does not record, there is either a problem with the microphone itself or a problem with Windows and the microphone interface. If you are using an external microphone, be sure it is connected to the microphone input on the sound card, and that it is in good working condition (i.e. no frayed or broken wires, no broken connectors, etc.). 3) In the Windows audio setup, be sure the microphone input fader is all the way up and the check box Select is checked.
(Figure 160)
4) If you are using Windows 98 one of your Media Control Interface (MCI) devices may not be functioning properly. 130
Figure 160: Windows Recording Control Properties
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
a) To verify that Media Control Interface (MCI) devices are functioning properly, follow these steps: 1) Click Start Settings Control Panel. 2) Double-click Multimedia. 3) Double-click Media Control Devices. 4) Click Wave Audio Device (Media Control). 5) Click Properties. 6) Click Use This Media Control Device. 7) Click OK. 8) Repeat steps 4-5 for MIDI Sequencer Device (Media Control) and Motion Video Device (Media Control). 9) Click OK. 10) Close the Control Panel. 11) Restart Windows. No Audio During Playback If you are sure the audio recorded correctly, but you cannot hear it, try the following: 1) If you are using external speakers, check to be sure they are turned on and plugged in to the speaker output jack on the sound card.
Figure 161: Volume Control Fader
Consult your operating system manual to determine how to open the Mixer Control window.
2) Check to be sure the speaker volume control is not turned all the way down. (Figure 161) 3) Check to be sure the Windows volume control is not turned all the way down. If there is a speaker icon in the system tray of the Windows desktop, click on it to open the volume control fader. Make sure the Mute check box is not checked.
Figure 162: Audio Mixer Control
131
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
4) If you do not have a speaker icon, you will need to open the Windows Audio Mixer.
8.14.6
Audio Backup and Recovery
When you start any audio (play or record), SmartCAT spawns an external program that handles the playing/recording/saving of the audio. In the event of a unexpected closing of SmartCAT the external program notices and after a short while prompts you (if recording) to stop and save the audio or to restart SmartCAT. If you're saving audio and SmartCAT goes away, it pops open a little box telling you audio is still saving. Simply put, your audio will continue to record and/or save even if SmartCAT goes away.
8.15
Auto-Briefs
When the Auto-Brief window is up, SmartCAT will attempt to automatically make briefs for you. It scans for duplicate sets of steno, where you stroke several consecutive strokes in a row the same way, more than once. It will try to create a non-conflicting entry for it and put it in a separate auto-brief dictionary for this job. When you close the job you will be asked if you would like to save the auto-brief dictionary. It is named <jobname>-autobriefs.dic where <jobname> is the name of the SmartCAT job you are working in. It will then save the dictionary and mark the used briefs as used and any unused briefs temporary. You can merge the newly created auto-brief dictionary into your main dictionary if desired. Merging dictionaries is covered in Section 11.7.
Figure 163: Auto-Brief Window
132
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.15.1
Auto-Brief Options
Setup [Alt+S] Auto-briefing options [B] Find unused briefs in my dictionaries If this is checked, SmartCAT will search your dictionary for entries that match the brief suggestion. This is good for alerting you when you have a stroke already defined that you aren't using. SmartCat will only translate from auto-briefs you can see, or that you've already used which have been hidden through use (see below), although it may create more than will fit in your window. Show a maximum of [ ] entries Tells SmartCAT to display a maximum of that many auto-brief suggestions during Realtime. Create briefs for a minimum of [ ] strokes This is where you define how many strokes to include in a set. For example, if you set it to 3, auto-briefs will only be suggested if it sees a 3-stroke set more than once. Hide briefs if used more than [ ] times Set how many times a brief will be used until it's hidden in the auto-briefs list. If this is set to 0 a used brief will never be hidden. Use the last [ ] strokes to find briefs Set the number of strokes to use to find briefs. If you find opening the auto-brief window takes too long in a job with a lot of strokes already in it, you can lower this number to only look at the last X number of strokes in the job. Brief creation type Set your 1st, 2nd and 3rd preference to one of these options: Double a stroke Creates a two stroke entry which has the same steno doubled as the steno for this brief. Single stroke combination Creates a one stroke entry which uses the left half of one stroke and the right half of a different stroke. Two different strokes Creates a two-stroke entry which uses two completely different strokes. None This will not create a brief.
Figure 164: Auto-Brief Options
133
CHAPTER 8 REALTIME
8.15.2
Viewing Auto-briefs in Realtime
If you want to see the auto-briefs window during Realtime, go to Realtime [Alt+R] Auto-briefs [A] Show/hide window [S].You can also check the box in your Realtime options to show auto-briefs, and your auto-brief window will be shown whenever you start Realtime. If you want to clear the unused briefs from the window go to Realtime [Alt+R] Autobriefs [A] Clear unused briefs [C] or [Ctrl+Shift+B]. This will let you see any other briefs that don't fit in your window presently, cleared briefs are marked as 'to be deleted' in your auto-brief dictionary. You can also create a one-shot to access this command. Oneshots are covered in Section 9.5.3.
Figure 165: Show/Hide Auto-briefs window
134
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
CHAPTER 9
Editing
This chapter covers the process of editing a transcript, all the functions needed to transform a raw translation into a finished product, and all of the shortcuts, and helpful functions SmartCAT provides for quickly fixing up and finishing a transcript.
In This Chapter...
9.1 Opening a Transcript for Editing 136 9.2 Editing Preferences ....................... 137 9.3 Zoom / Enlarge Display ................ 145 9.4 Editing (Typing) Modes ................ 146 9.5 Customizable Editing Keystrokes 147 9.6 Include (Get) Files ....................... 154 9.7 Insert/Remove Page Break .......... 156 9.8 Picklists .......................................... 156 9.9 PreEdit ........................................... 159 9.10 Moving Around In The Editor ... 160 9.11 Conflicts and Untranslates ......... 166 9.12 Viewing Notes (Steno) ................. 167 9.13 Paragraph Types ......................... 168 9.14 Typing And Editing ..................... 171 9.15 Globals ......................................... 179 9.16 Deleting Text ................................ 185 9.17 Correcting Accidents .................. 186 9.18 Cut, Copy, and Paste .................. 186 9.19 Electronic Signature Image ....... 187 9.20 Modifying Text Format .............. 189 9.21 Numbering Questions ................. 192 9.22 SpellCheck ................................... 193 9.23 WordNet Dictionary Lookup ..... 202 9.24 Saving and Exiting ...................... 204
135
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.1
Opening a Transcript for Editing
To open a transcript: 1) Go to the job menu. 2) Either double-click on the job name, or highlight the job and hit [Enter] or [Ctrl+T]. a) You may also type the first few letters of a job's name to move the highlighting to a job matching that text. b) You can also use the up and down arrow keys to move to a different job. 3) The document opens in the transcript editor screen.
9.1.1
The Transcript Editor Screen
9
Figure 166: Transcript Editor Screen
Once the transcript is open, the Transcript Editor screen is displayed. The top of your window (commonly called the title bar) shows the location and name of the file in square brackets. If you've made changes since the file was last saved, an asterisk will appear next to the file name. Adjacent to the file name will appear useful information (like when the job is saving or loading, or when something that will take a while is happening). Directly below the title bar is the menu bar, which contains several menus that can be dropped down to perform many of the functions in SmartCAT. Below that is the toolbar. It contains a set of buttons which can be clicked on to perform common actions. If you hover your mouse over the buttons, it will show a description of
136
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
what action that button performs. The toolbar can be turned on and off from the view menu with View [Alt+V] Standard Toolbar [S]. The bottom line (called the Status bar) shows: The line number the cursor is currently on. Which page you are on. The number of strokes and which stroke you are on. Whether timestamps exist for the current word. The current editing mode (see 9.4). Any other statuses that might be applicable (Realtime, RealEdit, Audio recording etc.).
The status bar can be turned on and off from the menu with View [Alt+V] Status Bar [B]. To the left and right of the transcript in the main central window, you can have Display Columns. These can display a variety of information, including the transcript line number, timestamps, and paragraph type (see Section 9.2.2 for detailed descriptions). If you have your steno notes displayed they will appear in a window of their own to the right of the transcript window. You can open and close the notes window with View [Alt+V] Notes Window [T] or by simply pressing [Esc].
9.2
Editing Preferences
There are several editing preference options to set, allowing you to determine the way the transcript appears on the screen, the way some keys behave while editing and the way certain functions work. To change your editing preferences in the Editing Preferences window: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Editing Preferences [E] or press [Ctrl+Q]. 2) Change the options you wish to change. Check boxes can be checked or unchecked, radio buttons allow you to select from a list of options, and some options let you type in a number or whatever you'd like. 3) When youre finished setting the preferences, click OK at the bottom of the window to save the changes and exit the Editing Preferences. 4) If you wish to cancel and exit the preferences window without saving the changes, click Cancel [Esc] at the bottom of the window. This will ignore all changes you've made while this window was open. 5) Switch to the next screens- Columns or Colors- by clicking on the appropriate tab, or hitting [Ctrl+Tab] to switch tabs. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 137
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.2.1
Editor
The first tab of Edit Preferences is Editor. It provides a list of checkboxes and options.
Figure 167: Editing Preferences - Editor
Features with square boxes are check boxes. You can choose to turn on or off each feature with a check box. A check means the feature is on, a blank box means the feature is off. You can either left click on the option or hold down the [Alt] key and press the underlined letter to check or uncheck a checkbox. Features with round dots are called Radio buttons. Radio buttons force you to pick one option in a group. When you check one dot in a group, it will un-select the other options in that group. You can click on a radio button option or hit [Alt] plus the option's underlined letter to select it.
138
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Some features simply provide a box for you to type in. You can click in these boxes and type an appropriate value. Show Hard Spaces / Smart Periods [Alt+H] A "hard space" is a space that acts as a "joiner". Two words separated by a hard space will always stick together (across lines) as though they were just one word. If this option is checked, SmartCAT will display hard spaces as carets ^. Otherwise, hard spaces will appear as normal spaces. Hard spaces will be shown as normal spaces in the printed transcript (or print preview), no matter how this option is set. There are two types of periods, Smart and Normal. A Smart period is used when an automatic punctuation gets inserted into the transcript by inserting a <.> token or by using the period Turbokey. After every Smart period, two spaces will be inserted and the following word will be capitalized. A Normal period is normally used for an abbreviation (as in a.m. or Mr.), and is inserted into the transcript by typing a period in insert mode, or by translation/replacement from a non-token period Nothing in particular will be added and it will be treated like a letter for most purposes. With this option checked, you can tell which periods are which in a transcript: a Smart period will be displayed on the screen as a whereas a Normal period will remain looking like a period. This option only affects the appearance of the spaces on the screen. Hard spaces are never printed, and Smart periods will always appear to look Normal. Mark this check box if you wish to make hard spaces and smart periods visible while editing. Uncheck this option to turn the feature off, showing hard spaces as just spaces and smart periods as just periods. Spaces Displayed As . [Alt+S] Checking this option turns on the feature to allow you to view all spaces (except hard spaces) as dots. It does not appear in the printed transcript. Uncheck to turn the option off. Para Symbol at Para End [Alt+P] Checking this option allows the paragraph symbol () to be displayed in the transcript. It does not appear on the printed transcript. Uncheck to turn the option off. Insert Mode Auto-Off [Alt+I] When this option is checked any cursor movement keys, steno/text global, and replace will automatically turn off the Insert mode and return to you to Turbokeys mode. If the Enter Starts New Paragraph option is not checked, then pressing the Enter key also turns off the Insert mode.
139
CHAPTER 9 EDITING Arrows Move Word to Word [Alt+W]
Checking this option allows you to use the arrow (cursor) keys to move the cursor one word at a time. If unchecked, the arrow keys move the cursor one character at a time. If checked, pressing Ctrl + an arrow key will move the cursor one letter at a time. Checking this option does not affect any other cursor movement keys. Enter Starts New Paragraph [Alt+E] If this option is checked, pressing the Enter key begins a new paragraph on the next line. Smart Word Endings [Alt+M] If this option is checked, the tilde character (~) will produce smart word endings when translated - see . Uncheck to use ~ as only a delete-space. Add Punct when splitting para [Alt+U] If this option is checked, creating a new paragraph (via steno, or while editing) will automatically insert relevant punctuation at the end of the previous paragraph. This will be a period, unless the paragraph is a Question or Parenthetical paragraph, in which case it will get a question mark (?) or a period and parentheses, respectively. If you later change the paragraph's type, the automatic punctuation will change appropriately. Cursor Line Centered [Alt+O]
Checking this option will keep the line which the cursor is on in the center of the screen. This option will prevent the cursor from going below half-way down the screen so that your eyes can stay in the same postion while you're editing. The centered line can have a different color (see the Colors tab section 9.2.3) so it catches the eye.
Unless in Realtime + Tagalong [Alt+G]
If this option is checked, the cursor line will be centered unless you are running Realtime, and the cursor is 'tagging along' with what you're writing (see Chapter 8). This allows the whole screen to be used while Realtiming. Auto Save SmartCAT also will automatically save the file you're working on periodically, with no input from you. Just go to the Editing Preferences and set the Auto Save interval as you please. When you're editing, SmartCAT will save the file you're working on each time that Figure 168: Autosave many minutes has passed. The default setting is 3 minutes. If you ever at 3 min. need to recover a file you'd been working on, the very most recent copy will be "job-name.job.bkp", right in your work directory. You can open it, and then save it to the original job name.
140
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Scopist Type the name of a scopist here, if used, or leave it blank. This is completely optional. "Scan to Next" Options Pressing the N key on the keyboard while in Turbokeys mode scans to certain areas of the transcript. Choose the options here to stop on conflicts, untranslates, and bookmarks. Any combination of options is allowed. Choose one, two, or all three. Using the All checkbox will automatically check each of the other three. This is particularly useful when working with hotkeys. Unchecking any of the conflict/untranslate/bookmark boxes will automatically uncheck the All box. Pre-Edit Options Pre-editing a transcript can save time and improve efficiency by cleaning up untranslates and conflicts prior to the start of text editing. The radio buttons allows you to select your method of resolving untranslates in your preedit pass. You may either Steno Global, Text Global, or Replace untranslates in your preedit pass (or skip them). Menu Button Displays This option controls what happens when you hit the [MENU] button on your keyboard. The menu button is shown in Figure 169. Pressing it brings up either the context menu (what happens when you right click in your transcript editor, see Section 4.2.16 for more) or a replica of the TurboCAT Home menu, depending on what you have selected for this option. Export Space Option Click in the option field and type the number of spaces that are desired on the left hand side of the transcript when exporting transcripts to any of the three ASCII text formats (Page Image ASCII, Summation, or Amicus.) This feature provides for additional margin space on the left side of the transcript for binding in book form or for punching holes for use in a ring type binder. Job Menu Options
Use checkboxes to select jobs on the job menu
Figure 169: Menu Key
Will enable/disable the ability to use checkboxes to select jobs in the job menu.
Make grid lines invisible
Will show/hide the grid lines in the job menu.
141
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.2.2
Columns Options
Click on the Columns tab to set options for the transcript editor and job menu. Transcript Editor Columns Options here are for what you would like to appear on either side of the transcript while editing. The options are: None This column is unused. Para Type This shows a narrow column displaying the paragraph type symbol at the beginning of each paragraph (subsequent lines of a paragraph display nothing in this column). Beginning/Ending Timestamp Shows the first or last timestamp of a given line, if any. Beginning/Ending Offset Shows the first or last elapsed time of a line if any (elapsed time is how much time SmartCAT calculates has passed from the beginning of the transcript, as distinct from Timestamp, which is what time of day something happened). Line Number - This shows the number of each line with text on it starting from the top of each page (regardless of their single/double spaced). Abs. Line Number This shows the number of each line with text on it starting from the top of the document (regardless of single/double spaced). Line Space Number This shows the actual transcript lines that you would print in a normal document (one per double spaced line, starting at the top of each page).
Note that the columns chosen here are only displayed in the transcript editor view and are not necessarily printed. To print columns, you must go to Job Properties for the transcript and choose the columns in the Margins tab. This is explained in more detail in the section on Job Properties in 5.4. Job Menu Columns Place a check in each box to show the corresponding column in the job menu. When unchecked, the column is not visible.
9.2.3
Customizing SmartCAT Colors
SmartCAT is installed with a default color set designed for clarity and eye comfort. However, you can easily customize virtually all of SmartCATs colors to best suit your monitor type and personal preferences. To change SmartCATs colors: 1) Click on Setup [Alt+S] Editing Preferences [E] (or hit [Ctrl+Q]).
142
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
2) Click on the Colors tab at the top of the Editing Preferences screen. 3) The Colors setup screen opens (Figure 170).
Figure 170: Editing Preferences - Colors
4) To change colors of a background screen element to be the same as the Normal color setting, check the Background normal (no highlighting) check box for that line. Note in particular the last line, Centerline highlighting. 5) To change colors of a screen element to something else, click on the Text or Background color buttons for the colors you wish to change. There are several ways to choose new colors from the color picker window (Figure 171). Click in one of the color boxes listed under Basic colors or click in the color picker window and drag the mouse cursor through the colors until you get the color you prefer. You CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 143
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Figure 171: Color Picker Window
may also click and drag the mouse cursor in the color slider bar to the right of the color picker window. Notice the Color/Solid box changes colors as you slide the cursor in the slider bar. 6) Click OK to close the color picker window after making the color choice. Click Apply to view the changes, continuing in this manner until all colors are set to your preference.
You must have a transcript open to view the color changes when you click the Apply button. Color changes do occur without a transcript open, but you wont see the changes until a transcript is open.
7) Once colors are changed to your satisfaction, click Save As to save the settings to a file. You can save several different color files, then load as you need them.
Figure 172: Saving Color Settings
144
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
8) When you save the settings, you will be asked to give the color set a name. Type the name of the color set and click Save. 9) To load a color set, click Load. The color dialog box opens, showing a list of saved color files. Choose the file to load, then click Open. Note that several color sets come with SmartCAT, feel free to load these color sets and see if any of them are exactly or close to the colors you would like to use. It could save you some time over setting everything up from scratch on your own.
10) Click Apply to apply the new color scheme. 11) To return to the default SmartCAT color scheme, click Default, then Apply.
9.3
Zoom / Enlarge Display
Another feature in SmartCAT to aid in reading small laptop screens is the Zoom Display mode. To change the display screen magnification: 1) Click View [Alt+V] Zoom [Z] 2) Choose the magnification level desired. 3) The screen contents increase or decrease in size depending on the amount of magnification chosen.
9
Changing the screen magnification may cause some columns to "disappear". To view those columns, you may need to use the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen to move left or right.
Figure 173: Display Zoom Settings
145
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.4
Editing (Typing) Modes
There are three typing modes you use for editing: Insert, Typeover, and Turbokeys The current typing mode is displayed in the status bar of the bottom right of the Transcript Editor screen, and the cursor changes for each typing mode.
9.4.1
Insert
Insert mode lets you type new text. If the cursor runs into existing text, that text moves to make room for the new text. (cursor will look like a pipe | ) To change to Insert mode: From Turbokeys mode: Press [Insert], or [A]. From Typeover mode: Press [Insert]. From any typing mode: Press [Ctrl+F3].
9.4.2
Typeover
Typeover mode lets you type new text; however, unlike Insert mode, if the cursor runs into existing text that text is overwritten (cursor will look like an underscore _ ) To change to Typeover mode:
From Turbokeys mode, Press [/]. From Insert mode, Press [Insert]. From any typing mode, Press [Ctrl+F4].
9.4.3
Turbokeys Mode
Turbokeys mode allows you to edit transcripts while keeping your hands on the keyboard home row, without frequently using the Alt or Ctrl keys. In Turbokeys mode, your keys do not type characters; instead, they execute many Transcript Editor commands. (cursor will look like a square block ) To change to Turbokeys mode: From Typeover or Insert mode, Press [/]. From any typing mode, Press [Shift+F9].
For a list of Turbokey commands and a Turbokey reference sheet that can be printed, see Section 13.2.
146
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.5
Customizable Editing Keystrokes

Turbokeys
WARNING! Changing TurboKey definitions may change the way your Hotkeys and Oneshots (Section 8.9) work.
9.5.1
SmartCAT allows you to change the definitions of Turbokeys used in the Transcript Editor. To customize Turbokey definitions: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Turbokeys [U]. 2) The Turbokey screen opens:
Figure 174: Turbokey Editing Screen
147
CHAPTER 9 EDITING 3) This screen lists the Turbokeys used in SmartCAT.
The Turbokey definitions are listed alphabetically, lower case letters first, (i.e., the key pressed alone, without the [Shift] key), then the definitions for upper case Turbokeys (keys pressed with the [Shift] key). Each Turbokey is shown as a letter under the Key column, followed by the keystroke in the Command column. Keystroke command definitions always begin with the left open-angle bracket < followed by the keystroke sequence, then ending with the right open-angle bracket >.
Turbokeys can also be written in Hotkey syntax. They can interact with dialog boxes only if they are written this way. See section 9.5.2 for Hotkey syntax.
In a Turbokey definition, C- indicates the [Ctrl] key is pressed with the key (e.g., <C-T> means Ctrl+T). Similarly, S- indicates Shift and A- indicates Alt. (e.g., <S-F9> means [Shift+F9], <A-G> indicates [Alt+G] and <CS-3> means [Ctrl+Shift+3].) If a key doesn't have a definition, it will be marked as << empty >>.
4) To exit the Turbokeys Definitions screen and save your changes, click OK. To leave the Turbokey Definition screen without saving your changes, click Cancel. Turbokey Recorder
The Turbokey recorder makes it easy to create your own Turbokeys. To use the Turbokey recorder: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Turbokeys [U]. 2) Choose a letter not currently in use by clicking on that letter.
You cannot use the Caps Lock key in a Turbokey.
3) For example, if a key is marked with << empty >>, it is open for a new custom Turbokey. 4) Click Record [Alt+R] to begin recording the Turbokey. 5) When the Turbokey recording is complete, press [Ctrl + ALT + F10] (all at the same time) to stop the recorder. 6) The Turbokey is automatically recorded to the assigned letter in the list.
9.5.2
Hotkeys
Hotkeys are programmable shortcuts, allowing the editing of transcripts more quickly and efficiently. SmartCAT provides the ability to define your own set of shortcut keys. Default hotkeys are provided in SmartCAT for your use, or you can easily program your own.
148
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
If you know the exact sequence of keystrokes to execute a certain set of instructions, you can type the keystrokes into the Hotkey list. You can also use a special program built into SmartCAT called the Hotkey recorder. When the recorder is activated, it records all keystrokes made on the keyboard. The keystroke sequence is assigned to a 3-key combination you define. You can then use the 3-key combination to perform complicated operations normally requiring multiple keystrokes on the keyboard. To execute a Hotkey, press [Ctrl + Alt] plus a letter key or [Shift + Alt] plus the letter corresponding to the Hotkey you want to use. You can define up to 52 Hotkeys. If a key doesn't have a definition, it will marked as << empty >>. Writing Your Own Hotkeys Although SmartCAT has a set of preprogrammed Hotkeys, you may have a better or more efficient way to perform some operations. SmartCAT provides a couple of ways to redefine the default Hotkey list and/or create your own: Use the Hotkey recorder to record the keystrokes as you type them. You can edit the default Hotkey list by opening the list and manually adding or deleting keystrokes.
Figure 175: Hotkeys Menu Option
Hotkey Syntax In order for a Hotkey to work properly, keystrokes must be written in a certain format that SmartCAT understands. The letters, numbers and symbols on the keyboard are entered in a Hotkey without special formatting. However, some keystrokes (such as PageUp) do not have a symbol and require a special way of representing that keystroke in SmartCAT. This is called Syntax. Hotkey tokens must begin with a registered symbol () followed by the correct syntax. The symbol is Figure 176: Hotkeys Window automatically created if you use the hotkey recorder (described later in this section). If you wish to write a hotkey using the hotkey editor, you can easily insert the Registered symbol. To do this hit [Alt+R] while in the hotkey window, or press the register symbol button. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 149
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
The registered trademark symbol is required before each syntax entry. For example: <SHIFT-F9><ALT-E>gc<ENTER> If you need your hotkey to pause or wait for a second you can insert a copyright symbol () To do so type [Alt+0169]. The following table lists the proper syntax required when writing the keys for a hotkey: Key
Right Left Up Down PageUp PageDn End Del Ins Enter Backspace Escape F1 - F10 Control Shift Control+Shift You cannot use the Caps Lock key in a HotKey.
Hotkey Syntax
<RIGHT> <LEFT> <UP> <DOWN> <PGUP> <PGDN> <END> <DEL> <INS> <ENTER> <BACK> <ESCAPE> <F1> - <F10> <CTRL<SHIFT<CSALT+R
Table 11 Hotkey Syntax Table
Each hotkey has a 400 character size limit. If you exceed this limit, SmartCAT will pop up a dialog telling you so when you hit OK or [Enter].
Figure 177: Hotkey Error
Sample Hotkeys The following Hotkeys are included in the Hotkey list when SmartCAT is installed. These keys may be useful to you as is, or you can use the Hotkey editor to modify the Hotkey or replace it completely with one of your own.
150
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Keystroke
CTRL+ALT+A CTRL+ALT+B
Hotkey Syntax
<ALT-E>ga<ENTER>
Changes current paragraph to an Answer Paragraph.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-Q>cn<ENTER><F2>
Sets editing preferences to turn on the scan to next conflict and resolution, then automatically scans to the next.
CTRL+ALT+C CTRL+ALT+D CTRL+ALT+F CTRL+ALT+G CTRL+ALT+H CTRL+ALT+I
<SHIFT-F9><ALT-E>gc<ENTER>
Changes the current paragraph to a Colloquy Paragraph.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-_><CTRL-F3>ed<SHIFT-F9>
Adds the suffix ed to the end of the current word.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-Q>n<ENTER><F2><CTRL-Q>n<ENTER>
Scans for the next conflict.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-_><CTRL-F3>ing<SHIFT-F9>
Adds the suffix ing to the end of the current word.
<SHIFT-F9>f|<ENTER>3
Finds the next conflict and resolves it to the third option.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-H>j;..<CTRL-_>a^--<SHIFT-F9><RIGHT><CTRLH><RIGHT><CTRL-F6><INS>--^<SHIFT-F9>
Places dashes at the end of the current paragraph, then starts the next paragraph with dashes.
CTRL+ALT+J CTRL+ALT+K CTRL+ALT+L CTRL+ALT+M CTRL+ALT+N CTRL+ALT+O CTRL+ALT+P CTRL+ALT+Q CTRL+ALT+R
<SHIFT-F9>k<BACK>j
Joins the current word to the next word.
<SHIFT-F9>r<RIGHT><BACK><ENTER>
Removes the last letter of the current word.
<SHIFT-F9>bseu<SHIFT-F9>
Underlines the entire current line of text.
<SHIFT-F9>mba<TAB><SHIFT-F9>
Adds a tab at the beginning of the next line.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-_><CTRL-F3>ness<SHIFT-F9>
Adds the suffix ness to the end of the current word.
Finds the next conflict and resolves it to option 1.
<< empty >> <SHIFT-F9><ALT-E>gq<ENTER>

Changes the current paragraph to a Question Paragraph.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-_><CTRL-F3>er<SHIFT-F9>
Adds the suffix er to the end of the current word.
151
CHAPTER 9 EDITING Keystroke

CTRL+ALT+S CTRL+ALT+T CTRL+ALT+U CTRL+ALT+V
Hotkey Syntax
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-_><CTRL-F3>s<SHIFT-F9>
Adds the suffix s to the end of the current word.
Finds the next conflict and resolves it to Option 2.
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-Q>c<ENTER><F2><CTRL-Q>c<ENTER>
Scans to the next untranslate.
<SHIFT-F9>y<ALT-E>gc<ENTER><CTRLF3>THE<SPACE>WITNESS:<SPACE><SPACE><SHIFT-F9>
Starts a new paragraph starting with the current word and inserts THE WITNESS:
CTRL+ALT+W
<SHIFT-F9>y<ALT-E>gc<ENTER><CTRLF3>ATTY1:<SPACE><SPACE><SHIFT-F9>
Starts a new paragraph starting with the current word and inserts ATTY1:
CTRL+ALT+X CTRL+ALT+Y
<< empty >> <SHIFT-F9>y<ALT-E>gc<ENTER><CTRLF3>ATTY2:<SPACE><SPACE><SHIFT-F9>

Starts a new paragraph starting with the current word and inserts ATTY2:
CTRL+ALT+Z
<SHIFT-F9><CTRL-I><ALT-E>g*<ENTER><CTRLF3>EXAMINATION<DOWN><CTRL-I><UP><CTRLF3>BY<SPACE>{ATTY}<UP><F3><SHIFT-F9>
Inserts two lines above the current line with the word EXAMINATION centered on the first line and BY {ATTY} at the margin of the second line.
Table 12 Sample Hotkeys
Hotkey Recorder The hotkey recorder makes it easy to create your own hotkeys. To use the hotkey recorder: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Hotkeys [H] or [Ctrl+A] to open the Hotkey window. (Figure 178) 2) Choose a letter not currently in use by clicking on that letter. 3) For example, in Figure 178, the letters B and F have no hotkeys assigned to them. B is highlighted, indicating it is selected for recording/editing. Although you can edit the hotkey if a 4) Click Record [Alt+R] to begin recording the hotkey. 5) When the hotkey recording is complete, press [Ctrl + ALT + F10] (all at the same time) to stop the recorder.
mistake is made while recording, it is best to practice the keystrokes you will use prior to recording, in order to prevent those mistakes from occurring. Practice the keystrokes several times, then continue with recording the hotkey. To record, edit and use the second set of hotkeys, click on the Shift+Alt tab at the top of the Hotkey window.
152
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
6) The hotkey is automatically recorded to the assigned letter in the list. Editing Hotkeys If you used the hotkey recorder to create a hotkey and wish to edit that hotkey: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Hotkeys [H] or [Ctrl+A] to open the Hotkey window. 2) Select the appropriate Hotkey to edit by clicking on it to highlight it, then click the Edit button. This opens an editor dialog box:
Figure 178: Hotkey Editor
Figure 179: Hotkey Editor Dialog Box
3) Change the command syntax as needed. 4) Click OK to save the edit to the hotkey list. OR 5) Click Cancel to cancel the operation, or Help for further assistance while in the editor dialog box. Exporting/Importing Hotkeys SmartCAT is generally licensed for one computer, but you have the capability of moving that license to a second computer. If SmartCAT is installed on one computer and you have a customized set of hotkeys, you do not have to record the hotkeys again for use on a second computer. SmartCAT provides the ability to export the hotkeys, then import to the second computer.
153
CHAPTER 9 EDITING To perform the export and import functions: 1) Click Setup [Alt+S] Hotkeys [H] or [Ctrl+A] 2) Click Export to export the hotkeys from the first computer. 3) A Save As dialog box opens:
(Figure 180)
4) Choose a location to save the hotkey file. 5) Click Save and the hotkey.hot file is saved to the location you specify.
Figure 180: Hotkey Exporting
6) Copy the hotkey.hot file to a floppy disk, CD, Flash/Thumb drive, or send the file via email to another location. 7) At the second computer, open SmartCAT. 8) Import the hotkey.hot file by clicking on Setup [Alt+S] Hotkeys [H] or [Ctrl+A], then Import. 9) The import dialog box opens.
(Figure 181)
10) Locate the hotkey.hot file. 11) Highlight it by clicking on it. 12) Click Open.
Figure 181: Import Hotkeys
13) The hotkey.hot file is automatically imported and saved on the computer.
9.5.3
Oneshots
Oneshots are dictionary entries that perform a single editing function (such as resolving a conflict, capping the last word or deleting a word) during Realtime. Oneshots are covered in depth in Section 8.9.
9.6
Include (Get) Files

Creating
9.6.1
Include/get files contain boilerplate text that you use over and over again, such as a title or certificate page. It is more efficient to create and save often-used text as an include file, then insert it into your transcripts. This is much quicker and more efficient than retyping 154 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
the text each time. You may change some details in each template as you need, such as names and dates. Once created, the template is ready for your use. To create include (get) files: 1) Open a new, blank job by clicking on File [Alt+F] New Job [B]. 2) Type the name of the file you wish to create. For example, a title page might be called _title. (An often used trick is to use an underscore for the beginning of the name of the job. This allows the include jobs to be grouped together at the end of the job menu, out of the way. However, feel free to name files however you'd like.)
3) Click OK to save the new job. 4) Click File [Alt+F] Open Job [J]. 5) Once in the Transcript Editor, type the text of the template. 6) Save by pressing [F10], click File [Alt+F] Save [S] or Save a Copy As [A].
Figure 182: Include(Get) File
7) These files can easily be imported from TurboCAT as well, through the Tools menu [Alt+T].
9.6.2
Using
To insert an include while editing a transcript: 1) Put the cursor at the place in the job where you want the include to be. 2) Click Edit [Alt+E] Include (Get) File[D] (Figure 182) to get the Open dialog box. 3) The open file dialog box opens, asking for the name of the file.
(Figure 183) Figure 183: Locating and Opening a Get File
4) Click on or type the name of the file. 5) Click the Open button or press [Enter]. 6) The Include Job dialog box opens. (Figure 184)
155
CHAPTER 9 EDITING 7) Select the options you'd like to use, then hit OK. The defaults will bring in all of the file, with all the available features. The options are: a) Select part of a file, based on absolute lines or pages. b) Include steno notes, headers, bookmarks and/or index entries (if they exist in the file). 8) Click OK.
Figure 184: Include Options
9) The include is inserted into the text of the transcript.

Tip: This is also a way to join two jobs together by including one at the end of another.
Warning: Timecodes will not be included if you are inserting a job into the middle or at the end if the timecodes will conflict.
9.6.3
Auto Include
Refer to section 11.9.12 for more about auto-includes and using the GET token.
9.7
Insert/Remove Page Break
To Insert: 1) Place the cursor in the position where you want to insert the break. 2) Click File [Alt+F] Insert/Remove Page Break [B]. To Remove: 1) Place the cursor at the beginning of the paragraph just below the page break or at the end of the paragraph just above the page break. 2) Click File [Alt+F] Insert/Remove Page Break [B].
9.8
Picklists
Picklists are lists of common items frequently used in a transcript. A picklist can be a list of attorneys, courthouses, counties, states, or other items that are common to each other.
156
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.8.1
Creating Picklists
To create a picklist file: 1) Click File [Alt+F] New Picklist [K]. 2) This opens the Save As window. 3) Type the name of the new picklist, such as counties.pik, states.pik, etc. 4) Click Save. 5) Windows Notepad opens. Notepad is a simple text file editor. 6) Begin typing items after the PICKLIST line to include in Figure 185: Picklist Save As Dialog the list. You can have as many items in the list as you wish, one per line. There is a 120-character maximum for each line.
(Figure 186)
7) When finished typing in the list of items, click File Save to save the picklist file.
Blank lines between entries or at the end of the list do not affect a picklist with one entry per line. Blank lines are ignored when SmartCAT displays the items in a picklist.
9.8.2
Multi-line Picklists
To create a picklist file of multi-line items (such as addresses): 1) Click File [Alt+F] New Picklist [K] from the menu.
Figure 186: Picklist of Counties
2) For each item, type a title (must be preceded by an exclamation point).
157
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
3) Under each title, type the information you want to copy into the transcript when you pick that title. Figure 187 is an example of a picklist file called Lawyers. 4) When you are finished typing your multipleline entries, click File Save to save the multiple-line picklist file. In a picklist with multiple-line entries, you cannot separate entries with blank lines. This is because you may want blank lines as part of an address or other type of multi-line item. When the picklist is displayed, it displays only the titles (indicated by the exclamation points) of each multiple-line item. In this example, it will display Sam and Lawyers. When you choose a title, all the information under that title (but not including the title) is copied into your transcript. Insert Picklists vs. Typeover Picklists When creating a multi-line picklist, the first line of the picklist file can either read PICKLIST or PICKLIST_INSERT. This affects how the picked text is inserted into the transcript. If the first line is PICKLIST_INSERT it's expected that the first line of the inserted entry will appear where the picklist marker appears, and a new blank line will be created for the rest of the lines of the picklist entry. If the first line is PICKLIST the text of the entry is inserted in typeover mode. This means each of the lines will type over the same section of the lines below them. This is useful if for example you want to have a section of information fill in a box you create around the picklist marker.
Figure 187: Lawyers Picklist
9.8.3
Using Picklist Markers
Once you set up a picklist, you can open the list from any transcript or include file by inserting a special marker. Picklist markers are entered as the filename (without the .pik extension) of the picklist file, preceded by an ampersand (&) and enclosed in curly braces. For example, a picklist marker that opens the picklist file COUNTIES.pik is written as: {&COUNTIES}
Figure 188: Picklist Marker
158
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
When you are in Turbokeys mode and the cursor is placed on a picklist marker: 1) Open the picklist by pressing the [Space bar] on the keyboard. 2) Pressing the space bar causes a dialog box called Picklist Select opens, listing the items or titles in the picklist. 3) Click on the item you want, or use the arrow keys or the first letter of the item to select it, then click OK or press [ENTER]. 4) The item is inserted into the transcript.
Figure 189: Selecting Multi-Line Picklist Item
9.9
PreEdit
PreEdit is a utility to quickly pass through a transcript, correcting untranslates, conflicts, or both, prior to text editing. This saves time in the editing process because conflicts and untranslates will already be corrected so you can concentrate on more important editing matters such as spelling, punctuation, and the words themselves. The PreEdit Options are located in the Editing Preferences window [Ctrl-Q]. (Figure 190) Access PreEdit through the Tools Menu [Alt+T] Pre-Edit Transcript [P]. PreEdit scans the transcript for an untranslate, selects it, then automatically brings up either the Steno Global, Text Global or Replace dialog box to make corrections, depending on which option is set in the Editing Preferences. Info on Globals can be found in Section 9.15
9
Figure 190: PreEdit Options
PreEdit always starts at the beginning of the transcript. If you skip some conflicts or untranslates, then click OK or Cancel to close the PreEdit window, the next time you perform a PreEdit on the same transcript, SmartCAT starts at the first conflict or untranslate it encounters, not at the point where you stopped.
If set to scan for conflicts, PreEdit displays a message each time it encounters a conflict. To resolve the conflict, click on the corresponding word or words (or hit the number of the word you want it to resolve to) and SmartCAT corrects the conflict and moves on to the next word. You can skip to the next conflict/untranslate by clicking on the Skip button, or cancel PreEdit by clicking on Cancel. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 159
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Figure 191: Resolving a Conflict in PreEdit
9.10
Moving Around In The Editor

Moving The Cursor
9.10.1
A comprehensive keyboard layout is available in Section 13.1. You can print this page for reference. Moving Left/Right One Character
In Turbokeys mode, press [Shift+J] to move left one character or space and [Shift+K] to move right one character or space. If the Arrows Move Word to Word option in Editing Preferences is unchecked, the Left and Right arrow keys also move one character at a time. If that option is checked, then press [Ctrl] plus the arrow keys to move one character at a time. To position the cursor on a paragraph symbol (in the left margin), place the cursor at the beginning of the first word of a paragraph and move one space to the left. No matter which typing mode you are in or how your Editing Preferences are set, pressing [Ctrl+F7] moves the cursor one character to the left and pressing [Ctrl+F8] moves the cursor one character to the right. Moving Left/Right One Word In Turbokeys mode, press [J] to move left one word and [K] to move right one word. If the Arrows Move Word to Word option in Editing Preferences is checked, the Left and Right arrow keys also move from word to word. If that option is unchecked, then press [Ctrl] plus the arrow keys to move one word at a time. To position the cursor on a paragraph symbol (in the left margin), place the cursor at the beginning of the first word of a paragraph and move one space to the left.
160
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
No matter what typing mode you are in or how your Editing Preferences are set, pressing [Ctrl+F9] moves the cursor one word to the left and pressing [Ctrl+F10] moves the cursor one word to the right. Moving To The End Of A Word Press [Ctrl+Dash] (- or hyphen) to move the cursor to the space or punctuation mark immediately following the current word. This is useful if you need to add something to the end of a word. Moving To The Beginning/End Of A Line In Turbokey mode, press [B] to move to the beginning of the current line and [E] to move to the end of the line. No matter what typing mode you are in, pressing [F3] moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line and pressing [End] moves the cursor to the end of the line. Moving Up/Down One Line In Turbokey mode, press [I] to move up one line and [M] to move down one line. No matter what typing mode you are in, pressing the [Up] arrow moves the cursor up one line and pressing the [Down] arrow key moves down one line. Moving Up/Down One Screen In Turbokey mode, press [Shift+I] to move up one screen and [Shift+M] to move down one screen. No matter what typing mode you are in, pressing [Page Up] moves the cursor up one page and pressing [Page Down] moves down one page. Moving To The Previous/Next Paragraph Press [Ctrl+H] to move the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph, or [Ctrl+Shift+H] to move to the beginning of the previous paragraph. Beginning/End Of Transcript In Turbokey mode, press [Shift+B] to move to the beginning of the file and [Shift+E] to move to the end of the file. No matter what typing mode you are in, pressing [Ctrl+Page Up] moves the cursor to the beginning of the file and pressing [Ctrl+Page Down] moves the cursor to the end of the file. Find The Next Conflict/Untranslate In TurboKey mode, press [N] to quickly jump to the next conflict, untranslate or bookmark and press [Shift+N] to jump to the previous conflict, untranslate or bookmark.
161
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
No matter what typing mode you are in, pressing [F2] moves the cursor to the next conflict, untranslate or bookmark and pressing [Ctrl+F2] moves the cursor to the previous conflict, untranslate or bookmark. You can scan to a user created conflict even when it's translated from a <GET> token, or even if it's inserted by typing it in insert mode. This feature stops on conflicts only, untranslates only, bookmarks only or all three depending on how you set the Scan to Next Options in your Editing Preferences. For more information on Editing Preferences see Section 9.2. Find The Next/Previous Number Scan to the next number in the transcript by pressing [Ctrl+3] and scan to the previous number by pressing [Ctrl+Shift+3].
9.10.2
Go to
To quickly move about the Transcript Editor screen, you have several options: Page/Line, Line in file, and Timecode. The Go to menu options help you quickly move the cursor to any page, line, or timecode in a file. To use the Go to menu option: 1) Edit into a transcript.
2) Click Edit [Alt+E] Go to [O]. 3) Pick an option: 4) Go page/line [P]. (Figure 193) 5) Go to line in file [L]. (Figure 194) 6) Go to timecode [T]. (Figure 195) 7) Fill in the page and line numbers or timecode in hours, minutes and seconds. 8) Click OK or press [Enter] to move to the specified location. In the first option the page and line numbers referred to are absolute page number (ABS page at the bottom) and the line number on that page. The line number entered for the second option is an absolute line number. Absolute line numbers are line numbers that
Figure 194: Go To Line in File Figure 192: Go to Selection in Edit Menu
Figure 193: Go To Page/Line
162
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
increment through to the end of the file. By default, absolute line numbers are displayed in the right margin of the Transcript Editor screen. The third option, Go to timecode, uses time-of-day timecode to move through the transcript. If a transcript has timecodes and is visible, you can quickly find an area of the transcript by time of day timecode. Type the hours, minutes, and seconds into the Figure 195: Go To Timecode fields, then click OK. SmartCAT takes you to the line matching the specified timecode. You must type in hours, minutes and seconds in order for SmartCAT to locate the area you want. Times should be as close as possible to the area you wish to find, especially the hours and minutes. A number in the seconds field will find the area as near as possible to that time. For example: you are looking for an area close to 15:08:17 (3:08:17 P.M.). In the hours field, type 15, in the minutes field, 08, and 01 in the seconds field. This will take you within a few words of the exact place you are searching for. Timecode is written in universal time, otherwise known as military time. It is based on a twentyfour-hour clock. Times from just after midnight to just before noon (A.M.) are written as 0100, 0200, 0900, etc. Times just after noon until just before midnight (P.M.) are written as 1300, 1400, 1500, etc. Colons are added in SmartCAT to separate hours, minutes, and seconds.
Check your computer time on a regular basis to make sure it is accurate. The built-in computer clock can gain or lose time, making it more difficult to locate the correct area in the transcript. Consult your Windows manual for more information on checking and setting computer time.
9.10.3
Finding Text
To quickly move the cursor to a specific word or phrase, press [Ctrl+F] (or [F] in Turbokey mode). This opens the Find dialog box. (Figure 196)
Figure 196: Find Text Dialog Box
Type the word or phrase you want to find in the Find What field, and press Enter to initiate the search. SmartCAT starts the search from the current cursor position. You can search for paragraphs by entering the token for the paragraph type to find (i.e., enter <A> in the Find What field to search for an Answer paragraph). Paragraph tokens are listed in Section 11.9.8.
163
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
The Find dialog box also lets you set options prior to beginning the search. Press [Alt] plus the underlined letter in each option to check or uncheck it. You can also use the mouse and click on the appropriate option.
Match whole word only
When you check this option, SmartCAT searches for a word which matches what you typed in. For example, if you enter cat in the Find What field, it will not stop on the cat in catastrophe.
Match case
When you check this option, SmartCAT searches for text that exactly matches the capitalization of the text you entered. For example, if you enter State in the Find What field, it will not stop on state.
Up
If this bullet option is selected, SmartCAT searches for the text you specified from the current cursor position, backward towards the beginning of the file.
Down
If this bullet option is selected, SmartCAT searches for the text you specified from the current cursor position, forward towards the end of the file.
Repeat Last Find
If you have performed a find, you can press [Ctrl+L] (or [L] in Turbokeys), to repeat the last Find What command. You will not have to retype the word you are looking for or change the options. You can also press [Ctrl+Shift+L] ([Shift+L] in Turbokeys), to find the previous instance of what you were searching for.
9.10.4
Bookmarks
Bookmarks are electronic placeholders that are located and moved to quickly in a transcript. For example, in a 200-page job, page three might need referencing periodically. Placing a bookmark on page three allows a quick way to move to that location in the transcript. Adding Bookmarks To insert a bookmark: 1) Select the text to bookmark.
(Figure 197)
2) Click Edit [Alt+E] Bookmark [M]

Figure 197: Selected Text
164
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
3) Select Create Here [C] or press [Ctrl+F4]. 4) The Bookmark Create dialog box opens. (Figure 198) 5) Selected text appears as the bookmark name. You can delete this text and type any text in the field to better describe the bookmark. 6) Click OK [Enter]. 7) The bookmarked text changes color in the transcript to let you know it is a bookmark.
Figure 198: Bookmark Dialog Box
Figure 199: Bookmarked Text
Moving To A Bookmark To quickly move the cursor to a bookmark: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Find [F] or [Ctrl+E]. 2) The Bookmark Find Dialog box opens. (Figure 200) 3) Bookmarks are listed in the Bookmark Find Dialog box. 4) Highlight a bookmark by clicking on it using the mouse. 5) When the bookmark is selected, press Enter or click OK. 6) The cursor moves to the location of the bookmark in the text. Removing Bookmarks To remove a bookmark: 1) Press [Ctrl+E]. 2) The Bookmark dialog box opens. 3) Select the bookmark to remove by clicking on it. 4) Click Remove.
Figure 200: Bookmark Find Window
165
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.11
Conflicts and Untranslates

Scan To Next Conflict/Untranslate
9.11.1
In Turbokeys mode, press [N] to quickly jump to the next conflict or untranslate, and press [Shift+N] to jump to the previous conflict or untranslate. Regardless of the typing mode, pressing [F2] moves the cursor to the next conflict or untranslate, and pressing [Ctrl+F2] moves the cursor to the previous conflict or untranslate. This feature stops on conflicts only, untranslates only or both depending on how the Scan to Next Options is set in the Editing Preferences explained in Section 9.2.1 .
9.11.2
Conflicts
Resolving Conflicts Conflicts occur when you have more than one dictionary definition for the same steno outline. For example, in your dictionary you may have three separate entries for the words, there their and theyre, all with the same steno. This is common because all three words sound exactly alike when spoken. When SmartCAT translates conflicts, it displays them in the Transcript Editor as conflicting English entries, separated by vertical bars and enclosed in square brackets. For example:
[there|their|theyre] To resolve a conflict in the Transcript Editor, put the cursor anywhere on the conflict and, in Turbokeys mode, press the number of the entry you want. For example, to resolve the above conflict with the second word their, press 2 in Turbokeys. The text [there|their| theyre] is instantly replaced with their. Restoring Conflicts Once you have resolved a conflict, it is easily restored by placing the cursor on the resolved word and pressing 0 (zero). This will unresolve the conflict, bringing up all the conflict choices again, you may then select a different choice. You may also re-resolve a conflict to a different choice without unresolving it first, by simply hitting the number of the choice you meant. Note that unresolving and re-resolving a conflict only works on conflicts which are actually translated, conflicts which you type in with insert mode, cannot be re- or unresolved. Highlighting Resolved Conflicts SmartCAT automatically highlights resolved conflicts to help you keep track of what conflicts are resolved automatically. Note this only applies to conflicts are translated from your dictionaries not words you typed into your transcript in insert mode.
166
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.11.3
Untranslates
You resolve an untranslate by replacing or globaling the untranslate to what it should have been see Section 9.14.8 for information on replacing and see Section 9.15 for information on globals.
9.12
Viewing Notes (Steno)
When you create a text file by translating steno notes, or when you create a file in Realtime, the steno is embedded in the transcript file. This provides the ability to access the steno from within the transcript file.
Figure 201: Steno Notes Display in the Editor
To view the steno from the Transcript Editor, press the [ESC] key or go to View [Alt+V] Notes Windows[T]. This splits the screen, with the text on the left and steno on the right. When you press [ESC] to split the screen, the cursor remains in the text window. All of the Transcript Editors functions continue to work normally. As you move the cursor in the text, the corresponding steno is selected.
The editor screen and the notes screen change colors depending on which screen is currently active. For example, when the editor screen is active (text editing), the notes screen is a different color (as set by you in the Editing Preferences). In Figure 201, notice the text editor background color is teal, while the notes background color is a purple.
You can hit [F5] to put your cursor in the notes window, moving up and down and left and right will highlight steno strokes, find will find steno in the transcript, the [MENU] key will bring up the list of steno actions etc, you may hit [F5] again to return your cursor to the transcript. If the notes window is not currently visible, it will make the notes window visible before putting your cursor in it. Press [ESC] or View [Alt+V] Notes Window [T] again to return to full-screen text editing.
167
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.12.1
Working With Notes
When you're showing your notes, you can right-click a note and perform various operations on it, you can also put your cursor in the notes window with [F5] and use the context menu key to bring up the notes context menu. (Figure 202) Show entries (Query) [Ctrl+Q]
Figure 202: Notes Context Menu
This brings up the Show Entries dialog, which will tell you exactly how a stroke transcribed, and which dictionary it came from. This is especially useful for discovering why something isn't transcribing correctly. Find Steno [Ctrl+F] This works just like Find in the text of a transcript, except that it finds steno. Repeat Last Steno find (down) [Ctrl+L] This works just like Repeat Last Find in the text of a transcript, except that it finds steno. Repeat Last Steno find (up) [Ctrl+Shift+L] This works just like Repeat Last Find in the text of a transcript, except that it finds steno.
Add Entries [Ctrl+A] Add a dictionary entry for the selected steno. First enter the English, then choose which dictionary to put it into. Delete Entries [Ctrl+D] Delete all the dictionary entries, from all associated dictionaries, for the selected steno. This will delete the chosen outline from ALL your dictionaries Please use caution! Remove Number Bar from Stroke [Ctrl+U] This will only show up if you're highlighting a number stroke. It allows you to see the steno as it would be without the number bar.
9.13
Paragraph Types
In SmartCAT transcripts there are 10 different paragraph types, most of which can be customized. In the Transcript Editor, each paragraph type is indicated by a letter or symbol in the left margin of the first line. The following table lists each paragraph type that is in the left margin of the Transcript Editor.
168
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Paragraph Type
Question Answer Colloquy Continuation Margin Readback Parenthetical 1 Parenthetical 2 Centered Index
Indicator
Q A C $ M R P Pt * I
Description
Used for questions, this paragraph type automatically inserts Q on the first line. Used for answers, this paragraph type automatically inserts A on the first line. This paragraph is used for normal dialog. This paragraph is used as the subsequent paragraph when Questions or Answers are too long for a single paragraph. The first and all subsequent lines of this paragraph type are on the left margin. This paragraph is used for sections of the transcript read by the reporter. It is the only paragraph type with a right margin. This paragraph is generally used for non-spoken information such as the time of adjournment or lunch breaks. This is an additional paragraph generally used for non-spoken information such as the time of adjournment or lunch breaks. This paragraph centers the text on the page. This paragraph type is created when you generate an index.
Table 13 Paragraph Types
Paragraph types are customizable in the text format of your style sheet (described in Section 5.4.2 ) except for Margin and Centered paragraphs.
The Q and A symbols automatically inserted into the text by Question and Answer paragraphs are not treated as normal text. If you want to remove the Q or A from the beginning of a paragraph, you should change the paragraph to a type other than Question or Answer. To change the position of the Q or A, you should change the Spaces Before/After Q & A options in the text format. (For information on changing the text format, see Section 5.4.2 .)
9.13.1
Changing Paragraph Types
To change from one paragraph type to another (such as changing from a Margin paragraph to a Centered paragraph): 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Change para type [G]. 2) This opens a list of the paragraph types. (Figure 203) 3) Press the radio button (or press the underlined letter of) of the paragraph type you want. 4) Click OK or press [Enter]. You can change multiple paragraphs to the same type by selecting the paragraphs (selecting text is discussed in Section 9.14.2), then changing paragraph types using the method above. Each paragraph you select is changed to the type you specify.
Figure 203: Change Paragraph Type
169
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.13.2
Paragraph Formatting
To change the format of a paragraph in SmartCAT, move the cursor to the paragraph to be changed and click on the Edit [Alt+E] Para Format... [A] menu option. The Paragraph Formatting dialog box opens. The changes made in this dialog box only apply to the paragraph or paragraphs selected or containing your cursor. Indentation First - Number of spaces to indent the first line of the paragraph. Left - Number of spaces to indent the left margin of the paragraph. Right - Number of spaces to indent the right margin of the paragraph.
Line Spacing Changes the spacing for the paragraph. This setting does not affect the line spacing of an index. Alignment
Figure 204: Paragraph Formatting
This allows you to left [Alt+L], center [Alt+C] or right [Alt+R] justify the paragraph. Stick to Next Checking this option causes the current line to stick to the first line of the following paragraph so they will both remain on the same page.
9.13.3
The Witness Paragraph
If you have an Answer paragraph you want to change to a Witness designation (or viceversa), you can easily change it. Place the cursor anywhere in the Answer paragraph and press [Ctrl+W] (or [W] in Turbokeys). SmartCAT changes the Answer paragraph to a Colloquy paragraph with THE WITNESS: at the beginning. For example: A. Your Honor, do I have to answer that question?
becomes: THE WITNESS: Your Honor, do I have to answer that question? This also works the other way; turning a Witness paragraph into an Answer paragraph, and deleting the words "THE WITNESS".
170
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.14
Typing And Editing

Adding Blank Lines
9.14.1
The three commands you might need to create blank lines are: Insert Line [Ctrl+I]: This will insert a new margin paragraph above the current paragraph. Split paragraph [Ctrl+Y] ([Y] in turbokeys): This will split the paragraph at the current cursor location. The following paragraph will generally be either continuation paragraph style or the same paragraph style as the paragraph that it was split from. You may use split paragraph to create blank lines by putting your cursor at the end of the paragraph and splitting. Add Line [Enter]: This will add a blank margin paragraph starting at the cursor position.
9.14.2
Selecting Text
Some functions in the Transcript Editor (such as automatic hyphenation, cutting text, and copying text) require you to first select the text to edit. To select text (while in insert mode), press [Ctrl+S] (or, in Turbokeys mode, press [S]). You can also use the mouse, but is recommended to use [S]. The current word or words and phrases change color to indicate the selected text. Press [Ctrl+S], or [S] again to select the next word, or use any cursor movement keys, the Find command, or the Go To command (described in Section 9.10.2 and 9.10.3, respectively) to move the cursor. All of the text between the first selection and the current cursor position is selected. Selected text is highlighted in a different color. To select a paragraph token in the left margin of the Transcript Editor, place the cursor at the beginning of the first word of a paragraph and move to the left by pressing [Ctrl+Left] until you reach the paragraph break. Then press [S] to select the paragraph token. This lets you keep the paragraph type token with the text you select. To select an entire transcript, press [Ctrl+Page Up] to move to the top. Press [Ctrl+S] to begin selecting, then press [Ctrl+Page Down] to move to the end of the transcript. To cancel a selection, press [Esc].
9.14.3
Swap Words
The swap words command in SmartCAT is used to correct two words that appear in reverse order. To swap two words, put the cursor on the first word and press [Ctrl+O] (or [O] in Turbokeys). SmartCAT swaps the current word with the word to it's right.
171
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.14.4
Splitting And Joining Paragraphs
To split a paragraph, put the cursor where you want to split it and press [Ctrl+Y] (or [Y] in Turbokeys). The new paragraph is the same type as the original paragraph unless you split a Question or Answer, in which case, the new paragraph will be a Continuation paragraph. To join two paragraphs, place the cursor at the beginning of the second paragraph and press [Ctrl+J].
9.14.5
Capitalization
To change the capitalization of the word the cursor is on, press [Ctrl+K] (while in any typing mode). This command is a three-way toggle between all lower case, initial cap, and all caps. For example, using [Ctrl+K], the word state changes to State, then to STATE, finally returning to state. If you select a phrase before pressing [Ctrl+K], it will toggle the first word with the others changing to match the first word. For example, the sentence To whom do I address the box? will change to:
Certain words (such as I, Mr., and Dr.) will not change to lower case. Additionally, words such as the, for, of, a, an, and and will not change to initial caps when part of a selection.
TO WHOM DO I ADDRESS THE BOX? to whom do I address the box? To Whom Do I Address the box?
Pressing [Ctrl+F5] changes a word or phrase to initial caps. Pressing [Ctrl+F6] changes a word or phrase to all lower case. [Ctrl-K] also works for stitched words.
9.14.6
Stitching And Hyphenation
The word stitching means spelling out a word with dashes, like this: S-t-i-t-c-h-i-n-g To stitch a word, place the cursor on the word to stitch (do not select the word) and press (minus key on the keyboard). If a word is already stitched, pressing [-] unstitches it. To hyphenate two or more words, select the words (described earlier in this section) and press [-]. All of the selected words will be hyphenated. For example: five year old becomes five-year-old. If the phrase is already hyphenated, selecting the phrase and pressing [-] removes the hyphens.
172
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.14.7 Formatting Numbers

SmartCAT lets you quickly format numbers in your transcript. You can format numbers written as digits (i.e., 12) as text (i.e., twelve) or as a combination of the two. Highlight or select the number, then hit the Number sign [#] this will bring up the number formatting box, allowing you to select one of the number formatting types, you can hit the underlined letter of the format you want then click on OK or press [Enter]. The Format Number dialog box displays all possible combinations and formats for the numbers you selected. Choose a format by pressing the highlighted letter of your choice.
Figure 205: Format Numbers Dialog
The options displayed by the Format Number dialog box depend on the text you have selected. For example, if you select the phrase eighty-five thousand seven hundred twelve you will be given a Zip Code option (since zip codes can have five digits), but you will not see the Phone Number option (since phone numbers cannot have only five digits). After you select the appropriate choice, the formatted number will replace the text you selected.
173
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.14.8
Replacing Text
To replace a word or phrase: 1) Place the cursor on the word to replace (or select a phrase) and press [Ctrl+R] (or [R] in Turbokeys). 2) The Replace dialog box opens. 3) Type the new text in the Replace With field.
Figure 206: Replace Text Dialog
4) Choose the options for replacing text, such as Match whole word only and/or Match case and the direction, either up or down (you can hit [Alt] plus the underlined letter to select the options rather than clicking, if you prefer).
To easily add a suffix to the end of a word, open the Replace dialog box. Hit [Enter] to move to the end of the replacement and type the suffix, then hit [Enter] again.
5) Click Replace or hit [Enter] to change a single occurrence of the word or phrase, or click Replace All or hit [Alt+A] to change all occurrences in the transcript. 6) The Replace With field will contain the original text, except highlighted. When text is highlighted, that means if you start typing, you will overwrite it. If you just want to add (for example) a suffix to a word, hit the [End] or [Enter] key, then start typing. You will not overwrite the text.
9.14.9
Smart Punctuation
SmartCAT Smart Punctuation lets you quickly add, remove, or change punctuation by automatically handling placement, spacing, and capitalization. Typing Punctuation To add punctuation to a word, put the cursor on the word and, in Turbokeys, press a punctuation key. The punctuation mark you press appears in the correct position immediately following the word the cursor is on. SmartCAT automatically adds the appropriate number of spaces at the end of the word and capitalizes the next word if necessary. The following table lists the punctuation keys and their automatic formatting.
174
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Key
. (period) , (comma) ? (interrogatory) ! (exclamation point) : (colon) ; (semicolon) (apostrophe) (apostrophe) " (quotes) ( (left parenthesis) ) (right parenthesis)
Action
2 spaces, cap next word, goes inside quotes 1 space, no cap, goes outside quotes 2 spaces, cap next word, goes outside quotes 2 spaces, cap next word, goes outside quotes 2 spaces, cap next word, goes outside quotes 1 space, no cap, goes outside quotes (no text selected) plural/possessive 3-way toggle (text selected) adds/removes single quotes around selected text adds/removes quotes on current word or selection adds/removes parentheses on current word or selection same as left parentheses
Table 14 Punctuation Types
Deleting Punctuation To delete a punctuation mark, put the cursor on the word that precedes the punctuation mark and press that punctuation key. For example, if the punctuation mark to delete is a period, put the cursor on the word that precedes the period and press the [.] (period) key. When you delete punctuation, extra spaces are removed if necessary and the first letter of the word following the deleted punctuation becomes lower case. Changing Punctuation To change a punctuation mark, put the cursor on the word that precedes the punctuation mark to change and press the new punctuation. For example, to replace a period with an exclamation point, put the cursor on the word that precedes the period and press the ! key. When you change punctuation, the subsequent spacing and capitalization is automatically corrected. Plurals And Possessives Pressing the apostrophe [] key when the cursor is on a word that ends in s toggles from plural to possessive to plural-possessive. For example, cats becomes cats; cats becomes cats; cats becomes cats. This function only works without text selected (but it can be highlighted). If the apostrophe is pressed with text selected, SmartCAT adds single quotes around the selected text. Adding Quotation Marks To enclose a word or phrase in quotation marks, select the text to surround and press quotes [] for double quotes. You can also remove quotation marks by selecting the quoted text and pressing [].
175
CHAPTER 9 EDITING Adding Parentheses
To enclose a word or phrase in parentheses, select the text to surround and press open paren [(]. To remove parentheses, select the parenthetical text and press [(]. You may also use close parentheses. Surrounding Text With Commas To surround text with commas, select (highlight) the text and press [,] (comma). To remove commas, select the text again and press [,] (comma).
9.14.10
Text Attributes
SmartCAT has the ability to boldface, underline, italicize, superscript, and subscript text. These are called text attributes. Text that has one or more of these attributes displays those attributes in the Transcript Editor main screen as they will print. One benefit of Windowsbased software over DOS-based software (such as SmartCAT vs. TurboCAT) is that Windows-based software has the ability to show these text attributes on-screen. Bold [Ctrl+B] To BOLD a character, word, or phrase, move the cursor to the item and highlight or select it. Then click Edit [Alt+E] Character Attributes [U] Bold [B]. To quickly make your selection bold, highlight the selection then click the B icon in the Editor Format Toolbar. To remove the bold attribute from text, select the bold text and click the B icon once again. You may also simply press [Ctrl+B].
Underline [Ctrl+U] To underline a character, word, or phrase, move the cursor to the character, word or phrase and highlight or select it. Then click Edit [Alt+E] Character Attributes [U] Underline [U]. A quick way to underline is to highlight or select the text, then click on the U icon in the Editor Format Toolbar. To remove the attribute from text, select the text and click the U icon on the toolbar once again. You may also simply hit [Ctrl+U]. Italics [Shift+F6] To italicize a character, word or phrase, move the cursor to the character, word or phrase and highlight or select it. Then click Edit [Alt+E] Character Attributes [U] Italics [I]. A quick way is to highlight or select the word, then click the / icon on the Editor Format Toolbar. To remove the italics attribute from text, select the italicized text and click the / icon on the toolbar once again. You may also simply use [Shift+F6].
Superscript
and Subscript [Shift+F5]
To super or subscript a letter or number, put the cursor on the character, then click on Edit [Alt+E] Character attributes [U] Super/Sub-script [S]. The highlighted text changes to superscript. To change to subscript, click Edit [Alt+E] Character attributes [U] Super/Sub-script [S] The text changes to subscript. You may also simply hit [Shift+F5].
176
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Normal Text To return a selection of text to normal (removing all attributes, such as bold and italics), select it then click Edit [Alt+E] Character Attributes [U] Normal [N]. This will remove all bold/italics/underline as well as super and sub scripting.
SmartCAT can combine text attributes; however, text cannot be both superscripted and subscripted.
9.14.11
Redaction
Redaction is the process of hiding or obscuring certain pieces of information. Usually this is done for the sake of privacy (e.g., social security numbers in publicly accessible documents) or for security (e.g., the military will redact troop locations). In SmartCAT, there are several ways to redact sections of text, depending on your needs. The Redaction Pen When you turn on the redaction pen (either Figure 207: from the toolbar, or from the Tools [Alt+T] Redaction Redaction Pen [E] menu drop down), Pen your mouse cursor becomes a 'redaction pen.' You can use the mouse point to left click and drag. Any sections of the text you highlight this way become redacted (indicated by the text showing in the editor as struck through). If you start dragging your mouse on already redacted text, the redaction pen will instead un-redact a given section. Once you've finished redacting, click on the redaction pen icon on the toolbar, or uncheck the menu option to turn off the redaction pen. Redacting selected text You can redact (or unredact) your currently highlighted or selected text with Edit [Alt+E] Char Attributes [U] Redact Selection [R]. Redacting from your steno machine You can create a steno define for the tokens <RED> and <RED-> to start and stop redacting text. You can also have pre-redacted definitions by putting the <RED>/<RED-> tokens around an entry. Printing redacted transcripts When printing (or generating an ASCII or PDF) you can either generated it 'redacted' or 'unredacted.' Redacted text appears as a black strip taking the place of the text on a printed page or PDF, and as a series of X's in an ASCII. If you print a document 'unredacted' it will print with all
Figure 208: Redacted Text
177
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
the redacted sections intact and readable. (This allows you to print 'censored' and 'uncensored' versions of the transcripts for different purposes.) To print (or print a PDF), your whole document redacted, use the red printer icon in the toolbar, or go to File [Alt+F] Print [P] Print Whole Document Redacted [R]. To print (or print a PDF) your whole document un-redacted, use the white printer icon in the toolbar, or go to File [Alt+F] Print [P] Print Whole Document [P].
Figure 209: Printed Transcript with Redacted Text
To print a section of a document go to File [Alt+F] Print [P] Print a Range of pages [G], you can select not only a range of pages to print, but also whether or not to print the redaction. Select 'Conceal Redacted text so it cannot be read' when prompted for your page range, then hit OK and print as normal. Redacted text will be replaced with a black strip. Generating a redacted ASCII To generate a redacted ASCII, Go to File [Alt+F] Export [E] Page Image Ascii [I] and select 'Conceal Redacted text so it cannot be read' when prompted for your page range, then hit OK and save as normal. Redacted text will be replaced with X's.
Figure 210: Redacted Text In an ASCII
178
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.15
Globals
Text Globals
9.15.1
A text global is a change to a word or phrase that can affect all occurrences of that word or phrase throughout the transcript. This is useful for changing generic speaker IDs to proper names (such as changing the speaker ID "ATTY1" to "Ms. Jones"). Because this does not affect your dictionary, the next job you translate will again use the generic speaker ID, "ATTY1," which you can then change to a different attorney's name. Text globals only replace the English text in a file. The steno has no bearing on what is replaced. When text globaling words such as the or a only whole instances of the word will be globaled. If you global just the the in the word theater it will replace every instance of the in the transcript. To text global a word or phrase, select the text to be globaled, and press the [Ctrl+Enter] or simply [T] (in TurboKeys mode). If you have selected text (using the [S] key) you can also press the [Enter] key. This opens the Text Global dialog: (Figure 211)
9
Figure 211: Text Global Dialog
The current word or selected text is automatically displayed in the Change: field. Start typing to overwrite the text in the 'To:' field. If you want to keep the original word and simply insert text at the end, press the [Enter] key and the cursor will jump to the end of the word. If you need to change the capitalization of the 'To:' field, simply press [Ctrl+K] and the capitalization of the word will toggle from all CAPS to lowercase, to initial capped. Next, set any options you want (described below) and click the OK button or press [Enter] to change the text throughout the transcript.
To select text global options, press the [Alt] key plus the underlined letter of the option you want.
179
CHAPTER 9 EDITING Verify Each Change [Alt+V] If this option is checked, SmartCAT will stop on each occurrence of the Change: text, and ask you to confirm the change with the following dialog box. When you are asked to confirm the change:
Figure 212: Verify Change Dialog
Click the [YES] button to replace this occurrence and go to the next. Click [NO] to ignore this occurrence and scan to the next. Click [ALL] to change all remaining occurrences in the transcript. Click [CANCEL] to cancel the global and ignore the remaining occurrences.
Case Sensitive [Alt+C] When you check this option, SmartCAT will only change text that exactly matches the capitalization of the text in the Change: field. For example, if you enter "State" in the Change field, it will not change the word "state."
Here to End of File [Alt+H] When this option is selected, SmartCAT will do the global change from your current position to the end of the file. Text above the cursor will not be changed. This is the default selected option. Entire File [Alt+E] When this option is selected, SmartCAT will do the global change throughout the entire file, regardless of your current position. Skip [Alt+S] This option will ignore the currently highlighted word when executing the Text Global. This option is only available during PreEdit.
180
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.15.2
Steno Globals
A steno global is a change to a word or phrase that can affect all occurrences of that word or phrase in a transcript. Unlike text globals (explained above), steno globals can also add entries to your dictionary. Steno globals are most useful for changing untranslates in your transcript to English and adding that entry to your dictionary so that the next time you stroke that steno, it will translate correctly. To steno global a word or phrase, select the text to be globaled, then press [Ctrl+G] or simply [G] (in TurboKeys). This opens the Steno Global dialog.
(Figure 213)
Figure 213: Steno Global Dialog
Your steno is displayed in the upper-left list box with the steno for the text selected. To select steno strokes, click on a button to the right that represents the number of strokes to select. A symbol will appear next to the steno strokes that are to be globaled. The text in the Change: field will change to match your selected steno. Only the first note of your selection will be highlighted. In the Steno Global dialog, the current word or selected text is displayed in the Change field. If you see this message in the Change box: (NO MATCHING TEXT - ONLY A DICTIONARY ENTRY WILL BE DONE) The last stroke selected in the upper-left is part of a multiple-stroke outline. Use the buttons to the right to select the number of strokes needed. Start typing to overwrite the text in the To field, or press the [Enter] key first to move the cursor to the end of the field to keep what's in the To field and add text to the end. Finally, set any options you want (described below) and click the OK button or hit [Enter] to begin the global. To select steno global options, press the [Alt] key plus the underlined letter of the option you want. Steno globals have the same options as text globals, and there are also two extra options regarding dictionary entries:
181
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Add to Dictionary [Alt+A] If this option is checked, the steno chosen in the list box is added to your dictionary and defined as the English entered in the To: field. When you enter the global, the "Add to Which Dictionary?" dialog appears. (Figure 214) This dialog lists the dictionaries in the job style sheet. Click on the dictionary you want the entry in or press the numeral that corresponds to the dictionary number to the left of the dictionary. An entry can only be added to one dictionary at a time. Delete Old Entry [Alt+O] If this is option checked, SmartCAT will automatically delete all other entries with this Figure 214: Dictionary Selection Dialog steno from the dictionary which you are adding the global to (it does nothing if the "add to dictionary" option is unselected or if you cancel out of the 'add to which dictionary' dialog).
9.15.3
Saving Globals
SmartCAT allows you to save your globals to a global file. This is useful if you apply globals to files on another computer, or if you want to save a files globals but want to delete the text file itself. To save globals to a file: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Globals [S] Save to a File [S] 2) A Save As dialog window opens. 3) Type a name for the file you wish to save, or click on a file displayed in the window to write over that file. 4) Click Save and your global file is saved. Global files automatically have the file extension .TGL.
Figure 215: Saving Globals from the Edit Menu
182
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Figure 216: Save a Global File
9.15.4
Loading Globals
To apply globals from one file to the current file: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Globals [S] Load from file [L] 2) A File Selection dialog box opens. You may change 'Files of type' to either: .TGL (Table of globals file) to load globals you saved with Save globals .JOB (SmartCAT Transcript file) to load all the globals from a SmartCAT job
Figure 217: Load Global File from Edit Menu
3) Click on the desired global file to highlight it. 4) Click Open. This will load all the globals from the selected file, and apply them to the entire file.
9.15.5
Editing Global Tables
SmartCAT lets you view, add, edit, and delete globals from a files global table. To edit the global table: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Globals [S] Edit Globals [E]. 2) The Globals window opens. (Figure 218) 3) You are given options for editing the global file.
183
CHAPTER 9 EDITING The From column lists the words which were replaced, the To column lists words that replaced them, and the Steno column displays the steno of words under the From column if the global was a steno global. There is never steno displayed for text globals. Global Edit: Add The Add button in the Global Edit dialog box, brings up the text global dialog. See Section 9.15.1 for more details on Text Globals. Global Edit: Edit The Edit button brings up the Edit Global box. (Figure 219)
Figure 218: Edit Globals Table
This lets you change the 'From' and/or 'To' fields of the global in the global Figure 219: Edit Global Dialog table, without making any changes to your document, this is helpful if you need to change the globals for loading into another document, without changing one that's already complete.
If you continue to Realtime in a given job after editing a global, it will be applied with the changes.
Global Edit: Delete The Delete button removes a global from your global table without making any other changes to your document. This is useful if you wish to move the globals to another job, after this one is complete, and there are some you do not wish to retain.
If you Realtime in a job after deleting globals, the deleted global will no longer apply, although if you've added it to your dictionary it may still translate from there.
184
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Global Edit: Reverse To reverse globals in the global table: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Globals [S] Edit Globals [E]. 2) Highlight the global you wish to reverse. 3) Click the Reverse button. Reversing a global will reverse any changes that global made, and remove it from your global table. If you hit Undo (Oops) [Ctrl+Z] and the last action you took was to create a global, it will prompt you to reverse it instead.
If you reverse a steno global in which you added an entry to your dictionary, the global is reversed in your text, but the dictionary entry is not deleted.
9.16
Deleting Text
Deleting Single Character
9.16.1
To delete a single character, put the cursor on the character to delete and press [Del] (or [Shift+D] in Turbokeys). Press [Backspace] to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If you have text selected and you hit [Del] (or [Shift+D] in Turbokeys). SmartCAT will delete exactly the selected text, no more, no less
9.16.2
Deleting Single Words
To delete a single word, put the cursor on the word to delete and press [Ctrl+D] (or [D] in Turbokeys). This deletes the word and all punctuation and spaces up to the next word. When the cursor is in the middle of a word, pressing [Ctrl+D] (or [D] in Turbokeys) deletes from the cursor through the end of the word. The text to the left of the cursor is left untouched. If you delete a word at the beginning of a sentence, the new first word of the sentence is automatically capitalized. If you delete the last word in a sentence, SmartCAT moves the punctuation after that word to the previous word. It will delete extra punctuation as you'd expect it to.
9.16.3
Deleting A Single Line
To delete (or purge) the entire line the cursor is on, press [Ctrl+P] (or [P] in Turbokeys). If the deleted line is the first line of a paragraph, the following line becomes the first line and the first character is capitalized.
185
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.16.4
Deleting To The End Of A Line
To delete everything from the current cursor position to the end of the line, press [Ctrl+End] (or [Shift+P] in Turbokeys). If the cursor is not on the last line of the paragraph, the text from the next line will be pulled up to fill the empty space.
9.16.5
Deleting Several Lines
To delete several lines of text, select all the lines and, press [Del] or Edit [Alt+E] Insert/Remove Lines [1] Delete/purge lines [D].
9.17
Correcting Accidents
CTRL + Z (Undo)
9.17.1
If you inadvertently delete, replace or insert text you did not mean to, you can restore the document by pressing [Ctrl+Z] (or [Z] in Turbokeys). Each time you press [Ctrl+Z], the last editing action is reversed, up to 50. The most recent action is undone first. If the last action you performed was a global, SmartCAT will ask you if you'd like to reverse the global, instead of just undoing the last change the global made.
9.18
Cut, Copy, and Paste

Cutting Text
9.18.1
When you cut or copy text, it is placed in a temporary holding area called the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can then be pasted into a different area of the transcript or into another transcript. Cutting text is useful for moving a block of text from one place in a transcript to another or from one transcript to another. To cut text, first select the text using the mouse or keyboard, then press [Ctrl+X] (or [X] in Turbokeys). The selected text is copied to the clipboard and removed from the transcript. Next, move the cursor to the area of the transcript where the text is to be reinserted, then press [Ctrl+V] (Paste). For more information about Paste, see Section 9.18.3.
9.18.2
Copying Text
Copying text is useful for copying a block of text from one place in a transcript to another or from one transcript to another. To copy text, first select the text (described earlier in this section), then press [Ctrl+C] (or [C] in Turbokeys). The selected text is copied to the clipboard but is not removed from the transcript.
186
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
The clipboard is saved even when you exit a file, so you can copy a section from one transcript and paste it into another. If you exit SmartCAT, the contents of the clipboard are retained.
9.18.3
Pasting Text
When you cut or copy text, any steno and/or timestamps behind the text is lost. When you paste the text back into a transcript, it will not have timestamps or steno for a reference.
Pasting is the process of inserting the text from the clipboard at the current cursor position. To paste the contents of the clipboard into your transcript, press [Ctrl+V] (or [V] in Turbokeys).
9.19
Electronic Signature Image
SmartCAT can insert an image of your signature into your document, allowing you to electronically "sign" copies of your transcript. Primarily this is used in a certification page which is placed in a PDF for long term court records.
9.19.1
Creating a signature image
First of all you will need to obtain a digital image of your signature. Generally speaking, there are two ways go go about this. 1) Scanning an image. a) Write your signature out larger than normal on a clean, white sheet of paper, preferably with a dark marker or Sharpie. b) Use a scanner to scan an image of your signature. c) Clip off extra white space in an image editor. d) Convert it to a monochrome (black and white) bitmap. e) Scale it down to an appropriate size to go into the transcript. 2) Use an image editor and write your signature out with the mouse. a) Create a new, blank, black and white bitmap. b) Use the mouse (or a stylus) to write your signature out using the 'pencil' tool. In either case, you'll need to obtain a bitmap (.bmp) image you wish to insert into your document. You'll want to save this to your work directory (Green Cheetah Face).
187
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.19.2

Attaching the image to a job (or style sheet)
To attach the image to a job: Open the job properties [CTRL-T]. Hit the button at the end of the 'Image' line with the three dots [...]. Highlight your image file and hit Open.
Figure 220: Attaching an electronic signature (Job)
To attach the image to a style sheet:
9
Figure 221: Attaching an electronic signature
Open the Style Sheet. Hit the button at the end of the 'Image' line with the three dots [...]. Highlight your image file and hit Open.
188
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.19.3
Placing the image on your page
To place the image in your job (or an include page): Put your cursor at the spot in your transcript where the lower-left corner of the image should appear. Go to Edit [Alt+E] Mark Image Location [K].
Figure 222: Image Signature
You can fine tune the location of your signature by inserting or removing lines above the image mark or spaces before it. It's sometimes easier to make the image mark visible in the editor (with 'Show hard spaces and smart periods' in the editing preferences) before attempting to adjust its position. The image mark shows up as a small right angle mark in this mode. ()
Once the image mark has been added to an include file, the mark will be included with the file when it's included into a document. So now you can create a page with your signature already embedded (provided the job uses the same style).
Your image will show up in the editor (for placement) with the background color from your transcript. To see what it will look like when printed, use print preview.
9.20
Modifying Text Format
The Job Properties Text menu defines how paragraphs are indented, tab spacing, index line spacing and text line spacing. See also Section 5.4.2 . Changes to the text format in the style sheet do not affect jobs already created. To make changes to the text format of an existing job: 1) Open the job. 2) Press [Ctrl+T] or Click File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T]. 3) Click on the Text tab or use [Ctrl+Tab] to select the Text tab.
189
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.20.1
Text Format
To change a value: 1) Click into a value field (you may also use [Alt] + the underline letter to jump to a field, and hit [Tab] to jump to the next field). 2) Type a new value or hit [Space] to check or uncheck a checkbox. If the field is a list, you may click on the downward pointing triangle or use the arrow keys to select from the list of options. Period Following Q&A Check this option if you want the Q in your questions and A in your answers to be followed by a period. Spaces Before/After A This setting tells SmartCAT how many spaces come before and follow your answer symbols. For example, if you want the answer symbol to appear in column eight, you should set the first number here to 7 so that there are seven spaces in front of it. The second number is the number of spaces following your answer symbol before the text of the answer begins. Spaces Before / After Q
This setting tells SmartCAT the number of spaces to come before and after your question symbol. For example, if you want the question symbol to appear in column 8, set the first number to 7 so that there are seven spaces in front of it. The second number is the number of spaces following your question symbol before the text of the question begins. Q&A Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT how many spaces to indent the second line and subsequent lines of your questions and answers. Colloquy 1st/Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT the indent for the first line of Colloquy paragraphs. The second number is the indent for subsequent lines. Continuation 1st/Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT the indent for the first line of Continuation paragraphs. The second number is the indent for subsequent lines.
190
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Paren 1st/Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT the indent for the first line of Parenthetical paragraphs. The second number is the indent for subsequent lines. Paren II 1st/Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT the indent for the first line of Parenthetical II paragraphs. The second number is the indent for subsequent lines. Readback 1st/Subsequent Line Indent This setting tells SmartCAT the indent for the first line of Readback paragraphs. The second number is the indent for subsequent lines. Readback Right Indent This setting tells SmartCAT how many spaces to indent Readback paragraphs from the right margin. Line Spacing/Lines Per Page This setting determines the number of lines per page. This value can be between 10 and 50. Index Line Spacing This setting determines the spacing between lines of text in an index. Click the appropriate bullet option, single, double, or triple. Tab Spacing This number tells SmartCAT how many spaces between tab stops. The default is five spaces. Click in the number field and change the number by typing it in. Margin Spacing Margin spacing is the amount of spacing between the transcript and the margin text (line numbers, timestamps, etc.).
191
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.21
Numbering Questions
SmartCAT can sequentially number all questions in the transcript. Using the Number Questions dialog box automatically numbers all question paragraphs. To number question paragraphs, be sure the transcript is open in the transcript editor. 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] Question Numbers[Q] Number Questions [N]. 2) The Number Questions dialog box opens (Figure 224) showing several options to customize how numbers are displayed along with a number of other options as listed below: Parentheses around numbers Puts parentheses around the number. This makes it easier to see in the transcript. Example: (130.) Just the number
Figure 223: Number Questions Menu Option
Numbers appear by themselves with no added punctuation. Example: 130 Colon after number A colon immediately follows the number. Example: 130: Variable length number Each number uses only the space required for the number. Zero pad number If you specify the number of digits in a number (see Figure 224), all question numbers display that number of digits. As an example, let's say five is the number of digits you wish to display. Question 130 will look like: 00130. Question 16000 will appear as 16000. Left justify number SmartCAT automatically inserts blank spaces to the right of the number according to the number of digits in number specified in the number of digits option (see Figure 224). 192 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 224: Number Questions Dialog
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Right justify number SmartCAT automatically inserts blank spaces to the left of the number according to the number of digits option. Use commas Checking this tells SmartCAT to display numbers four digits and higher with a comma after the thousands place. Example: 15,000. Starting Number Specify the number you wish to start with. Default is 1, but you can change to any number you wish. Spaces after Number Specify how many spaces after the number before the text of the question appears. Example: two spaces would show like this: Q. (123) Text begins here. # of digits in number Specify how many digits you wish to have displayed.
# of digits in number is ignored if the Variable-length number option is selected.
If, during editing, you remove a question or move it to a different section of the transcript, the numbers will be out of sequence. To correct the sequence, remove the question numbers, and perform the Number Questions function again. Remember: You must choose the options each time you renumber questions.
9.21.1
Removing Question Numbers
If you decide you do not wish to have the questions numbered, click on Edit [Alt+E] Question Numbers [Q] Remove Question Numbers [R] in the drop-down menu. This removes all Question paragraph numbers.
9.22
SpellCheck
Spell checking in SmartCAT can be done using various methods. 1) Batch SpellCheck SmartCAT will scan through the transcript and display any suspect words. Tools [Alt+T] Start Batch Spellcheck of Job[J] 2) Standard SpellCheck Go through the transcript one suspect word at a time also stopping on double words/paragraphs. Tools [Alt+T] Check Spelling...[C] or press [Ctrl+M] 3) Single Word SpellCheck Check the spelling of a highlighted word. [Alt+F9] or Right click Spell Check This Word. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 193
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Figure 225: SpellCheck Menu Options
SmartCAT uses special dictionaries called LEXICONS. Lexicons are files containing lists of words. These lists may contain specialized words such as medical or legal terms. Section 9.22.7 goes into further detail.
9.22.1
Batch SpellCheck
SmartCATs Batch SpellCheck function checks for all misspelled words in a transcript, then displays all suspicious words. You can then correct, ignore or add each word to the lexicon. You should run the batch SpellCheck after you have finished editing a transcript. To batch spellcheck a transcript: 1) Open the document in the Transcript editor. 2) Click Tools [Alt+T] Start Batch Spellcheck of Job[J] 3) SmartCAT will then scan through the entire job searching for misspelled words. This might take awhile depending on how large the transcript is. 4) The Batch SpellCheck panel then appears above the transcript. (Figure 226)
Figure 226: Batch Spellcheck Window
Suspicious words are listed on the right hand side. The current word is highlighted. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor from word to word. On the far left is a list of options for each word. To select an option, highlight the suspicious word and press the letter just to the left of the option you want.
194
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
A Add to Lexicon : Will add this word to the spelling lexicon as the correct spelling and word will be marked as fixed (struck through). C Change All : Will change all instances of this misspelling throughout the transcript. A Change To dialog box will pop up. Type the new spelling of the word in the field and hit Enter. (Figure 227)
Figure 227: Batch Spellcheck Change To...
I Ignore All :
Will ignore all instances of this misspelling. To clear this job's ignore list, go to Tools[Alt+T] Clear this job's ignore list [I]. This will remove all of the words you chose to ignore so they will come up in future checks of this job.
L Lookup Suggestions : If no suggestions are shown in the suggestions area, this will provide you with some for correcting this misspelling. The option to automatically show suggestions is located in Spelling Options (Setup [Alt+S] Spelling Options [S]). Scanning with Always Make Suggestions turned on will take longer. Uncheck that option to speed up the Batch SpellCheck process. 1-9 To change this instance of the misspelling to one of the suggestions, type the number of the suggestion and it will be changed in the transcript and marked as fixed in the Batch SpellCheck panel. View the next instance of this misspelling. Also shows how many there are and which one it is showing. Example: (1/6) is showing the first one out of 6 total.
V View Next :
E Edit Transcript : Will switch focus to the transcript. Press Ctrl+M to switch back to the SpellCheck panel. X Exit Spelling : N Go to next: P Go to previous: Closes the Batch SpellCheck Panel. Go to the next misspelled word in the list. Go to the previous misspelled word in the list.
195
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.22.2
Standard SpellCheck
If the cursor is not at the beginning of the transcript, SmartCAT will display a prompt asking if you want to spellcheck from the Figure 228: Start From The Beginning of beginning of the document. This can be turned the Job off, so that spellcheck will always start from your cursor position, in the Speller Setup (see Section 9.22.5). If you want to spellcheck a single word, place the cursor on the word and press [Alt+F9]. To begin the Standard Spell Check process in a document: 1) Open the document in the Transcript editor. 2) Click Tools [Alt+T] Check Spelling [C] or press [Ctrl+M].
9
Figure 229: Spell Check Dialog
You are presented with the following options:

Suggestions [Tab, Up/Down]
If SmartCAT determines there are alternate spellings or words, it lists them in the Spell Checker dialog box. To choose suggested spellings or words, click on the word in the word list to highlight it, then click Change.
Ignore this instance [Alt+I]
To leave the word spelled as is, click Ignore. The word, however, will be reported as misspelled the next time it is Spell Checked. This is a good way to skip a word if you want to come back to it later.
196
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
Ignore ALL Instances in this job [Alt+L]
Click this to ignore this and all future instances of the same word during spell check of this job.
Change [Alt+C]
Click to change the transcript text to the contents of the Change to box, note that you can either select this from the list of suggestions, or type it in yourself.
Look up in Wordnet dictionary [Alt+W]
Click (or hit [Ctrl+Shift+D]) to look up the word in the 'Change to' field in the Wordnet English language definition box, this requires Wordnet to be installed.
Text Global [Alt+T]
Perform a text global (change all instances) this will bring up the text global dialog with the mispelled word and the contents of the 'change to' field pre-filled.
Add to spellcheck dictionary [Alt+A]
Adds the word to the lexicon, this word will not be found as misspelled in this or any future jobs.
Cancel [Esc]
To cancel the Spellcheck and return to editing.

Help [Alt+H]
Takes you to the Spell Check section of the Help File.
9.22.3
Check Current Word
To check the spelling of a word in the Transcript Editor, Notes or Dictionary Editor, place the cursor on the word to check and press [Alt+F9] or right-click or [Menu] key and select Spell Check this Word. If the word is misspelled, a list of alternate words appears. (Figure 230) If the word is correct, a small window appears saying the word is spelled correctly.
Figure 230: Word Suggestions List
197
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.22.4
Double Word / Paragraph Check
SmartCAT Spellcheck lets you scan transcripts for double Question and Answer paragraphs, double Colloquy paragraphs (with the same speaker ID), double words, and/or misspelled words. Which of these the Spellcheck scans for is set in Spelling Preferences. To perform a document check, open the transcript and press [Ctrl+M]. Spell Check begins at the current cursor position and continues towards the end of the file. To check the entire file, press [Ctrl+Page Up] to go to the beginning of the file before starting the document check. When Spellcheck finds a doubled word, it opens a Double Word Found dialog box. Double Words When the Spellcheck finds two consecutive words, it stops on the second word and displays the dialog box, Double Word Found. To remove extra words, click Delete Second word [Alt+D], Ignore [Alt+I] to ignore the double word, or Cancel [Alt+C] to return to editing.
Figure 231: Double Word Dialog
Question, Answer, or Colloquy If Spellcheck finds two consecutive Question, Answer or Colloquy paragraphs, it stops and displays a dialog box: To correct double paragraphs: 1) Click Edit [Alt+E] 2) SmartCAT returns to the editor to allow changes to the paragraph type. 3) Make appropriate changes using the Edit [Alt+E] Change Paragraph Type [G] menu. 4) After changing the paragraph type, press [Ctrl+M] to continue with the document check. 5) If the double paragraph is good, click Continue to continue with the document check. (Figure 232)
Figure 233: Spell Check Complete Figure 232: Double Q/A Paragraph Types
6) When the Spell Check is complete, SmartCAT will notify you. (Figure 233)
198
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.22.5
Spelling Options
To set up preferences for the Spell Check functions: 1) Click on Setup [Alt+S] Spelling Options [S]. 2) A Speller Option dialog box opens. 3) Click the check boxes (Or press [Alt] and the underlined letters) to select the options you wish to use when performing a Spell Check. Spelling These two options tell SmartCAT whether or not to use the lexicon word list or recheck words typed as replacements for words already checked.
Figure 234: Setup Speller
If Always suggest corrections is checked, SmartCAT presents a list of suggested words to use as replacements for the current word. Removing the checkmark tells SmartCAT not to open the suggested word list. You will need to type in the correctly spelled word yourself. Having this unchecked significantly speeds up spellcheck. During batch spell check you can hit 'L' to look up suggestions for a particular word. again. Ignore Checking (or unchecking) the options here tells SmartCAT what words, number, or steno you wish to ignore when performing a Spell Check.
Words with UPPERCASE
If Recheck typed replacement is checked, this option tells SmartCAT to check words that have already been replaced. Removing the check mark tells SmartCAT not to recheck the replaced words, saving time if you Spell Check the entire document
If checked, SmartCAT will ignore words that are in uppercase. Uncheck this option to Spell Check words in all UPPERCASE.
Words containing numbers
If checked, any words containing numbers CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 235: Spell Check Options and Dictionary
199
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
(SCR100433AB, for example) in them are ignored. Uncheck to include these words during Spell Check.
Pure numbers
If checked, SmartCAT will ignore any numbers in the document. Uncheck if you wish to Spell Check numbers. These would include zip codes or telephone numbers, for example.
Capitalized words
If checked, any words that are capitalized are ignored. Uncheck to include capitalized words.
Words with mixed case
If checked, SmartCAT ignores words that include both UPPERcase and lowerCASE. Uncheck to include mixed case.
Untranslates
If checked, SmartCAT will ignore any untranslates in the document. Unchecked, the Spell Check will find the untranslates as incorrectly spelled words.
Conflicts
If checked, SmartCAT ignores conflicts. If unchecked, conflicts are included in the Spell Check. Ctrl-M Finds
Repeated words
This option, if checked, locates words repeated in the sentence such as: Test Test Test Test. When Spell Check is used, it asks if you wish to Ignore, Change, or Cancel. If left unchecked, repeated words are skipped over.
Spelling Errors
This option, if checked, will find spelling errors. If left unchecked, spelling errors are ignored. Other
Split hyphenated words
Check this option if you wish to have hyphenated words split and checked as two seperate words. Uncheck it to leave hyphenated words alone.
Prompt To Start At Top
Check this option if you want to be prompted to start the spell checking from the top of the transcript instead if the current cursor location.
200
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.22.6
Custom Spelling Dictionaries
SmartCAT gives you the ability to choose specialized dictionaries. These are different than the dictionaries used for translating Realtime These dictionaries are called lexicons and are used for Spell Checking. This is very useful if, for instance, you have created a document using several medical terms. The normal Spelling Lexicon will not find most medical terms (unless those terms were added). The best way to Spell Check a document using specialized terms is to use a specialized lexicon. Once the terms are checked, you can then go back to Speller Options and change the dictionary back to the spelling lexicon. Then perform a normal Spell Check. To choose spelling dictionaries: 1) Click Dictionaries in the Spelling Options.
(Figure 235)
Figure 236: Available Spelling Dictionaries / Lexicons
2) A list of available dictionaries opens. (Figure 236) 3) All spelling dictionaries installed in your SmartCAT user directory appear in the list. 4) Click on the dictionary name to select it. 5) Click OK. 6) After choosing preferences and a dictionary, click OK to close the Speller Option window.
9.22.7
Adding Words To The Lexicons
To add a word to the Spell Check lexicon, click Add to Spellcheck dictionary. The word is automatically added to the currently active lexicon. Be sure you have chosen the correct lexicon to which you wish to add words. If you have added words to a lexicon but they do not appear or Spell Check does not appear to work correctly, check Speller Options to be sure the right lexicon is selected. If the words still do not appear or are not checked correctly, contact Cheetah International Technical Support for further assistance.
Use care when adding words to a dictionary while Spell Checking. The word is added to the dictionary lexicon in current use. This may be confusing if you change dictionaries and the words you thought were entered into a dictionary do not appear while performing a second Spell Check. For example: You change the dictionary to BLACKS, then add the word test to the dictionary. You then switch dictionaries to MEDILEX. When performing a second Spell Check, the word test will again appear as misspelled.
201
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.22.8
Removing Words
Follow these steps to delete words from the lexicon: 1) Close SmartCAT. 2) Open Windows Explorer and navigate to your work directory (The green cheetah face). 3) Locate the lexicon file you are using, it will end in .spl. 4) Double-click on the file to open in a text editor such as WordPad. (or right-click, select Open With, then select Notepad or WordPad). 5) Locate the word(s) to delete. 6) Highlight the word(s) and press the delete key on the keyboard. 7) Click File, then Exit. 8) The text editor tells you the file has changed and asks if you wish to save it. 9) Answer Yes, then click OK.
You can also add words to the lexicon in the same manner. In the text editor, move to the section of the word list (its alphabetical) and type the new word. Save the file in the same manner.
9.23
WordNet Dictionary Lookup
WordNet is a tool created by renowned psychologist George Miller at the University of Princeton. It's fundamentally a tool for Natural Language Processing- for making a computer speak English. It also functions quite nicely as a quick and fairly comprehensive English language dictionary, although that wasn't the actual purpose behind its creation. You can read more about WordNet at http://wordnet.princeton.edu SmartCAT can use an installed WordNet dictionary to look up the definition of any highlighted or selected word using the [Ctrl+Shift+D] key combination. This key combination is available in the editor, the global dialogs, the replace window, and the spellcheck dialog. The [Ctrl+Shift+D] key combination can be set as a Turbokey by setting the definition to <CS-D>, or included in a hotkey with <CS-D>. You can also lookup words in WordNet from the Text Global, Steno Global and Spell Check dialog boxes. Just hit [Alt+W] or [Ctrl+Shift+D]. Some versions of the SmartCAT installer include the 2.1 version of the WordNet installer as a convenience, so you may already have it installed. If you do not have WordNet installed, you can download it from Princeton's website at: http://wordnet.princeton.edu/obtain
202
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
You will need to download WordNet 2.1 for Windows (or the current version) and install it from there. Please be sure to read the license agreement when you install WordNet.
9.23.1
Using the WordNet dialog
The WordNet dialog looks like this:
Figure 237: WordNet Lookup
It will come up with the definition(s) of the word you had highlighted or selected. You can use the up and down arrows, as well as [Page Up] and [Page Down] to scroll the definition box. You can type a new word in the box and use the 'Lookup' button [Alt+L] to look up the new word. The 'Synonyms' [Alt+S] button brings up a list of all the synonyms for each definition of the word displayed. The 'Antonyms' [Alt+A] button brings up a list of all the antonyms for each definition of the word displayed. The 'Help' [Alt+H] button brings up the help page for using WordNet. The 'Cancel' [Alt+C] or [Escape] will close the WordNet dialog.
WordNet 2.1 is Copyright 2005 by Princeton University. All rights reserved.
203
CHAPTER 9 EDITING
9.24
Saving and Exiting

Saving Changes
9.24.1
In the Transcript Editor, you can save your editing changes any time. To save changes without exiting the editor, press [F9], click on the Disk icon in the task bar, or click File [Alt+F] Save [S] from the menu bar.
9.24.2
Leaving The Transcript Editor
To save the current job and leave the Transcript Editor press [F10]. Quit Without Saving If you made editing changes you dont want to keep, you can leave the Transcript Editor screen and discard all changes since the last Autosave (described earlier in this section). To quit without saving, click File [Alt+F] Close file [C]. A message appears informing you that changes were made to the transcript and asks if you wish to save the changes. Click Yes to save, No to exit without saving, or Cancel to return to the edit screen.
Figure 238: Save Confirmation Dialog
Common Mistakes While Editing When editing a job and things dont seem to work correctly, here are a few items to check: You may be in the wrong one of the three editing modes (see Section 9.4), depending on which key you have pressed. Check to make sure the CAPSLOCK key is off, In CAPSLOCK mode, a regular key press is interpreted as if you had shift held down. Make sure the F-Lock key is off, the F-lock key is a special key for certain keyboards which changes the behavior of the Function keys.
204
CHAPTER 10 FINISHING TOOLS / PRINTING
CHAPTER 10
Finishing Tools / Printing

This chapter covers indexing, printing, generating a keyword index or concordance and exporting. When you're done editing, this is where you will be.
In This Chapter...
10.1 Indexing ..................................................................................................................... 206 10.2 Making a Keyword Index ........................................................................................ 209 10.3 Generating A Concordance ...................................................................................... 212 10.4 Printing ...................................................................................................................... 216 10.5 Troubleshooting / Print Management ..................................................................... 222 10.6 Exporting ................................................................................................................... 224 10.7 Save a Copy As .......................................................................................................... 227 10.8 E-Mailing Files (With Outlook or Thunderbird) ............................................. 231
10
205
10.1
Indexing
Index Types
For a complete discussion on creating and setting up indices, see Section 5.4.2 .
10.1.1
There are two types of indices in SmartCAT: standard and folded. Standard Index A standard index contains two columns and displays the Page and Line numbers of the indexed item.
Figure 239: Index Example
Folded Index
10
A folded index generally will contain more than two columns and will generally only display page numbers.
Figure 240: Folded Index Example
10.1.2
Marking Index Items
At times, individual items require indexing. Listed below are the different options available in SmartCAT to mark text for inclusion in an index. Marking Text 1) Three ways: a) Click Edit [Alt+E] Index [X] Insert Index Entry [I] or b) Press [Ctrl+N] c) Right-click on the text and choose Insert Index Entry.
206
2) This opens the Index Entry dialog Box: 3) The Index Entry dialog box gives the option of adding the new index entry into one of the indices set up on the Index tab of the style sheet. 4) Click on the appropriate index. 5) If marked text is not descriptive enough, type a description in the Figure 241: Insert Index Entry Text of Entry description box first. If nothing is typed into the Text of Entry Description box, selected text is tagged and displayed in the index. However, if text is typed in the Text of Entry Description box, the descriptive text typed in takes precedence and is displayed in the index. 6) You have the option to use an Identifier for each entry. For example, if you have multiple entries that fall under the same exhibit or examination, you can use the same identifier for each. This comes in handy if the index is folded. 7) If Link this text to a transcript is checked, the text in the transcript is changed it will be updated in the index as well. 8) Click OK or press [Enter] to create the index entry. 9) If the index is folded, you will be presented with the Index Column dialog box. Here is where you choose which column in the index to put this entry. For example, Cross, Direct, Redirect, Recross.
10
10.1.3
Editing Indexed Items
To edit, remove, or go to a tagged selection of text, click on the Edit[Alt+E] Index[X] Edit Index Entries[E] menu option. This opens the Index Edit dialog box. (Figure 243)
207
Figure 242: Edit Index Entries Menu Option
Figure 243: Index Edit Dialog
Click on an index item to edit, remove, or go to it. If you choose to edit an entry, the Index Entry dialog box will open.
10.1.4
Index Marks
10
Once you have setup your indices, you must tell SmartCAT where to build them. For this you will place an Index Mark at the desired location in the transcript. An Index Mark must be placed on it's own line. Here are the steps: 1) Place your cursor at the desired location. 2) Click Edit[Alt+E] Index[X] Insert Mark[M] or Right Click Insert Index Mark 3) Choose the Index and Click OK or press [Enter].
Figure 244: Insert Index Mark
10.1.5
Generating The Index
To generate an index: 1) Click Tools[Alt+T] Build Indices[B] 2) The index (or indices) is automatically built at the corresponding Index Mark(s).
208
10.1.6
Index Error Messages
The error message in Figure 245 means that there are entries inserted into an index (Index 2, in this case), but no mark has been placed to insert the index into the transcript. To fix this error, you must either insert an Index mark where you want to insert that index, or remove the index entries you have inserted into the index by going to Edit[Alt+E] Index[X] Edit Index Entries...[E]. The error message in Figure 246 means that there are index entries for an index that is not enabled in the indexing tab of the job properties. Simply go to the job properties by pressing [Ctrl+T], then click on the Indexing tab, and enable the appropriate index.
Figure 245: Build Index Error
Figure 246: Disabled Index Error
10.2
Making a Keyword Index
A keyword index is a list of all occurrences of a given word or phrase, in context, throughout a transcript. This is a useful tool for attorneys, helping them to quickly reference key parts of the testimony. SmartCAT lets you create a keyword index of unlimited length. You can also create an index of all words in a transcript. This is called a concordance or word index. Generating and printing a concordance is described in more detail in Section 10.3. SmartCAT's Keyword Index feature is easy to use. A keyword index lists the page and line numbers for each occurrence of each keyword, along with the complete line of text containing the keyword. To make a keyword index, you first tell SmartCAT which words or phrases to index.
10
Figure 247: Keyword Index Dialog Box
209
10.2.1
Entering Keywords
Before you generate the keyword index, you must create a list of words to index. To enter a list of words: 1) Click Tools [Alt+T] Keyword Index [K]. 2) The keyword dialog box opens. (Figure 247) 3) Each keyword can be any word or phrase. Partial words are also allowed as entries. For example, entering the keyword object the Keyword Index will find object, objection, objects, etc. 4) Click Add or press [ALT+A] to open the Keyword Add dialog.
(Figure 248)
5) Type the keyword in the dialog field. 6) Press ENTER or click OK button. 7) The keyword is added to the list.
Figure 248: Adding Keywords / Phrase
8) To cancel the Keyword Add, click Cancel or press [Esc].
10
10.2.2
Removing Keywords
To remove words or phrases from the list: 1) Highlight the word by clicking on it with the mouse or use the UP or DOWN cursor keys to move to the word you wish to remove. 2) Click Remove or press [Alt+R] and the word is removed from the list. 3) If there are a large number or words and/or phrases in the list, click and drag the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog box to scroll down the list to locate the words or phrases. 4) Alternatively, use the arrow keys or PageUp and PageDown keys to move through the list. 5) Cancel the keyword list operation by clicking Cancel or by pressing [Esc].
10.2.3
Saving The List of Keywords
When you finish entering all your keywords, click OK in the Keyword dialog box or press [Enter] to save and close.
210
10.2.4
Loading A Saved Keyword List

A Keyword Index is job specific and cannot be used for multiple transcripts.
If you have saved a list of keywords for a particular transcript and want to reuse it for this transcript: 1) Open the transcript. 2) Click Tools [Alt+T] Keyword Index [K]. SmartCAT opens the saved keyword file.
10.2.5
Displaying The Keyword Index
After creating the list of keywords, the Keyword Index is automatically generated. You can then view or print the keyword index file. To view the keyword file, navigate to your SC Work Directory (Green Cheetah Face), then double-click on the keyword file. The keyword file has the same name as your transcript, but the extension is .kwd. You may need to tell Windows which program to open the index with. If this is the case, you will see the following 'Open With' window. (Figure 250)
Figure 249: Select Keyword Index File
10.2.6 Index
Printing The Keyword
10
After opening the keyword index file using an editor program such as Wordpad or Notepad, click on File Print and print your index.
10.2.7 Index
Saving The Keyword
The Keyword Index file is automatically saved as an ASCII file. The file name is the same as the transcript the index was created from, but has the extension .kwd.
Figure 250: Open With Dialog
211
Figure 251: Keyword Index in Notepad
10.3
Generating A Concordance
A concordance, also known as a word index, is an alphabetical list of virtually every word in a transcript including the page and line numbers where each word occurs. To create a concordance of a transcript, click on Tools [Alt+T] Concordance [O]. This opens the Concordance dialog.
10
Figure 252: Concordance Menu Option
Figure 253: Concordance Dialog
The Concordance dialog lets you add or remove words to be excluded from the concordance file. Generally, common words such as and, or, the, etc., are excluded from a concordance. 212 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
If you check the Exclude all numbers box, then each 'word' which begins with a number will be excluded from the concordance automatically, and do not have to be added to the exclude list one by one. Once words are added or removed from the exclude list, click OK or press [Enter] to generate the concordance. Click Cancel or press [Esc] to cancel the concordance creation. This is an example of an entry in a concordance: car 12:5,9,15; 42:1 Each word is followed by one or more page numbers and the lines on each page where the word appears. The example above indicates that the word car is found on page 12, lines 5, 9, and 15; also on page 42, line 1.
10.3.1
Excluding Words From The Concordance
There are several common words that occur in the English language such as the, a, an, etc. You may not want these words included in the concordance. SmartCAT includes a list of several common words to exclude. To add a word to the exclude list: 1) Click in the Add or Remove dialog field, then type the word to exclude. 2) Click the Add button or press [Alt+A] to add the word to the exclude list. To remove a word from the list: 1) Click on the word in the list to highlight it. 2) Click the Remove button or press [Alt+R] to remove the word from the exclude list. To locate words to remove that are further down or up the list, press the Up or Down cursor keys until you locate the word(s) you want to remove. Highlight each word to remove, then click Remove. To quickly move through the list, use the PageUp or PageDown keys or use the mouse by clicking and dragging the slider bar up or down. After creating and/or editing the exclusion list, you are ready to create the concordance. Here are the next steps: 1) If you wish to create a title for the concordance, type a header in the header dialog field. 2) Click OK or press [Enter]. 3) A window opens asking if you would like to open the concordance.
The exclusion list is not case sensitive. If you put the word brown on the exclusion list, it is excluded no matter how it is capitalized in the transcript (brown, Brown, etc.).
10
213
Figure 254: Open the Concordance?
4) Click Yes [Enter] to immediately open the concordance for viewing, or No [Esc] if you wish to wait and open the concordance later. 5) Viewing the concordance now will prompt Windows to open the file with the program setup to open a .crd file by default. This may be Windows Cardspace, Notepad or Wordpad. The latter is the the preferred program for viewing concordances. You may have to open WordPad first, then open the concordance from there. That process is explained in the next section.
The filename of the concordance is the same as your transcript name, but has the extension .CRD. This is how you distinguish the concordance from the transcript.
10.3.2
Printing The Concordance
10
To print a concordance, use any text editor or word processor that reads ASCII text files. You can use, WordPad, or a word processing program such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Works to name a few. Using a word processor or text editor, you can add titles, change margin settings, text attributes and fonts, or anything you can normally do with a file. Once the concordance is edited to your requirements, use the same text editor to print the concordance. To print: 1) Start WordPad or other text editor program. 2) Click File Open. 3) In the Open dialog box, navigate to your SmartCAT working directory. 4) Change the File Type to open to All Files. This allows you to see the .crd concordance files. 5) Click on the file to highlight it. 6) Click OK (or Open) to load the concordance into the editor. 7) Click File Print to open the Print dialog. 8) Set the desired settings and click Print.
214
10.3.3
Saving The Concordance
When the concordance is created in SmartCAT, it is automatically saved to your working directory. The extension used is .CRD to distinguish it from other types of files. It has the same name as the transcript from which the concordance was created. If you make any edits to the file in a text editor, you can save the file in that program by clicking File Save.
10
Figure 255: Concordance open in WordPad
215
10.4
Printing
To print a transcript or dictionary, a printer must be installed on your computer. The printer must be turned ON, be online, and have paper loaded. If you have not already set up your printer, you must do so before you can print. For directions on setting up your printer and other devices, see the documentation for your printer or contact the printer manufacturer. Information about printer setup is covered in depth in Section 3.3.
10.4.1
Printing Transcripts
1) To print a transcript, select the job from the job menu and press [Enter]. This opens the job. 2) Once the job is open, go to File [Alt+F] Print [P]. This opens a sub-menu with the following 5 options: Print Whole Document...
10
Prints the entire transcript ignoring redactions. Print Whole Document Redacted... Prints the entire transcript concealing redacted text. More info on printing redacted transcripts is found in Section 9.14.11 . Print a Range of Pages Opens a window where you can specify a range of pages among other options.
Figure 256: Print Menu
Figure 257: Page Range Dialog If you check the 'Use absolute' check box, the pages specified will refer to the sheet of paper rather than the page number you specified. If you check the Conceal redacted text check box, any text you've marked as 'redacted' (shows up as strike-through in the editor) is printed as a black bar.
216
Print Steno Notes Only... Notes can be printed to look as though they are on tape, just as if they are printed on the steno machine. To print steno notes: 1) Click File [Alt+F] Print [P] Print Steno Notes [N].
Figure 258: Naming/Saving Notes File For Printing
2) Type the name of the notes and click Save. To make it easy to locate and print, it is recommended to give the file a name and add the .txt extension, then save it in the My Documents folder. When looking for the file at a later time, it is much easier to find in the My Documents folder rather than going through all the folders to the SC work directory. 3) After a short processing period, the notes text file will open in Windows Notepad. If it is a large file, a message may appear saying it is too large to open in NotePad, then provides the option to open in WordPad. 4) Click OK to open the file. 5) Click File Print to print the notes.
Figure 259 shows
10
a section of steno notes as they appear in WordPad.
217
Figure 259: Printed Steno Notes
Print Dictionary Only accessible while a dictionary is open. This option prints the dictionary in a readable format. It will print what is shown in the dictionary editor. More information about printing dictionaries is covered in Section 11.6. Use a Filter to display what you wish to print. Dictionary Filters are covered in depth in Section 11.8.7.
10
10.4.2
Print Dialog Options
After you select an option, SmartCAT opens the Print dialog box (except if you wish to select a range of pages as described before).
There are several options available in the Print dialog box. The options available depend on the type of printer you have installed. Figure 260 is for reference only.
Figure 260: Example of a Print Dialog Box
218
Select the printer you wish to use. Set the preferences such as paper size, paper tray and other printer settings by clicking the Preferences button. Consult your printer manual for the options available to you. You cannot set a page range in this dialog. You can only select All. If you wish to print a section of the job, select print a range of pages from the print menu. This gives you more control over the range. To print multiple copies, type the number of copies in the field or click on the up or down spin arrows to choose the number of copies. Choose whether or not to collate the print job. Collating means assembling the document in the proper sequence so the job prints completely from page 1 through page X before printing the next copy. This is a time saving feature so you do not have to go through multiple copies and reorder the copies manually. After selecting options, press Enter or click Print to begin printing.
After the transcript is sent to the printer queue, you can continue working in SmartCAT as the job prints.
10.4.3
Print Preview Single / Multiple Pages Per Sheet
The print preview shows you how the transcript will look when printed. While in Print Preview, all editing keystrokes and functions are disabled. 1) Click File [Alt+F] Print Preview [V]. 2) The Print Preview screen opens.
10
Figure 261: Print Preview Menu Option
Figure 262: Print Preview
219
CHAPTER 10 FINISHING TOOLS / PRINTING Print Preview Options

Printing One Page Per Sheet
The default printing option is one page per sheet. Generally, you do not have to change any options in order to print. If you have previously set options to print multiple pages per sheet, all you need do is click on the 1 button to change to single page per sheet.
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper: 1) Click on any of the multiple page buttons 2, 4, or 6. This changes the screen, showing how the transcript prints. For example, clicking on the 4 button changes the print option to print four pages on one sheet of paper as shown in Figure 263. 2) Choose how pages appear on the sheet, numbered either down the page, or left to right across the paper. For example, pages one through four, printed left to right, are seen on the paper as 1 and 2 at the top of the sheet and 3 and 4 at the bottom of the sheet. Printing down the sheet of paper is seen as 1 and 3 at the top, 2 and 4 at the bottom. a) To choose pages numbered down the paper, click on the zigzag patterned button going up and down. b) To print pages numbered left to right, click the zigzag patterned button going left to right. If the pages don't fit on one sheet correctly you may need to adjust the job properties. Settings such as margins, font size, margin spacing, and box line Figure 263: 4 Pages Per Sheet Shown position can all affect multi-page printing. If you make adjustments to the job properties for condensing a transcript, it is recommended that you save them to a new style sheet. See Section 5.4 for info on the job properties. 220 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
10
Print condensed using exterior margins
Press the button to use the exterior margin settings from the condensed options in the Job Properties. This will remove the spacing from in between the transcript pages and delineate them with a border.
10
Figure 264: Condensed Printing Using Exterior Margins
221

Changing The Print Preview Magnification
SmartCAT allows you to preview your transcript on screen at three different magnifications: 200%, 100%, and 50%. The different magnifications are useful to see a single page or multiple pages on the screen. For instance, if youve selected 6 pages per sheet, you may want to see how those pages will appear when printed. In that case, use the 50% setting by clicking on the 50% button. To check margins, transcript box lines and text formats, view it at the 100% or 200% setting.
Exit Preview Mode
To return to Normal (editor) mode: 1) Click View [Alt+V] Normal [N] or press [Esc]. 2) SmartCAT returns to the normal editor screen.
Figure 265: Return to Normal View
10.4.4
Printing to .pdf
If you have a .pdf printer driver (such as PDF995 or PDFCreator) installed, it will show up in your printer list. Selecting the PDF Printer option and then Clicking Print will export your job directly to a PDF file, to be saved wherever you choose.
Figure 266: Select PDF Printer in Printer List w/ Icons
10
10.5
Troubleshooting / Print Management

Printing a transcript produces unexpected results
10.5.1
This could be that the transcript box is printing beginning on a different page than expected, pages are printing one to a sheet of paper rather than four, page numbers are incorrect, etc. If the print job isn't what is expected, go to the Job Properties menu [Ctrl+T] and make sure properties are set for what is required, such as margins, transcript box sizes and beginning page number. Then go to print preview and make sure the correct options are chosen.
10.5.2
Print Queue Manager
When you print a job, the job is queued, meaning a snapshot of the job is saved, and Windows controls how the job prints. You can have several jobs in the print queue waiting to print while you continue working on transcripts.
222
The print queue manager lets you control the printing of the queued print jobs. To open the print queue manager, go to the Start menu of Windows, the Control Panel, click on Printers or Printers and other Hardware, then double-click on the default printer to open the print queue. The screen lists the jobs queued for printing, including the Document Name, Status (printing or queued), Owner, Progress (how much has printed so far, and the time the print job was begun.) Removing Jobs From The Queue This can be done by selecting the job and clicking Document Cancel. Other options are available here as well. Consult Windows Help or your Windows manual to for more information on the print queue.
Having too many transcripts in the print queue can cause the computer to slow down. If you notice the computer seems sluggish, check to see how many jobs are waiting to print. Wait a few minutes for some jobs to print, and the computer will most likely speed up.
Many printers have built-in memory, storing pages ahead of time before they are actually printed. If you want to stop printing, cancel the print job on the printer itself.
Figure 267: Windows Print Queue Manager
10
Figure 268: XP Printer List w/ Default Check Marked
223
10.6
Exporting
ASCII Transcripts
10.6.1
An ASCII can be saved to anywhere on your hard drive, floppy, or flash drive, and then emailed instantly to anywhere in the world. SmartCAT can export the following ASCII formats: Page Image ASCII One common type of ASCII text file is called a Page Image ASCII text file. When making a Page Image ASCII file, page and line numbers, spacing, headers, footers and margins appear exactly as they do in your printed transcript. Saving a transcript as a Page Image ASCII is different than saving as other types of files. To save as a Page Image ASCII, you must use the Export function, rather than the Save As function in the File drop-down menu. To create a Page Image ASCII: 1) Ensure you have the transcript open in the transcript editor.
Figure 269: Exporting a Page Image ASCII
10
2) Check your settings in the Job Properties [Ctrl+T] to ensure they are set as you need them to be. Also check the Export Margin Spacing in Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q]. 3) Click File [Alt+F] Export [E] Page Image ASCII [I]. 4) A Page Range dialog box opens: 5) Choose which pages you wish to export:
All
Export all pages to the ASCII text file.

Current page
Choose this to export only the page which this cursor is on in the transcript.
Figure 270: Print Page Range
224
Pages
Choose a range of pages to print. For example, you can print pages 4-7, 9-19 and 49, 52, 99, 107, etc. This will print pages 4 through 7, 9 through 19, and individual pages 49, 52, 99, 107.
Use absolute (not relative) page numbers
By checking this you indicate the numbers specified in the pages box refer to the absolute page number (which piece of paper) rather than the number which would be printed on that page.
Conceal Redacted text so it cannot be read
By checking this you indicate any text you've marked as redacted (appears as strike-through in the text) should not be readable in the resulting ASCII. 6) After choosing the Page Range options, click OK. 7) A Save As dialog box opens: 8) Type a name for the file or leave as is for the default name. 9) The 'Save as type' field gives two extension options .prt and .txt. An ASCII with the .txt extension can be read by virtually any computer.
Figure 271: ASCII Save As Dialog
10
You can save the file to any location on the hard drive or floppy drive by typing your preferred location in the Save in: field or navigating to the location using standard Windows navigation.
225
10
Amicus Summation
Figure 272: Page Image ASCII File
SmartCAT exports to Amicus format also. The steps are identical to Page Image ASCII, except you click File [Alt+F] Export [E] Amicus [A].
SmartCAT also exports to Summation format. Again, the steps are identical to Page Image ASCII, except you click File [Alt+F] Export [E] Summation [S].
10.6.2
Dictionaries
SmartCAT has the ability to export dictionaries to several formats. They are covered in depth in Section 11.5.
226
10.7
Save a Copy As
SmartCAT can save files in several different formats. The different formats allow you to select the type of file you or a client prefers. .job SmartCAT transcript file .rtf Transcript file as a Rich Text Format file .rtf Notes file as a Rich Text Format file .txt Plain text file .html Hyper Text Markup Language file (World Wide Web file)
10.7.1
JOB
.JOB files are the default SmartCAT formatted transcripts. .JOB files are edited in SmartCAT, saved to disk, emailed to other SmartCAT users, and used to print transcripts. To save a transcript in the default format: 1) Press [F9] while the transcript is open in the transcript editor window. 2) Alternatively, click on File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A].
Figure 273: Saving As SmartCAT .JOB document
10
a) Give the transcript a different name if you wish, to save a copy of the transcript, or leave as is to save with the name already in use. b) Click Save and the transcript is saved as a SmartCAT transcript file.
10.7.2
RTF
.RTF (Rich Text Format) files are readable by many word processors or can be imported into other CAT programs such as TurboCAT. To save a file as .RTF: 1) Be sure the transcript is open in the transcript editor window. 2) Click File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A].
227
CHAPTER 10 FINISHING TOOLS / PRINTING 3) Click on the drop-down arrow in the Save as type: field to choose the RTF/CRE (Rich Text Format/Court Reporting Extensions) Transcript (*.rtf) option. 4) Click in the File name: field, then type the name of the file. Be sure to include the .rtf extension in the file name.
10.7.3
RTF (Notes)
Figure 274: Saving As RTF
The other type of .RTF file is used for notes. You can save a notes file as .RTF and copy to a floppy disk or attach as email to send to other CAT software users. To save notes as an .RTF: 1) Ensure the transcript is open in the transcript editor window. 2) Click File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A].
10
3) Click on the drop-down arrow in the Save as type: field to choose the RTF/CRE Note (*.rtf) option. 4) Click in the File name: field and type in the name of the file. Be sure to type the .rtf extension in the file name. 5) Click Save and the notes file is saved as RTF. Understanding RTF/CRE RTF/CRE is a standard file format for exchanging transcripts, notes files, and dictionaries between different CAT systems. RTF/CRE stands for "Rich Text Format/Court Reporting Extensions." "Rich Text Format" is a standard introduced by Microsoft in 1987 for exchanging files between different word processors. RTF is supported by most major word processing packages. The "Court Reporting Extensions" are extensions to the RTF file format that supports specific court reporting information, such as steno, timestamps, untranslates, conflicts, indexing, line numbering, and more. Using RTF/CRE, people on different CAT systems can exchange files without losing the important information that is lost when using ASCII to exchange files (such as steno, paragraphing, boldfacing, indexing information, etc.). This means that a scopist using Eclipse, for example, can easily work with a reporter using SmartCAT, and vice-versa. 228 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 275: Saving Notes As RTF
Also, two reporters working on the same daily job can exchange job dictionaries, title pages, and so on, making it easier to work together. Using RTF/CRE, you can also share files between your CAT system and many word processing programs. If an attorney wants an electronic copy of your transcript for review, you don't have to provide an ASCII. Instead, assuming the attorney uses a word processor that supports RTF (such as Microsoft Word), you can provide an RTF file containing most of the proper formatting, boldfacing, etc.
10.7.4
Text
Text files are plain documents without formatting. Text files are in ASCII file format, generally readable in nearly any available text editor including Windows Notepad, WordPad, most word processors, and DOS text editors. Saving as a text file does not keep the standard transcript formatting ie; line numbers, headers/footers. If you want just the transcript text, save as text. If you want it to look like a finished transcript, print/export as a Page Image ASCII. To save a transcript as a text file: 1) Make sure the document is open in the transcript editor window. Click File Save a Copy As. 2) Click the drop-down arrow in the Save as type: field and choose Text File (*.txt). 3) Give your file a name in the File name dialog field. Include the extension .txt. 4) Click Save and your file is saved to your working directory.
10.7.5
HTML
10
HTML files are becoming a universal format due to the popularity of the Internet. You can export SmartCAT files as HTML documents. This allows any person with an Internet web browser to open and view the transcript. To save a transcript as an HTML document: 1) Open the document in the transcript editor. 5) Click File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A]. 2) In the drop-down dialog field, choose HTML. 3) In the File name dialog field, type the name of the file and the extension .HTML 4) Click Save and the file is saved as an HTML document.
229
5) You can send the document via email or disk to anyone with a web browser and they will be able to open and read the document.
Figure 276: Example HTML File
10
230
10.8
E-Mailing Files (With Outlook or Thunderbird)
1) Locate the file you wish to email. 2) Right click on the file and move your cursor to Send To and click Mail Recipient.
Figure 277: Send To Email Recipient via Right-Click
or 3) Left-click the file and click Edit Send to Mail Recipient. 4) Your default email program should open.
10
Figure 278: Outlook Email Window
231
5) Type the email address of the recipient, then fill in the subject line and add text to the body of the email just like sending a regular email. 6) Send the email with the attachment to the recipient. If you have an email provider, such as AOL, please consult with that provider for specific instructions on how to email. Due to the large number of email programs, this manual cannot show the process for every single one. Please read the instructions that come with your email program to learn how to attach files. Most email programs also include a help menu that you can use to learn how to attach files.
Figure 279: Outlook Send Button
10
232
CHAPTER 11 DICTIONARIES
CHAPTER 11
Dictionaries
Dictionaries are used to translate your steno machine keystrokes into English text and commands on the computer screen. This is accomplished in Realtime (while you are writing with the steno machine), or when transcribing notes into a text transcript.
In This Chapter
11.1 Import a TurboCAT Dictionary ............................................................................ 234 11.2 Opening Dictionaries .............................................................................................. 235 11.3 Creating New Dictionaries ..................................................................................... 235 11.4 Saving Changes And Exiting The Dictionary ....................................................... 236 11.5 Dictionary Save a Copy As / Exporting ................................................................ 237 11.6 Printing a Dictionary .............................................................................................. 238 11.7 Merging Dictionaries .............................................................................................. 239 11.8 Dictionary Maintenance ......................................................................................... 240 11.9 Tokens And Special Entries .................................................................................... 247
11
233
11.1
Import a TurboCAT Dictionary
If you previously used Cheetah Internationals CAT program, TurboCAT, you can import and convert your dictionaries into the SmartCAT format. To import TurboCAT dictionaries: 1) Open SmartCAT. 2) Go to the Job Menu. 3) Click File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Dictionary [D]. 4) The Open dialog box appears. 5) Click on the down arrow to the right of the Look In: dialog box. 6) Click the drive where the dictionary is located. 7) Change the Files of Type field to TurboCAT Perm Dictionary .DIC or TurboCAT Job Dictionary .JOB.
Figure 280: Open / Import Dictionary
11
8) Click on the dictionary name to import. 9) Click Open [Enter]. 10) Wait a few moments as the dictionary imports into SmartCAT.
Importing the dictionary may take a few moments as it is processing. The time it takes to import varies according to the size of the TurboCAT dictionary you are importing.
11) Give the dictionary a new name if you wish by clicking in the File name dialog box and typing in a name. You can keep the original dictionary name by simply clicking on the Save button. 12) Click Save [Enter], then wait a few moments while the dictionary is saved. 13) After the dictionary is saved, it can be opened for editing, adding or deleting entries, or any other operation involving the dictionary.
Figure 281: Saving Imported Dictionaries
234
11.2
Opening Dictionaries
Figure 282: Open Dictionary from the Tool bar
To edit a dictionary, the dictionary must first be opened. 1) Click File [Alt+F] Open Dictionary [D], Dictionary [Alt+D] Open Dictionary [O] or click on the Open Dictionary icon in the toolbar. (Figure 282) 2) Select the appropriate dictionary from the Open Dictionary dialog box. 3) Click Open [Enter]. This will open the dictionary in the dictionary editor.
Figure 284: Dictionary Editor
Figure 283: Open Dictionary
11.3
Creating New Dictionaries
11
1) Click File [Alt+F] New Dictionary [I] (or Dictionary [Alt+D] New Dictionary [N]). A Dictionary Entry dialog box opens. To quickly open the Dictionary Entry dialog box, click on the New Dictionary icon on the job menu toolbar.
Figure 285: New Dictionary from the Toolbar Figure 286: New Dictionary Name
2) Type a name for the new dictionary and click on the OK button. 3) A blank dictionary screen opens.
235
Figure 287: Blank Dictionary Edit Screen
11.4
Saving Changes And Exiting The Dictionary
An open dictionary's current saved/unsaved status is indicated by the presence of an asterisk in the title bar. If the open dictionary has been modified and has not been saved, there will be an asterisk in the title bar. Save changes to the dictionary by pressing [F9], or click File [Alt+F] Save [S], or File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A]. Pressing [F10] automatically saves any changes and closes the dictionary.
11
Figure 288: Unsaved Dictionary
If you choose to close the dictionary without saving, click File [Alt+F] Close File [C]. If you made entry changes, a dialog box appears, asking if you want to save the file. Choose Yes, No, or Cancel.
It is a good idea to save the dictionary periodically as you edit it to make sure previous changes are saved in the event of power failure or inadvertent shutdowns of the computer system. To save the dictionary without opening the File drop-down menu, click on the disk icon found in the tool bar at the top of the dictionary screen or press [F9]. Click File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As [A] to save the dictionary with a new name. A Save As dialog box opens. Type a new name for the dictionary in the File Name field and click Save to save the dictionary with its new name.
11.4.1
Dictionary Backup Feature
SmartCAT has the ability to make multiple backups of your dictionaries for you. The backups are created any time you press [F9], [F10] or any time a dictionary is written to. The backups are saved incrementally to a backups folder inside your main work directory. Inside this folder, it creates backups with the extension "-b##.dic", such as "demo-b00.dic, horse-b01.dic, horse-b02.dic", and so on. The lowest numbered backup will always be the newest version. 236 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
11.5
Dictionary Save a Copy As / Exporting
An existing dictionary in SmartCAT can be exported to the following file formats. Exporting any dictionary leaves the original dictionary intact and creates a copy of the dictionary. HTML File (*.html) - Saves the dictionary to html format so that the file can be displayed as a web page. This is considered the "prettiest" dictionary export option. SmartCAT Dictionary File (*.dic) - This is used to make a copy of the dictionary with a different name, or to copy the dictionary to another drive for backup. Phonetic Dictionary File (*.phn) - Saves the dictionary to a phonetic dictionary file format. RealEdit Dictionary File (*.red) - Saves the dictionary to a RealEdit dictionary file format. RTF/CRE Dictionary File (*.rtf) - Saves the dictionary to an RTF (rich text format) file format, which can be read by most word processing programs. Text File (*.txt) - Saves the dictionary to a text file format also known as ASCII.
11.5.1
Steps To Export
With the dictionary open, click on the File [Alt+F] Save a Copy As... [A] menu option. The Save As dialog box opens. (Figure 289)
11
Figure 289: Save A Copy As Menu Option
237
CHAPTER 11 DICTIONARIES 1) Choose the location to save the dictionary to by using the drop down arrow for the Save in: box at the top of the Save As dialog box. Choose the new location for the dictionary. In this example, we are saving the dictionary to the SmartCAT Work Directory YourName. 2) Type in a file name if a different name for the dictionary if needed. 3) Change the Save as type to the new file type for the dictionary (.DIC in our example.) (Figure 290)
Figure 290: Save as Type Drop Down
4) Click the Save button to save the dictionary to the new location with the new name and file type.
11.6
Printing a Dictionary
1) Go to File [Alt+F] Print [P] Print Dictionary [D].
11
2) This option prints the dictionary in a readable format. It will print what is shown in the dictionary editor. 3) Use a filter to display what you wish to print. Filters are covered in Section 11.8.7.
Figure 291: A Printed Dictionary
238
11.7
Merging Dictionaries
SmartCAT lets you merge dictionaries into each other. To merge two dictionaries, click on the Tools [Alt+T] Merge Dictionaries... [M] menu option, or the Dictionary [Alt+D] Merge Dictionaries [M] menu option (They both do the same thing).
Figure 293: Merge Dictionaries in Dictionary Menu Figure 292: Merge Dictionaries in Tools
The following dialog box opens up:
11
Figure 294: Merge Dictionaries Dialog
Select the dictionaries to merge by selecting one dictionary from each box. In Figure 294, the dictionary "Your Temporary Dictionary" will be merged into the "Your Main Dictionary. To merge these two dictionaries together, click the OK button. Entries marked 'temporary' 1) When the merge process is complete, you will see a message box. (Figure 295) 2) Click the OK button. The merge process is complete.
or 'delete' will not be moved.
239
Figure 295: Merge Dictionaries Confirmation Dialog
11.8
Dictionary Maintenance
Locating Dictionary Entries
11.8.1
While a dictionary is open, click Edit [Alt+E] Find [F] or [Ctrl+F] to open the Find dialog box. If no matches are found or you reach the end of the dictionary, SmartCAT will let you know with a No Matches Found message. Search for Steno Click the Steno radio button and enter the steno to search for in the empty Steno field. Search for Text Click the Text radio button, enter the text to search for in the empty Text field. Match Case
Figure 296: Locating Steno
11
Check the Match case option to find only those words or steno exactly matching the capitalization as you typed it. For example, if Match case is not checked, searching for the English text Cat will find cat and CAT. If it is checked, only Cat is found. Match Whole Word Only Check the Match whole word only option to ignore partial words. For example, if Whole words only is not checked, search for the English text the finds their and other. If it is checked, only the is found.
If your dictionary is very large, filtering may make it easier to locate entries. See Section 11.8.7 to learn how to make and use filters.
240
Direction Click one of the direction radio buttons to choose the direction for the search. Choosing down searches downwards from the current position. Choosing Up searches upwards from the current position. Repeat The Last Search/Find Press [L] to repeat the search using the same parameters. You can also click Edit [Alt+E] Find [F], then click Find Next. Continue pressing [L] or Find Next until the search is complete.
11.8.2
Adding New Entries
1) Add entries to the newly created dictionary by clicking on Dictionary [Alt+D] Add Entry [A] menu option or by pressing the [Insert] key. 2) The Add entry dialog box opens. (Figure 298) 3) Type the steno (or use the steno writer) for the entry in the Steno: field and type the English text for the steno in the Text: field. 4) Mark the entry as Permanent, Temporary, Used or Deleted. 5) Click OK when finished.
Figure 298: Add Entry Dialog Box Figure 297: Add Entry
11.8.3
Editing Existing Entries
11
To edit a dictionary entry: 1) Click on the entry you wish to edit. 2) Click Dictionary [Alt+D] Edit Entry [E] or press [Enter]. 3) The dictionary entry dialog box opens. (Figure 298) 4) Change the steno in the Steno: field. 5) Change the English (if needed) in the Text: field. 6) Click OK to save the edited entry. 7) Click Cancel to cancel the edit operation.
Figure 299: Edit Entry in Dictionary Menu
241
CHAPTER 11 DICTIONARIES Right-Click Editing
To quickly open the Dictionary Entry dialog box, right click on a dictionary entry. This will give you options to Edit, Delete, Insert, or Mark entries. (Figure 300)
11.8.4
Check Spelling
The dictionary editor lets you check the spelling of single entries or scan the entire dictionary for suspect words.
Figure 300: Selecting Insert (Add) Entry
Spell Check The Current Entry To check the spelling of a word in a dictionary entry, place the cursor on the entry and press [ALT + F9]. If all the words in the entry are spelled correctly, a message appears. (Figure 301)
Figure 301: Word Spelled Correctly Message
11
If a word is suspect, a dialog box opens:
Figure 302: Dictionary Spell Check
Several options are available to Ignore the entry, Add the entry to the Spell Check lexicon, Change the word, Cancel the operation, or Help. Type the correct spelling in the Change: field or click on a word in the word list (if any words appear) to correct the entry. Click Change to accept the change. 242 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Scan The Dictionary For Misspelled Words Click Tools [Alt+T] Check Spelling [C] or press [Ctrl+M] to scan the dictionary for suspect entries. The Spelling dialog box opens as it did when checking a single entry and the same options are available.
11.8.5
Sorting Dictionary Entries
Entries are normally displayed in reverse steno order; the order in which dictionary entries are displayed can be changed. Dictionaries can be sorted in alphabetical order or steno order. To sort entries in the current dictionary; 1) Click on the Dictionary [Alt+D] menu. 2) Choose the sort method you wish to use: a) Sort by Steno [S] b) Sort by Text [T] 3) The new sort order is displayed after the sort process is completed.
Figure 303: Sort Option in Dictionary Menu
The sort process may take a short while, depending on the size of your dictionary and the speed of your computer.
11.8.6
Tagging Dictionary Entries
In the Dictionary Editor there are three "tags" you can attach to an entry. A dictionary entry can have only one of these tags attached at a time. Delete Trash (Temp) Used
11
Delete Tag To tag an entry to be deleted, select the entry and press [D]. A "D" appears in the middle column to the right of the steno.
Figure 304: Delete Entry Tag
The entry is not deleted until you exit and save the dictionary. To unmark an entry tagged to be deleted, press [D] again. The "D" tag to the right of the steno disappears. Dictionary entries that you delete from the Transcript Editor are only tagged like this until you either save the dictionary from the Dictionary Editor, or do a dictionary merge. When you save a dictionary with entries that are marked to be deleted SmartCAT will display a prompt dialog. (Figure 305)
243
Figure 305: Purge Entries Confirmation
Temp/Trash Tag A dictionary entry marked as "temp" is used when translating, but is not merged during the dictionary merge process. To tag an entry as trash/temp, select the entry and press [X]. A "T" appears to the right of the steno. To unmark an entry tagged as "temp," press [X] again. The "T" tag to the right of the steno disappears.
Figure 306: Temp/Trash Tag
Used Tag A dictionary will have a tendency to accumulate old, unnecessary entries. A dictionary that has a large number of unused entries can slow down your translation and make dictionary maintenance cumbersome. To help strip out the unused entries in a dictionary, SmartCAT automatically marks dictionary entries with "used tags" each time an entry is used during translation (dictionary entries are not marked as 'used' during Realtime). "Used" tags help you keep track of the dictionary entries you use. They are also used by the "Strip Unused Entries" function. To manually tag an entry as "used", select the entry and press [U].
11
Figure 307: Entry Marked as Used
Strip Unused Entries After you have been marking entries with "used tags for about a year, you are ready to strip the unused entries. First, save a copy of the dictionary. Open the dictionary and click Dictionary [Alt+D] Strip Unused Entries [U]. A window will pop-up asking you if you are sure you want to do this. Press the YES button to begin. SmartCAT displays a progress bar as it goes through your dictionary, keeping track of all "used," "unused," and "deleted" entries. Stripped entries are saved in a new dictionary called STRIPPED.DIC. This dictionary is saved in the 244
If, after you run the "Strip Unused Entries" function, your stripped dictionary does not translate at an acceptable rate, you can merge the stripped entries back into your dictionary. For information see Section 11.7.
SmartCAT created working directory. Do not delete the dictionary STRIPPED.DIC until you are absolutely sure that your translation rate is acceptable with your "stripped" main dictionary! If the 'stripped.dic' dictionary already exists, a second warning box will prompt you to choose if you want to replace those unused entries with the new ones. A third window will display a summary once the stripping is complete.
11.8.7
Dictionary Filters
Dictionary filters are very powerful tools to assist in displaying specific types of entries, sorting entries, locate groups of entries with similar attributes and much more. To filter dictionary entries, open a dictionary for editing. Click Dictionary [Alt+D] Filter Setup [P]. This opens the Dictionary Filter dialog box. (Figure 308) In the dialog box, check the options to use for filtering. Many combinations are available for editing or working with dictionary entries. By activating various combinations, it is possible to locate very specific groups of entries. To activate a specific function Figure 308: Dictionary Filter Dialog Box in the filter dialog box, click in the square check box to put a check mark in it. To deactivate the function, click in the check box once again to remove the check mark.
Exclude [Alt+X]
11
Check this box, then choose options for the exclusion. Use the Steno or English Text boxes, then type steno or English text to exclude. Check Conflicts by Steno or Conflicts by English to exclude all steno or English text conflicts.
Experiment with various combinations of check boxes to further refine your filters. The possibilities are virtually endless.
Steno or English typed in one of the fields exclude that entry from the list if the appropriate Steno or English Text check box is active. Use in conjunction with Matches Exactly and/or Whole Words Only options to narrow the filtered list even further.
245
Steno [Alt+S]
Check this box and type the steno entry in the field to the immediate right to filter steno. Use with Match Exactly and/or Whole Words Only options. Use with other options to refine the filter.
English Text [Alt+T]
Activate this box and type English text in the field to the immediate right to filter English text. Use with other options to refine the filter.
Conflicts by Steno [Alt+C]
Check this box to list dictionary conflicts by steno entry. Use with other options such as temp, used, or others to refine the filter even further.
Conflicts by English [Alt+E]
Check this box to list dictionary conflicts by English text. Use with other options such as temp, used, or others to further refine the filter.
Temp. Entries [Alt+P]
Check this box to view temporary entries only. Use in conjunction with exclude, Match Exactly, and other options.
Used [Alt+U]
Check this box to view entries that are tagged as used entries. Use in conjunction with other boxes to refine the filter using Steno or English Text, conflicts, etc.
11
Tagged Dictionary Entries [Alt+G]
Check this box to view all entries that are tagged. This can also be used in conjunction with other boxes including Steno or English Text, conflicts, used, tagged, etc.
Marked for Deletion [Alt+D]
Check this box to view only entries marked for deletion. This can also be used in conjunction with other boxes including Steno or English Text, conflicts, used, tagged, etc.
Matches Exactly [Alt+M]
Check this box and use in conjunction with other options to refine the list to match exactly with the text or steno entered in the steno or text fields. If left unchecked, all entries appear if any portion of the entry has the steno or English within the entry. Use also for entries that include upper and/or lower case characters.
Whole Words Only [Alt+W]
Check this box and use in conjunction with other options to further refine the list to show only entries that are whole words. For example, if the box is checked, and the filter is set to find the English text Ex, only the entries Ex are listed. If left unchecked, all entries with Ex within the entry are listed. This function is used in conjunction with several other options such as Exclude, temp, and others.
246
Turning Filters Off To return to an unfiltered dictionary entry display, click Dictionary [Alt+D] Filter off [F]. The dictionary list returns to its original state. Saving Filters It is possible to use various filtered entries to refine a dictionary for later editing, creating new or for use as separate job dictionaries when in Realtime. For example: When filtering, choose the option Temp Entries, without other options, click OK, and only temporary dictionary entries are displayed. Next, open the Dictionary Menu again [Alt+D], then choose Save filtered entries to a dictionary [R]. Give the filtered dictionary a name such as TEMPFILT.DIC (or any name you wish), then click OK. A new dictionary is saved containing only temporary entries. This is also useful to filter through many thousands of entries to create new dictionaries, including only specific terms such as medical or legal, for example. You may wish to create different ways to view your dictionaries without creating filters each time. You can create filters as described above, then save the filtered entries as new dictionaries.
11.9
Tokens And Special Entries
Tokens are dictionary definitions that have a special function (as opposed to entries that are just normal text). Using tokens, you can define dictionary entries that define punctuation, create new paragraphs, underline words, and more.
11.9.1
Punctuation Tokens
11
SmartCAT uses tokens to define punctuation characters. This is because punctuation marks often require that a certain number of spaces follow them, and may require that the next word be capitalized (as is the case with the period). The following table lists punctuation tokens and how they work when translated. Punctuation Token
<"> <:> <,> <-> <.> <?> <!> <'> <;> </>
Description
Automatic quote mark Colon (no space before, two spaces after, cap next word) Comma (no space before, one space after) Hyphen (no spaces before or after) End-of-sentence period/question mark/exclamation point (no space before, two spaces after, cap next word) Possessive apostrophe (no spaces before, one after) Semicolon (no space before, one space after) Slash (no spaces before or after)
Table 15 Punctuation Tokens
247
A dictionary entry that combines text and punctuation tokens must have the text outside of the tokens angle brackets. For example, to put a question mark at the end of is that correct, you must write it as: is that correct<?> Some punctuation characters should not be written as tokens. In the following examples, the punctuation characters do not behave like normal punctuation and should not be written with angle brackets: dont Mr. I.B.M. 3:30 p.m.
11.9.2
Quotes
In addition to the basic punctuation characters, SmartCAT also has a special quote token. When the token <"> is translated, a quote is inserted. Any end-of-sentence punctuation character (period, question mark, or exclamation point) can be combined as a token with a quote mark. For example, the token <?> inserts a question mark followed by a closing quote, then two spaces and capitalizes the next word.
11
11.9.3
Hard Spaces
A hard space is an invisible character. Hard spaces are useful when making dictionary entries that have words that do not split between two lines. A hard space between the words (instead of a normal space) will hold the words together but will still be printed as a normal space. In dictionary entries a hard space is written as the caret character (^). Angle brackets are not necessary around a hard space. As an example, define the dictionary entry for et al with a hard space, like this: et^al This assures that both words in et al always appear together on the same line when printed.
11.9.4
Prefixes
To create a dictionary entry for a prefix (such as pre or semi), include a tilde (~) (also called the delete-space character) at the end of the entry. For example: pre~ semi~ This character tells SmartCAT to exclude a space between this and the next word. 248 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
11.9.5
Suffixes
Smart Suffixes aka Smart Word Endings SmartCAT automatically corrects the spelling of words when suffixes are added during translation. To create a dictionary entry for a suffix (such as "ing" or "ness"), include a tilde (~) (also called the "delete-space" character), at the beginning of the entry. For example: ~ing ~ness This character tells SmartCAT to exclude a space between this and the previous word. The Smart Word Endings rules know when to double the final consonant on a word (run + ~ing = running), when to drop a final e (take + ~ing = taking) and even when to change an ie to a y (tie + ~ing = tying). See Section 9.2 for the Smart Word Endings on/off check box setting in Editing Preferences. Dumb Suffixes Some dictionary entries tie up with preceding text, but they arent really suffixes by the rules of English grammar. For these entries, use an alternate delete-space character, the plus sign (+). When suffixes are preceded by a plus sign (instead of a tilde), they are treated exactly like the delete-space (~) except that any applicable Smart Word Ending rules are ignored.
Smart Word Endings eliminate the need for most derived words (like taking, running, tying, etc.) in your dictionary. However, there are many words that do not fit the standard rules which will need to be added as dictionary entries.
Examples of dumb suffixes are +out (e.g., layout, workout) or +like (e.g., lifelike, childlike). Since these arent genuine suffixes (like ~ly or ~ing), they should be defined using the plus sign instead of the tilde. The plus sign is treated as a delete-space only at the beginning of a dictionary entry. It does not work for prefixes.
11
11.9.6
Bookmarks
1) To create a bookmark with no text, use: <K> 2) To create a bookmark with specific text, use: <K text> Bookmarks are covered in depth in Section 9.10.4.
11.9.7
Literals
Although certain characters (such as the angle brackets and backslash) have a special meaning in dictionary definitions, SmartCAT has a way to include these characters as part of dictionary entries. When preceded by a backslash (\) the character becomes a literal. This means that the character is inserted as a character and not treated as though it had a CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 249
special meaning. For example, if you want a dictionary entry to translate as <Laughter>, your dictionary entry would have to be \<Laughter\>. because angle brackets are usually used to indicate tokens. The following characters should be added to the dictionary as literals in order to translate properly as characters: Character
\ < + > ~
Description
Backslash Left angle-bracket Plus sign Right angle-bracket Tilde
Non-Literal
Designates literals Token delimiter Delete space when at the beginning of an entry Token delimiter Delete space character
Table 16 Literals
11.9.8
Paragraph Tokens
Using dictionary entries, SmartCAT can start a new paragraph of any type. The following table lists each paragraph type, it's dictionary entry token, and a description. Paragraph Type
Question Answer Colloquy Colloquy with speaker ID
Token
<Q> <A> <C> <C:NAME>< Q> <C:NAME>Q <C:<SPKID1>> <Q+>, <A+>, <C+>, etc... <$> <M> <R> <P2> <*> 
Description
Used for questions, this paragraph type automatically inserts Q on the 1st line. Used for answers, this paragraph type automatically inserts A on the 1st line. This paragraph type is used for normal dialog. This creates a Colloquy paragraph with MR. SMITH: Q. at the beginning and automatically ends the paragraph with a question mark. You can use any speaker name you want. Causes the current line to stick to the first line of the following paragraph so they will both remain on the same page. This paragraph is used as the subsequent paragraph when Questions or Answers are too long for a single paragraph. The first and all subsequent lines of this paragraph type are on the left margin. This paragraph type is used for portions of the transcript read back by the reporter. It is the only paragraph type with a right indent setting. This paragraph is generally used for non-spoken information such as the time of adjournment or lunch breaks. This is an additional paragraph generally used for nonspoken information such as the time of adjournment or lunch breaks. This paragraph type centers the text on the page. This paragraph type is created when you generate an index.
11
Stick to Next Continuation Margin Readback Parenthetical 1 Parenthetical 2 Centered Index
Table 17 Paragraph Tokens
If a paragraph token is translated but there is no ending punctuation for the previous paragraph, SmartCAT will automatically insert appropriate ending punctuation before starting the new paragraph.
250
11.9.9
Attribute Tokens
Token
 <B-> <_> <_-> <I-> <SPR> <SPR-> <SUB-> <N> <L> <RED> <RED->
Here is a list of attribute tokens: Description

Start boldface Stop boldface Start underlining Stop underlining Start italicizing Stop italicizing Start superscripting Stop superscripting Start subscripting Stop subscripting Back to normal (no attributes) Initial cap the next word Lower case the next letter Start redacting text Stop redacting text
Table 18 Attribute Tokens
For example, the dictionary entries: <_>SmartCAT<_-> by Cheetah International<B-> a really<I-> loud noise H2<SUB->O SmartCAT<I-><SPR>TM<SPR-> Translate as: SmartCAT by Cheetah International a really loud noise H2O SmartCATTM
11
251
The upper case token () is useful at the end of dictionary entries such as Mr., Dr., and Mrs. since the next word will usually be a capitalized proper name. For example, define Mr. as Mr.^ and the following word will always be initial capped. (The caret (^) is a hard space that will tie the word Mr. to the next word.) The lower case token (<L>) is useful when translating in all capitals, but need to force a single character to be lower case. For example, define the name McDonald as M<L>cDonald
11.9.10
Finger Spelling
Special tokens for finger spelling define each letter of the alphabet, and how words will appear when you spell them out. Letters for spelling the alphabet are entered with an S, followed by a colon, then the letter, all in angle brackets, like this: <S:A> Spelling mode letter A <S:B> Spelling mode letter B <S:C> Spelling mode letter C
11
Numbers can also be defined as spelling characters, like this: <S:1> Spelling mode number 1 <S:2> Spelling mode number 2 <S:3> Spelling mode number 3 When words are spelled out using this alphabet, the characters, by default, come out stitched. This means that each character in the word is separated by a hyphen. For example: S-m-i-t-h Words spelled using these tokens, by default, translate with an initial capital letter if the Theory option Stitch with Lower Case check box is checked in Setup [Alt+S] Theory Settings/Translation Options [T]. Otherwise, they translate in all capitals. Another finger spelling token, <SPELL>, changes how words appear when they are spelled out using the spelling alphabet tokens described earlier in this section. The <SPELL> token changes the character between each letter. This allows the character stitched between letters to be something other than the hyphen. And whether the separator character will follow the last letter.
252
The <SPELL> token is written in angle brackets as the word SPELL followed by the separator character. For example: <SPELL-> <SPELL.> <SPELL*> <SPELL> C-A-T C.A.T C*A*T CAT
Capitalization can also be customized. Follow the separator character with a comma and either a C to spell in all capitals, an L for all lower case, or an I for initial caps. To indicate that the last spelled letter should be followed by the separator character, use F (for follow). Here are some examples of how different <SPELL> tokens would affect the spelled word cat: <SPELL-,I> C-a-t (Spell using - as the separator, and initial capital) <SPELL> <SPELL,I> CAT Cat (Spell without a separator character) (Spell without a separator character, and initial capital)
<SPELL.,F> C.A.T. (Spell using . as the separator and follow the last letter with the separator character) <SPELL*,L> c*a*t (Spell using * as the separator, and all lower case) <SPELL,,LF>c,a,t, (Spell using , as the separator, all lower case, and follow the last letter with the separator character) After a <SPELL> token is stroked, all subsequent spelled words will use that format until a different <SPELL> token is stroked. If several different spelling alphabets are used, precede each letter of each alphabet with the proper <SPELL> formatting token. This will avoid having to stroke a formatting token each time finger spelling is employed. For example, if the steno for normal stitching alphabet is different from the steno for a no spaces alphabet, define each letter in the two alphabets with the appropriate <SPELL> token, like this normal stitching alphabet: /A /PW /KR <SPELL-,I><S:A> <SPELL-,I><S:B> <SPELL-,I><S:C>
In the last example, the separator character is a comma, so there are two commas in the <SPELL> token: One for the separator character, and one to set off the options. Also, note that both the lower case and follow options are set just by putting the option characters next to each other.
11
and this no spaces alphabet: /A* /PW* /KR* <SPELL><S:A> <SPELL><S:B> <SPELL><S:C>
253
The <SPELL> stroke can also be embedded in a dictionary entry. For example, the dictionary entry: state your name<SPELL-,I> automatically sets up SmartCAT to stitch with hyphens between each letter and an initial capital (e.g., J-o-n-e-s).
11.9.11 Token
Spacing Between Stitched Words With the <NULL>
When a blank space is needed between two stitched words, for example: J-O-H-N S-M-I-T-H use the <NULL> token. This token tells the computer that the first stitched word is finished, and not to follow the last letter with a hyphen (or any separator character).
11.9.12
The Autoinclude <Get> Token
Dictionary entries can be defined to automatically bring include files into your transcripts during translation. These dictionary entries are called Autoincludes. Autoinclude tokens are entered in the dictionary as the word GET followed by the name of the include file in angle brackets, like this: <Get _Title>
11
When this entry is translated, it automatically inserts the file _TITLE.TXT from the current work directory into your transcript. Specify a drive and path for the file to get, like this: <Get C:\Jane\_Cert> This gets the file _CERT.TXT from the C:\JANE directory regardless of the current work directory.
11.9.13
The Realtime Output <SUSPEND> Token
SmartCAT includes tokens that let you temporarily suspend Realtime output to all "client" stations while continuing to input Realtime text to your "host" computer. This feature lets you transcribe conferences "in chambers" or other "off the record" dialog without stopping and restarting Realtime. There are three <SUSPEND> tokens that let you easily tell SmartCAT when to suspend Realtime output and when to resume: <SUSPEND ON>, <SUSPEND OFF>, and <SUSPEND>. While "suspend mode" is on, your steno continues to translate in Realtime on your computer but output to "client" stations stops.
254
If you prefer to use a single dictionary definition to turn suspend mode on and off, the token <SUSPEND> acts as a toggle (i.e., it turns suspend mode on if its off, and off if its on).
11.9.14
Speaker ID tokens
In the Edit [Alt+E] and Setup [Alt+S] menus of SmartCAT, you can open the Edit Speaker ID [I] dialog, which is where you can store Speaker ID information related to your Speaker ID tokens. In your dictionary, instead of having entries for "Mr. Snew" and "Mr. Screw", you can define the tokens: <SPKID1>, <SPKID2>, <SPKID3> and so forth (up to #9). These tokens will directly relate to whichever entries you have in the Edit Speaker ID window and will change whenever you change the ids in the speaker id window. So, to define a Colloquy with Speaker ID #1, you would define it as: <C:<SPKID1>> Speaker IDs are considered to be linked with the tokens if they either transcribed from a dictionary or from a global (text or steno) with the token. If you replace [R] to insert a Speaker ID token, it will put in the associated Speaker ID text, however since it's no longer considered to have a translation, it will not change if you subsequently alter the Edit Speaker ID window.
11
Figure 309: Edit Speaker IDs
Speaker ID tokens will also work in headers, footers and index entries.
255
11
256
CHAPTER 12 UTILITIES
CHAPTER 12
Utilities
There are a few extra things living under the hood that you may not have known about. They can come in very handy while working in SmartCAT.
In This Chapter...
12.1 ASCII Import and Cleanup Tool ............................................................................. 258 12.2 Unarchiving (Restoring) TurboCAT Files .............................................................. 260 12.3 Backups, Archiving & Transferring Jobs ............................................................... 261 12.4 PDF995 ...................................................................................................................... 271 12.5 Signature995 .............................................................................................................. 272 12.6 WordNet .................................................................................................................... 273 12.7 Logging ...................................................................................................................... 274 12.8 Crash Assistance ....................................................................................................... 274
12
257
12.1
ASCII Import and Cleanup Tool
The ASCII Import Tool allows you to import ASCII Transcripts into SmartCAT. It gives you the ability to make a few edits to the ASCII before you actually import it into SmartCAT. Access this tool from the Job Menu by clicking File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import ASCII Transcript [A]. The Open dialog box will pop up. Choose the ASCII .TXT/.PRT file and click Open [Enter]. SmartCAT will disappear and bring up the import tool.
12
Figure 310: ASCII Import Tool
Select New File This opens the ASCII file selection menu. Use this to choose a new ASCII file to import. Remove Page Breaks This removes all the page breaks from the file (highlighted in blue). Add [] Spaces after Line #s This box allows you to add a certain number of spaces to the beginning of each line of the file. If the line has line numbers, the spaces will be added between the line number and the text. File This specifies the name and type (if detected) of file.
258
Undo Changes Undoes all the changes made to the file since the last save. SAVE! Saves the file as-is. Preserve Selected Spaces This highlights the selected area. Any blank lines which start in the yellow highlighted area will not be removed by the Remove Blank Lines Button. Remove Blank Lines This removes all the empty lines from the document. Primarily, this is for converting a double-spaced ASCII to a single spaced one. Clipping The four boxes for top/left/right/bottom are for the number of characters (on the left or right) or number of lines (on the top or bottom) to be removed from each page of the document. You cannot remove the top or bottom lines if you do not have recognizable page-breaks. The Show button will highlight the area which will be kept once the Clip! button is pushed. The Clip! button clips off the area specified. Conversions
Change file Extension to txt
Changes a .prt extension to .txt.

Change file type to Page Image
12
Converts page breaks to standard ASCII Page breaks, and attempts to double-space the file.
Change file type to Amicus
Converts page breaks to Amicus Page breaks, single spaces the document, and puts the standard Amicus margin on the left.
Change file type to Summation
Converts page breaks to Summation Page breaks, single spaces the document, and puts the standard Summation margin on the left.
Change to SmartCAT File
Converts the ASCII to a SmartCAT job (with current spacing) in your main job menu. Note that you will have to apply any needed clipping. It will properly put page breaks in if they are 'Page Break' style. After you click this button, you will need to name the file and choose the appropriate Style Sheet and click OK. The import tool will close and take you back to the job menu where your newly imported transcript will appear. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 259
12.2
Unarchiving (Restoring) TurboCAT Files
One of the nicer features of SmartCAT is that you can actually use it to unarchive a TurboCAT archive. To do this: 1) Click on the Tools [Alt+T] TC Unarchive [U] menu option. A small pop up window will come up, with two fields, Source and Destination.
Figure 311: TurboCAT Unarchive Dialog Box
2) Click on the button with three dots on it [...] (the one next to the Source field) and browse to the location of your TurboCAT-format archive (usually, this will be your 3-1/2" floppy drive A:). Click OK, and note that the Source field now displays the location of the TurboCAT archive.
(Figure 311)
It is recommended that you unarchive the files into a folder used for this purpose only (other than your work directory), so as to practice good digital housekeeping.
3) Do the same for the Destination field but this time browse to the location in which you want to extract the archived files to. 4) Once both fields are properly filled in, click the OK button to begin the unarchive process.
12
5) It will ask you to Make sure Disk 1 is ready; make sure your floppy disk is in the A: drive (if unarchiving from a floppy disk) and then click OK. 6) It will then ask you if you want to extract the file (Figure 312) for each file in the archive. Click Yes for each file you do want to extract from the TurboCAT archive. Clicking No will not do any harm; it will simply skip the step of extracting that particular file. Continue doing this until you have unarchived all files you require from the disk.
Figure 312: Unarchive Decision Box
7) This will bring the TurboCAT files out of the archive. To then turn them into SmartCat files, see the appropriate sections: importing jobs 6.1, dictionaries 11.1, style sheets 5.2.
260
12.3
Backups, Archiving & Transferring Jobs

Backup Feature
12.3.1
SmartCAT has the ability to make multiple backups of your jobs for you. The backups are created each time you press [F9], [F10] or close your Job Properties when editing a transcript. The backups are saved incrementally to a backups folder inside your main work directory. Inside this folder, it creates backups with the extension "-b##.job", such as "horse-b00.job, horse-b01,job, horse-b02.job", and so on. The lowest numbered backup will always be the newest version. So remember to press [F9] frequently during editing! Don't ever lose your work! To retrieve a backup: 1) Select the job in the job menu and hit Ctrl+B or click File [Alt+F] Job Menu Actions [U] Open Backup [B]. 2) Select the backup you wish to retrieve. 3) If this is a good copy, go to File[Alt+F] Save a Copy as [A] and save it as the original in the Work Directory.
Figure 313: File Job Menu Actions Open Backup
12
12.3.2
Auto Save
SmartCAT also will automatically save the file you're working on periodically, with no input from you! Just go to the Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q] and set the AutoSave interval as you please. When you're editing, SmartCAT will save the file you're working on each time that many minutes has passed. As an added safety feature, SmartCAT will also create a separate file every time it autosaves. If you ever need to recover a file you'd been working on, the very most recent copy will be "job-name.job.bkp". To retrieve this backup file: 1) Select the job in the job menu. 2) Hit Ctrl+B or click File[Alt+F] Job Menu Actions[U] Open Backup[B]. 3) Select Autosave Backup. 4) If this is a good copy, go to File[Alt+F] Save a Copy as [A] and save it over the original in the Work Directory.
261
12.3.3
Manually backing up your files
Since SmartCAT is in the Windows environment, it has the capability of archiving/backing up jobs to multiple formats, including: CD-R / DVD-R 3.5" floppy (not recommended) USB Flash Drives (Sometimes called a thumb/jump drive or memory stick. It's those little sticks you can put on a key chain.) External Hard Drive
It is strongly recommended you regularly make backup copies of your transcript and dictionary files. Here are the top two reasons why saving or backing up files is very important: First, saving the files lets you store your transcripts onto a separate medium other than your hard drive. This means you avoid cluttering your SmartCAT work directory with a lot of jobs you may not need again. Second, saving recent copies of your dictionaries means that if anything ever happens to a copy of a dictionary on your hard drive, such as mechanical or electrical issues, you can easily restore it. Generally, dictionaries are the most important files on the computer, followed by transcripts. Many reporters dictionaries are built over the course of years or decades. It is important to have recent backups of those dictionaries in case of emergencies.
12

You should back up and save any files used by SmartCAT, as well as all dictionaries. There are several ways to save your files. Choose a method you are most comfortable with. Selecting Files to Copy To select a single file in a Windows Explorer window: Single left-click it. Press the Down arrow key until it is highlighted. There are two ways to select multiple files in a Windows Explorer window: 1) With the mouse a) Hold down the Ctrl key and single left-click on each file you want to copy. or b) Single left-click the first file in a range, hold down the Shift key then single left-click the last file in the range. 262
Figure 314: Selecting Files in Your Work Directory
2) With the keyboard a) Press the Down arrow key until the file you want to copy is selected. Hold down the Ctrl key and press the Down arrow key until you reach the next file you want to copy and press the Space Bar to select it. or b) Press the Down arrow key until the file you want to copy is selected. Hold down the Shift key and press the Down arrow key until you reach the last file in the desired range. CDs / DVDs
Cheetah International Inc. does not The easiest method is to copy or burn files endorse a particular CD creation onto a writable CD. If your computer is product. Please choose software that you prefer and are comfortable equipped with a CD or DVD burner/writer, you using. should be able to copy hundreds of files to one or two CDs/DVDs. CDs/DVDs are not sensitive to magnetic fields, so the life span is much longer than diskettes or hard drives. They are however, sensitive to direct sunlight. Do not leave your CDs or DVDs in a place where they are directly exposed to the sun.
If your computer has the capability, copy the entire SmartCAT folder onto a CD or DVD periodically. Doing so allows you to save all system files, including any Hotkeys, Title and Certification include files, Style Sheets, and all other preferences you may have set. If anything happens to the computer, you will save many hours of work by copying the special files back into the SmartCAT folder after restoring your computer.
If you copy files to CDs, it is recommended to separate job files and dictionary files. By copying dictionaries onto a separate CD, you provide added protection to the all-important dictionary files. Plus they will be easier to retrieve if they aren't mixed in with transcripts.
12
Consult your computer manual for information on copying and retrieving files from CDs.
263
Burning CDs Using the Windows XP CD Burning Wizard 1) Insert a blank CD/DVD in the CD/DVD Drive. 2) In the window that appears, select the Open writable CD folder option in the list. (Figure 315) 3) Click the OK button. 4) Locate the files on your computer that you wish to burn to the CD.
Copying the files: Method 1
5) Follow the instructions on selecting files in the above section. Right click on the selected file(s). In the menu that appears, select the Send To option. Then select the CD or DVD Drive in the sub-menu. (Figure 316)
Figure 315: XP Writable CD Autoplay
12
Figure 316: XP Send To CD
264
Copying the files: Method 2
1) Arrange the two windows so that you can see them both on your screen at once. Select the files you want to burn. Click, hold and drag the selected files into the blank space in the CDWritable folder window. 2) In the window that opened in Step 2, you should see the files waiting to be written to the CD. (Figure 317) 3) Click on the item labeled Write these files to CD in the task pane shown in the left hand side of the window. If you Figure 317: Files Ready to be Written to the CD have closed this window, you can open it again by opening My Computer and double-clicking on the CD drive (usually drive D:). 4) In the CD Writing Wizard (Figure 318), fill in the CD name field with the text you want to label the CD. The name cannot be longer than 16 characters. 5) Click the Next button. 6) A progress window will be displayed showing the status of the CD burning operation. 7) Upon successful completion, you will see the completion window. Click the Finish button and you are done!
12
Figure 318: CD Writing Wizard
265
CHAPTER 12 UTILITIES Burning Discs in Windows Vista
Vista has the ability to burn data onto blank CDs, as well as blank DVDs. When you insert a blank disc, the following screen will most likely appear. (Figure 319) 1) Click 'Burn files to disc using Windows'. Windows will then format the disc.
Figure 319: Vista Autoplay Menu
12
2) Name the disc.
Figure 320: Vista - Prepare Blank Disc
3) Now, just like Windows XP, we'll open the folder which contains the files we want to burn to disc. Select the files/folder you would like to copy and click the Burn button.
Figure 321: Burn CD Button in Vista
4) The items will copy onto the CD but the disc isn't quite ready yet. 266 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Figure 322: Vista - Copying files to a CD
5) Click File [Alt+F] Close Session and the disc will be finalized so it can be read on older Windows computers.
Figure 323: Vista - Close Session
6) A pop-up will appear in your Notification Area (formerly known as the 'system tray' in XP), alerting you the disc is being closed. (Figure 324)
12
Figure 324: Vista - Closing Session Notification
7) Another pop-up will alert you when the disc is complete. (Figure 325)
Figure 325: Vista - Copying to disc is done
Burning Discs in Windows 7 1) Insert a blank CD or DVD. 2) Close the Autorun Dialog that may pop up. 3) Go into the your SmartCAT work directory or the location of the files you wish to burn.
267
CHAPTER 12 UTILITIES 4) Follow the steps to select the files you wish to burn as described in the previous section, Selecting Files to Copy. 5) Click the "Burn" button located above the file listing. (Figure 326)
Figure 326: Burn Button in Windows 7
6) Select The "With a CD/DVD player" option in the following window. (Figure 327) 7) Click "Next". 8) This will open another window. Don't close it. 9) You will now have your Work directory open and a burn files to disc window open. At this point you may add any additional files to be burned from any other directory by following steps 4 & 5.
Figure 327: Windows 7 Burning Options
12
10) When you want to commence burning, go to the Burn files to disc window and click the "Burn to disc" button.
(Figure 328)
Figure 328: Windows 7: Burn To Disc Button
268
11) Enter the name of the disc and set the recording speed (default should be fine). (Figure 329) 12) Click Next.
Figure 329: Windows 7: Prepare Disc
3 Floppy Disk (A:\) A floppy disk is a good media for sending jobs and ASCII transcripts to attorneys or other reporters but they aren't recommended for backing up your files. Flash Drives / Memory Sticks Instead of using floppy disks, we at Cheetah International recommend using USB flash drives for your day to day transfer of jobs, dictionaries, and other files. These are also known as "thumb drives", "jump drives", "memory sticks", among other names. Essentially, it works the same as a floppy drive: You can plug it in (into a Thumb Drive USB port, instead of a floppy drive) and it will show up as a drive in your computer (whereas a floppy was always the "A:" drive, a flash drive might show up as the "E:" drive, or the "F:" drive, depending on what has already been used on your computer). Once it is a drive in your computer, you can copy files to and from it just as you would a floppy drive. A floppy can hold 1.44 Mb of data. The smallest available flash drive can hold 25 times that much data, and there are flash drives that can hold a thousand or more times that much. They are available at any store that carries computer products. External Hard Drive An external hard drive works very similar to a flash drive but is much larger in size and storage capacity.
Figure 330:
12
12.3.4
File Compression
You can also use a commercial file compression program to compact many files into a single file that may fit onto a diskette. This is also known as archiving. Which is similar to, CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 269
but not the same as the TurboCat "archiving" feature. A compression program removes extraneous white space in files and saves the text and other information in a compressed file. When the file is once again needed, use the decompress/extract option of the program to expand the file. Any required white space is automatically added back in. Windows XP and Windows Vista both have Compression Utilities built-in.
12.3.5
Locating and Viewing Jobs or Other Files
SC Work Directory When SmartCAT installs it places a SC Work Directory shortcut on your Windows desktop. It is a green folder with a Cheetah Face on it. This is also know as the Green Cheetah Face. Access all of your jobs, dictionaries and more through this shortcut. For more info on the SC Work Directory, see Section 4.2.2 . My Computer / Windows Explorer On your Windows desktop you should see a My Computer shortcut (Computer in Windows Vista ). Through this shortcut, you can access all of the files on you hard drive (often the C: Drive), floppy drive(A:), CD/DVD Drive, and any other removable media such as a flash drive or SD Card. This feature is also known as Windows Explorer, file manager, and file browser. The SmartCAT system files are located here: C:\SmartCAT. Your Work Directory is located here C:\SmartCAT\users\yourname.
Figure 331: "Green Cheetah Face"
12
For further information on using the file system via My Computer, consult the Windows manual or Help files.
12.3.6
Transferring Files
Copying or moving jobs can be done the following way or from your job menu (Section 4.2.3 ). To copy any file to disk follow the procedure below: 1) Find the files you wish to copy/backup using one of the methods described above. 2) Select the file(s) with one of these methods: a) Select one file by left-clicking on it. b) Select multiple files by holding down the [Ctrl] key and left-clicking on multiple files. c) To select a large group of consecutively listed files: i. Left-click the first file. ii. Hold down the [Shift] key. iii. Left-click the last file.
If your file is so large that it exceeds one disk, you may have to use a compression program to compress the file(s) to fit on the disk.
270
3) Click Edit Copy [Ctrl+C] if you would like to copy the file(s). Click Edit Cut [Ctrl+X] if you would like to move the file(s). 4) Go to the destination drive/folder and click Edit Paste [Ctrl+V]. Alternatively, you can select the files then click Edit Copy to folder or Edit Move to folder. This will prompt you to browse to the destination folder and click Copy/Move.
12.4
PDF995
Now, you can create a PDF-formatted file right from SmartCAT. The installer for a PDF printer will be placed in your SmartCAT Utilities folder.
12.4.1
Installing
Open a My Computer window, double-click on your C:\ drive, then double-click on the SmartCAT folder and then double-click on the Util folder.
12
Figure 332: SmartCAT Utilities Folder
Figure 333: PDF 995 Folder
271
CHAPTER 12 UTILITIES pdf995s.exe - The "Print driver" ps2pdf995.exe - The "Free converter"
First, double-click the pdf995s.exe to install the print driver. You will see the WinZip SelfExtractor appear momentarily, then the installer will run automatically. When a PDF995 browser window displays, the first installer is completed. Close the browser window. Next, double-click on ps2pdf995.exe to install the free converter. You will see another box while the installer runs automatically. Again, a PDF995 browser window will display when the installer is completed. Close the browser window.
Figure 334: PDF995 Setup
Now, you can "print" any SmartCAT job to a PDF file! See Section 10.4.4 for more PDF printing.
12.5
Signature995
12
With Signature995 you can digitally sign your PDF files. The installer file is located in the SmartCAT utilities folder (C:\SmartCAT\util\PDF995). For more info on this utility, after installation see the help documentation.
272
12.6
WordNet
Now, you can look up a word's definition right from your spell-checker, or even from the transcript! Starting with SmartCAT version 3.1, the installer for the WordNet 'dictionary' will be placed in your SmartCAT Utilities folder if you choose to download the full update from our website. You can also retrieve the WordNet installer from http://wordnet.princeton.edu/obtain. When you'd like to install it, just open a My Computer window, double-click on your C:\ drive, then double-click on the SmartCAT folder and then double- click on the Util folder. Now double-click on the WordNet folder. Run the WordNet file (WordNet-2.1.exe) file by double-clicking on it. Depending on your version of Windows it may give you an "Unknown Publisher" security warning. At this window click [Run]. At the Winzip Self-Extractor window, click Setup. The files will extract and bring you to a welcome window. Click Next Select I Agree Click Next Click Next at the Installation Folder screen. WordNet will then be installed and notify you when it has completed. Click [Close]. Go read the license, located at C:\Programfiles\WordNet\license.rtf.
After this you can fire up SmartCat and will have access to the WordNet dictionary through your spell checker, or highlighting/selecting a word and hitting [Ctrl+Shift+D].(Figure 335) WordNet 2.1 is Copyright 2005 by Princeton University. All rights reserved.
12
Figure 335: WordNet Lookup Dialog
273
12.7
Logging
SmartCAT contains a logging feature which can aid in the event of an unexpected program crash or error.
12.7.1
Level of Detail
This toggles exactly how detailed a record SmartCAT keeps of its own processes. Usually, this should be set to Normal. Do not alter this unless otherwise instructed by Cheetah Technical Support.
Figure 336: Logging Setup
12.8
Crash Assistance
12
In the unlikely event of a program crash, a code will be generated that can be given to Cheetah Technical Support with details about the crash. This can aid Technical Support in determining the exact cause of the error.
Figure 337: Fatal Error Dialog
274
CHAPTER 13 KEYSTROKES
CHAPTER 13
Keystrokes
Everything in SmartCAT can be accessed/executed with a keystroke. This chapter includes tables and layouts of the keystrokes for all aspects of the program.
In This Chapter
13.1 SmartCAT Keystroke Layout .................................................................................. 276 13.2 Turbokeys .................................................................................................................. 278 13.3 Transcript Editor Keystrokes .................................................................................. 280 13.4 Dictionary Editor Keystrokes .................................................................................. 282
13
275
13.1
SmartCAT Keystroke Layout
The following figure shows the default keystrokes used in the SmartCAT editor.
13
276
13.2
Turbokeys
Here is a list of the default Turbokeys. You can change the Turbokey functions to suit your needs. Customizing Turbokeys is described in more detail in Section 9.5.1. Turbo Key Definition Absolute Keystroke
A a B b C c D d E e F f G g H h I i J << empty >> Ctrl+F3 Ctrl+PgUp F3 << empty >> Ctrl+C Delete Ctrl+D Ctrl+PgDn End F12 Ctrl+F << empty >> Ctrl+G F11 <MENU> PgUp Up Ctrl+F7 (also Left or Ctrl+Left depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+F9 (also Left or Ctrl+Left depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+F8 (also Right or Ctrl+Right depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+F10 (also Right or Ctrl+Right depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+Shift+L Ctrl+L
Function
Goes into Insert Mode Beginning of file Beginning of line Center paragraph / Copy selected text Delete character Delete word End of file End of line Add Footer Find Text Steno global Add Header Home/Edit Menu Up one screen Up one line Left one character Left one word Right one character Right one word Repeat last find, find previous instance Repeat last find, find next instance
13
j K k L l
Table 19 Turbokey Definitions
278
Turbo Key Definition Absolute Keystroke

M m N n O o P p Q q R r S s T t U u V v W w X x Y Y Z z PgDn Down Ctrl+F2 F2 << empty >> Ctrl+O Ctrl+End Ctrl+P << empty >> CTRL+Q << empty >> Ctrl+R F9 Ctrl+S << empty >> Ctrl+Enter << empty >> Ctrl+U << empty >> Ctrl+V << empty >> Ctrl+W << empty >> Ctrl+X << empty >> Ctrl+Y / Enter << empty >> Ctrl+Z
Function
Down one screen Down one line Previous conflict or untranslate Next conflict/untranslate Swap words Purge to end of line Purge line Edit preferences Replace Save Select Text Mode Text global Underline Paste Witness paragraph Cut Split paragraph Undo (OOPS!)
Table 20 Turbokey Definitions Continued
13
279
13.3
Function
Transcript Editor Keystrokes

Keystroke
F4 Back Enter Ctrl+PgUp F3 Ctrl+E Ctrl+B Ctrl+K Ctrl+C Ctrl+Shift+B F7 Ctrl+C (with text selected) Ctrl+X Del Ctrl+P Ctrl+End Ctrl+D Down PgDn Ctrl+Q Ctrl+PgDn End Ctrl+Hyphen Ctrl+F F1 Ctrl+H Ctrl+A Ctrl+N Ctrl+F5 Ctrl+I/ENTER Ins / Ctrl+F3 Shift+F6 Ctrl+J Ctrl+F7 (also Left or Ctrl+Left depending on your Editing Preferences) C (with text selected) X Shift+D P Shift+P D M Shift+M Q Shift+E E F #
Turbokey Menu driven Mouse Option

Alt+E,M,C Right Click - choose Create bookmark
Add Book Mark Backspace Beginning of next line Beginning of file Beginning of line Bookmark menu Boldface Capitalize word Center paragraph Clear unused briefs Continuation paragraph Copy Cut Delete character Delete line (purge) Delete to end of line
Shift+B B Alt+E,M,F
Click at beginning of file Click Edit, Bookmark, Find Click BOLD Edit, Change Para Type, * Realtime, Auto-briefs, Clear unused briefs Edit, Change Para Type, $ Drag to highlight, Right Click, COPY Drag to highlight, Right Click, CUT Drag to highlight, Right Click, DELETE Drag to highlight, Right Click, DELETE Drag to highlight, Right Click, DELETE Drag to highlight, Right Click, DELETE Click on line Scroll down Setup, Editing Prefs Scroll down Click at end of line Click Edit, Find Setup, Number Formatting Click Help, SmartCAT Help Click Setup, Hotkeys Right Click, Insert Index Mark
Alt+E, G, * Alt+R, A,C Alt+E,G,$ Alt+E, C Alt+E, T
13
Delete word Down one line Down one screen Edit preferences End of file End of line End of word Find English Format number Help Hop to next paragraph Hotkeys window Index tag Initial cap word Insert line Insert mode Italicize Join paragraphs Left one character
Alt+S, E
Alt+E, F Alt+F, R, Alt+T Alt+H, H Alt+S, H Alt+E, X, M
A Alt+E, U, I Drag to highlight, Click Italicize button
Shift+J
280
CHAPTER 13 KEYSTROKES Turbokey Menu driven Mouse Option

J
Function
Left one word
Keystroke
Ctrl+F9 (also Left or Ctrl+Left depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+F6 F2 Ctrl+3 Ctrl+Z Ctrl+V Ctrl+F2 Ctrl+Shift+3 Ctrl+Shift+F Ctrl+L Ctrl+R 1-9 Ctrl+F8 (also Right or Ctrl+Right depending on your Editing Preferences) Ctrl+F10 (also Right or Ctrl+Right depending on your Editing Preferences) F10 F9 Ctrl+S Ctrl+F1 Ctrl+M Alt+F9 Ctrl+Y / Enter Esc F5 Ctrl+G - (hyphen key) Shift+F5 Ctrl+O Shift+F10 Ctrl+T Ctrl+Enter Shift+F9 or / Ctrl+F4 Ctrl+U Up PgUp Ctrl+W
Lower case word Next conflict/untranslate Next number Undo deletion (oops!) Paste Previous conflict or untranslate Previous number Refresh Bridge Output Repeat last find Replace Resolve conflict Right one character
Z V Shift+N
Alt+E, ENTER
Edit, Undo Right Click, choose Paste
Alt+R, F L R Shift+K
Realtime, Refresh connected clients
Right one word
Save and exit Save Select Text Mode Show software revision Spell Check Spell Check word Spell number Split paragraph Split screen Split screen / edit notes Steno global Stitch word/hyphenate phrase Superscript/subscript toggle Swap words Tag-along mode (Realtime only) Text format Text global Turbokeys on Typeover on Underline Unresolve conflict Up one line Up one screen Witness paragraph
Shift+S S
Alt+F, S, Alt+F, X File, Save File, Exit Alt+F, S File, Save Drag to highlight Click Help, choose About
# Y Esc F5 G
13
Alt+V, T
View, T
Alt+F,R T / U 0 (zero) I Shift+I W
File, Job Properties, Text
Click U
Click line Scroll up
Table 21 Transcript Editor Keystrokes
281
13.4
Function
Dictionary Editor Keystrokes

Keystroke(s) Turbokey Menu driven Mouse Option
INS Ctrl-PgUp Delete Down PgDn Enter Ctrl-PgDn Ctrl+F Alt+D, A Shift+B Shift+D M Shift+M Enter Shift+E F Right Click, choose Insert Scroll up EDIT, DELETE
13
Add dictionary entry Beginning of file Delete entry Down one line Down one screen Edit entry End of file Find English Filter a dictionary Filter Off Filter On Help Quick save Repeat last find Save and exit Save Set delete mark Set trash mark Set used tag Show software revision Spell check dictionary Spell check entry Steno search Text global Up one line Up one screen
Alt+D, E Alt+F, F Alt+D, U Alt+D, F Alt+D, A Alt+H, H Alt+F, S
DICTIONARY, EDIT ENTRY Edit, Find Dictionary, Filter Setup Dictionary, Filter Off Dictionary, Save As "FILTER ON" Help, SmartCAT Help File, Save
F1 Ctrl+L F10 F9 D T U Ctrl-F1 Ctrl+M Alt+F9 Ctrl-F or Ctrl-S Ctrl-Enter Up PgUp L
D T U
Alt+F, S, Alt+F, X File, Save / File, Exit Alt+F, S or A File, Save or Save a Copy As Right Click, choose Mark Deleted Right Click, choose Mark TMP Right Click, choose Mark USED Alt+H, A Click Help, choose About
S, F T I Shift+M
Alt+E, F
Edit, Find Click on desired line Scroll Up
Table 22 Dictionary Editor Keystrokes
282
CHAPTER 14 THE COMPUTER SYSTEM
CHAPTER 14
The Computer System

The computer contains the processor, built in storage units, and connectors for input/output devices. There are usually two types of computers used: laptop and desktop. Laptop computers usually have most devices built in and are portable using battery and/or plug-in power supplies. Desktop computers are generally larger than laptops and are usually not used for portable computing.
In This Chapter...
14.1 Internal / External Storage ...................................................................................... 284 14.2 Input Devices ............................................................................................................. 286 14.3 Monitor / LCD Screen .............................................................................................. 286
14
283
14.1
Internal / External Storage
Hard Disk / Local Disk (C:\) SmartCAT is installed on the hard disk aka hard drive, as are your transcripts, jobs, style sheets, etc. This is also where Windows is installed. As of this writing, hard disks range in size from 250GB to 1000GB. External Hard Drive These are very similar to the hard disk built-in to your computer but they sit outside and are plugged in externally. These are ideal for storing large amounts of data or backing up your entire internal hard disk. As of this writing, external hard drives range in size from 250GB to 1000GB. Floppy Disk Drive (A:\) Floppies are an older style of disk that hold about 1.44mb of data. These are good for sending ASCII transcripts. Note: Most newer computers do not have built-in floppy drives. External drives are available. CD/DVD Drive Most computers come with a drive for reading Compact Discs containing data. Some come with a drive that can also write data to blank CDs or DVDs. These are great for backing up important files such as your transcripts and dictionaries. Do not expose writeable CD's or DVD's to direct sunlight, direct sunlight can fade the inks in between the plastic layers, causing the information to be more difficult for the computer to read. Card Reader A card reader is becoming a standard for laptops and some desktops. They read data on memory cards in several different formats including, Memory Stick, Compact Flash, SD Card and more. Refer to your computer's user manual to see which formats your card reader is compatible with. Flash Drive
As of this writing, flash drives range in size from 512GB to 64GB.
14
Also known as thumb drive, jump drive or USB drive. These are best suited for transferring files from computer to computer because of their portability. Generally these drives are about the size of a key chain or your thumbs.
14.1.1
Maintaining Storage Media
Your jobs and transcripts are very important to you. That is why you should take a moment and review procedures for maintaining storage media. Read this section carefully. 284 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
With proper maintenance procedures, your work should remain available to you for years to come. 3 Floppy Disks Do not expose the disk to extreme heat or cold. Keep disks away from magnets and magnetic fields; they can erase the information saved on the disk. Do not wipe or clean the magnetic surface of the disk. Keep the disk away from food, liquids, and smoke. Never remove the disk from the disk drive when the drive light is on. Carry disks in a plastic case to prevent damage to the shutter.
Hard Disks Perform regular maintenance on your hard disk using the several tools provided by Windows. Click on Start All Programs Accessories System Tools, then locate each tool you wish to use. Perform a disk cleanup at least once per month. This rids your hard disk of unnecessary files and provides more disk space. Perform a disk defragmentation on a regular basis. After frequent use, files become fragmented and scattered throughout the hard disk. Performing a defrag makes files whole again, increasing access speed and performance of the hard disk.
Compact Discs (CD / DVD) Handle CDs by the edges, not the flat portions. Fingerprints and skin oils cause disruptions on the surface of the CD. These disruptions cause an error when trying to access the data. If a CD has smudges, fingerprints, etc.; try cleaning the surface by gently buffing the surface with a soft, slightly damp, lint free cloth. Better yet, use wipes specifically made for cleaning the surface of CDs.
14
USB Flash Drives Keep the flash drive away from water. Store in a cool, dry place. Don't place near a strong magnetic field. Use the cover to protect it from impact.
285
Don't forget to click the safely remove hardware icon near the Windows clock in the bottom right of your screen before pulling the flash drive. Scan any data before transferring to the flash drive and ascertain that there isn't a virus in it.
14.2
Mouse
Input Devices
The mouse controls the arrow cursor in Windows. They come in the form of a touchpad on your laptop or an external mouse shaped plastic device. See Section 15.4.1 for more info on using the mouse. Keyboard The keyboard is used to input text, characters and to interact with software quickly and easily through the use of shortcuts. It is highly recommended you use the keyboard almost exclusively in SmartCAT. See Section 15.4.2 for more info on using the keyboard.
14.3
Monitor / LCD Screen
The monitor is used to view your work, much like viewing a
14
television screen. It displays the information of a program and the text being input by the keyboard or the steno keyboard. If you are using a laptop the monitor is generally a built-in LCD screen. Changing Monitor Display Settings At times, you may wish to change the display settings for your monitor in order to make items on your screen, such as desktop icons, larger or smaller. To change the display settings, follow the procedure below: 1) Right click on the Windows Desktop. The Desktop Context Menu opens. (Figure 338) 2) Click on Properties. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 3) Click the Settings tab. (Figure 339) 4) Move the Screen resolution slider to your desired setting. 5) Click Apply to preview the new settings. 6) Click OK to accept the changes.
Figure 339: Display Settings Tab Figure 338: Desktop Context Menu
286
CHAPTER 15 USING WINDOWS
CHAPTER 15
Using Windows
Youll find many helpful techniques, hints, and tips using Windows in this chapter. Many commands and menu items are similar in different versions of Windows and SmartCAT.
In This Chapter...
15.1 Windows Terms ...................................................................................................... 288 15.2 The Search Companion ............................................................................................ 294 15.3 Useful Windows Shortcuts ................................................................................... 295 15.4 Mouse & Keyboard in Windows .......................................................................... 295 15.5 Basic Windows Functions ..................................................................................... 297 15.6 Windows Vista ........................................................................................................ 299 15.7 Windows 7 .............................................................................................................. 302
15
287
15.1
Click
Windows Terms
When youre told to click an icon, button, or something else, it means to lightly tap and release the left mouse button. Double-click means to tap the left mouse button twice in rapid succession (make sure you dont move the mouse between clicks). The left mouse button is the main button. Unless otherwise stated, clicking refers to the left mouse button. Whenever you need to use the right mouse button, the instruction will specifically state to right click. Right-click means click once with the right mouse button. The right mouse button usually provides access to more advanced features and menus. Pointer When you move the computer mouse, a small pointer moves on the screen. The pointer is also know as a cursor. You can move the cursor over various items on your desktop or in a program, then use the mouse buttons to interact with those items. Cursor Also known as the insertion point. It is the point where the next characters typed from the keyboard will appear on the display screen. The insertion point is usually represented by a blinking vertical line.
15
Desktop The Desktop is the full-screen display where all Windows activity takes place. It's a little like the computer equivalent of a real desktop, where you place everything youre currently working on. Of course, the Windows Desktop contains your current work, communications programs (the equivalent of a phone and fax) and other tools needed for work. It also has a wastebasket (the Recycle Bin), filing cabinets and more. A real desktop would have to be very large to hold all this stuff! The Windows Desktop is where all your computing activity happens. In short, it's the main screen that has all of your shortcut icons. Dialog boxes A dialog box is for adjusting settings or providing information needed to run a program. Usually, the box has blank areas that require filling in, called fields. A dialog box asks for information or tells you about something that then requires a response. A good example of this is the Licensing dialog box when you first register SmartCAT. It gives you a long number, then requires you to put another number into the blank field. Other dialog boxes allow you to choose options, type in text, click an OK button, and so forth. Some menu options have three dots, called ellipsis, after the name. The three dots indicate that when you select the menu item a dialog box is going to open.
288
Drag-and-drop In Windows, you can move items by pointing to them using the mouse cursor. Clicking the left mouse button and keeping it pressed down allows you to drag icons across the screen, move text from one area in a document to another, even change the size of pictures. After moving the icon or text to the new location, release the mouse button and the item is "dropped" at that location. This is called drag-and-drop. For example, you can reorganize your Desktop by dragging and dropping icons to new locations. Similarly, you can delete a file by dragging and dropping its icon onto the Recycle Bin. Drop-down menu Windows menus usually have sub-menus, indicated by a little down-pointing arrowhead beside the menu option, also known as pop-up, drop-down or cascading menus. When you click on a menu item, a drop-down menu list opens with more options. Clicking on one of those options then opens a new function. In SmartCAT, for example, clicking on Tools opens a drop-down menu list with several more items such as Split Notes, Import Dictionaries and several more. You may notice that some menu items are "grayed out" and unavailable. This usually means you must do something else before the item is active. For example, in Tools, Concordance is grayed out unless a transcript is open. Files Information and data is stored on your computer in files. A file can contain a computer program, a document, a picture, a style sheet and much more. Folders Folders are used to store files in an organized manner. A typical computer will have thousands of files, scattered all over the hard disk. To help avoid getting lost in all those files, Windows lets you organize files into folders. These are the equivalent of folders in a normal filing cabinet, with each folder containing related documents and labeled with names to make it easier to locate all those files. If youve used TurboCAT in DOS, you may remember the folders being called directories. They're the same thing, with a different name. Icons Icons are the small "pictures" on your Windows desktop or on various task bars and menu bars. An icon represents something: a program, a folder, a file, or a shortcut to a specific command. When you click on the Cheetah icon, you're telling Windows to start the SmartCAT program. The computer has been "taught" that the icon represents a shortcut to SmartCAT. Icons are also used for commands within a program. In SmartCAT, for example, clicking on the blue "folder" icon tells SmartCAT to open the dictionary dialog box in order to locate a dictionary for editing. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 289
15
CHAPTER 15 USING WINDOWS Menu
A menu is a list of functions and options available within Windows or other programs such as SmartCAT. Windows Desktop contains one menu, the Start Menu. When you click on a menu, it opens to show other options and functions that are available. Moving the cursor over menu options highlights each one in turn. Click once to open the highlighted menu option. Open Open, run, load and start are often used interchangeably. Opening an item means running or starting it. To open an item, double-click it. You can also open it by selecting the item, then pressing [Enter]. When you open or run a program, you start it. When you open (double-click) a file such as a document, you run the program that is associated with it. For example, if youve written a letter using Microsoft Word, double-clicking the document icon starts Word, automatically loading and opening the document, ready for editing. Select Selecting means to highlight an object. To select an icon, click it once. To select text, say in SmartCAT, click on the first letter of text, then while holding down the mouse button, move the cursor over the rest of the text. This will highlight the text in preparation for another action such as deleting it or moving to another location (see Drag and Drop).
15
Shortcut A shortcut makes it easier to open programs or locate files that may be buried several folders deep. Creating a shortcut allows you to quickly open a program or document no matter where its located on the hard disk. For example, starting SmartCAT is made easier by using the shortcut that points to the smartcat.exe file in the folder called C:\SmartCAT instead of having to search through the hard drive and folders to find the file every time you want to start SmartCAT, all you need do is double-click on the SmartCAT shortcut. By the way, the shortcut is represented as an icon. To create a shortcut: 1) Open Windows Explorer (located in the Start Menu, All Programs, Accessories). 2) If the window hides the whole Desktop, double-click the title bar at the top of the window to make it smaller, making it easier to see some of the Desktop. 3) In Windows Explorer, click the plus signs through the folders until you find the folder that has the file you're looking for. 4) In the above example, youd open the C:\SmartCAT folder. 5) Locate the file in the folder and right-click and drag the file onto a vacant spot on the Desktop. 290 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
6) A pop-up menu appears and asks what you want to do. 7) Choose Create Shortcut Here. You can recognize shortcuts by the little arrow included on the shortcuts icon. Make sure you dont confuse shortcuts with the files they point to. For instance, you can make multiple shortcuts to the same file (perhaps one shortcut on your Desktop, another in a folder you often use). Creating a shortcut to the file doesnt create copies of the file, so you're not wasting space on the hard drive. If you delete a shortcut, the file is unaffected and remains where it is. Deleting a file that the shortcut points to, however, will cause your shortcut to not work. Renaming a shortcut does not affect the file. This means you can call your shortcuts just about anything that helps you remember what it is pointing to. To rename a shortcut, rightclick, then choose Rename from the pop-up menu. Type in the new name and press Enter. Start Menu On the left side of the task bar is the Start Button. Click it to display the Start Menu. In Windows Vista, the Start button is represented by an orblike shape with a Windows logo in the center. Everything on the Start Menu is customizable, so if you want to change the icons or the way it looks, it's possible. On the left hand side, you see icons for the Internet and E-mail (you can change these to your browser or favorite email program), and a list of the most commonly used applications. If you find icons on there you want removed, simply right-click on them and choose "Remove from This List". This area also contains the "All Programs" menu explained in depth in the next section. On the right hand side you will see shortcuts to your personal folders, the Control Panel and other helpful tools.
The All Programs Menu
Figure 340: Windows XP Start Menu
15
The All Programs link will show you everything installed on your PC. This is where SmartCAT, SmartCAT utilities, online links and such can be found. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 291
For convenience, a SmartCAT shortcut will be placed at the very top of this menu, and also there is a Program Group which contains other links related to SmartCAT.
15
Window
Figure 341: SmartCAT Shortcuts in Start Menu
Every program runs within its own window or separate area on your desktop. You can expand a window so it takes up the whole screen, hiding any other programs in the background (called maximizing). You can reduce a window so that it becomes nothing but a button in the task bar (called minimizing). Or you can adjust the size of windows so you can see multiple programs running within their own windows at the same time (simply called sizing, or resizing). Each document, too, has it's own window. So, if you open up a letter and a memo in your word processor, the word processor will have its own window, and the letter and memo will each have its own window within the word processors window. If you close the letter or memo, the word processor will still be open. If you close the word processor, the letter and memo will also be closed. Task bar The task bar is the long horizontal bar, usually at the bottom of the Desktop. Note that it can be moved to another edge of the Desktop, so if yours isn't at the bottom, look along the 292 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
top, left or right edge. Its basically a toolbar like the ones you see in your applications programs, providing shortcuts to often-used commands with some special features. The task bar contains the Start button at the left, a time indicator and other small icons at the right, and a long strip of space that is initially empty. In Windows XP, it also contains a group of items immediately to the right of the Start button known as the quick launch toolbar. These additional icons let you quickly launch programs such as Internet Explorer, Outlook Express e-mail, and SmartCAT. These buttons only need to be clicked once. Theres also an icon to let you quickly hide all open windows so you can see your Desktop. Click it again to re-display the hidden windows. Whenever you start up a program, such as a word processor or web browser, a rectangular button appears in the task bar, indicating the program is running. You can run many programs at once, each contained in its own window. If you run multiple programs, you may find the program on top (called the active window) obscures programs behind. The other programs are still running, theyre just not shown on top. You can use the program buttons in the task bar to see quickly which programs are running. By single-clicking any of the program buttons, you can switch immediately to that program, making it the topmost, active window. Alt+Tab switches between It is not recommended to be running running programs. Toolbars
multiple programs while working in SmartCAT especially while in Realtime.
Windows features toolbars, or task bars. Some versions of Windows have five toolbars the task bar, the quick launch bar, the address bar, the links bar and the desktop bar and you can create your own additional toolbars. The task bar and quick launch bar are initially the only visible toolbars. You can make the others visible by right-clicking in a vacant spot on the task bar, choosing Toolbars from the pop-up menu, and then selecting the toolbar you want to display. You can move the toolbars around the desktop. The task bar can only be moved to the top or sides of the screen. The other toolbars can be placed anywhere, and resized to suit. When you open the toolbars, they lodge themselves in the task bar, which can soon become crowded. To provide more space, click and drag a toolbar to move it. You can close a toolbar either by clicking its close box (if visible) or by right-clicking the time in the task bar, choosing toolbars and deselecting the toolbar in the list. The address bar provides you with an Internet Explorer-style address bar. Type in a web address such as http://www.cheetahinternational.com and press Enter, and your browser will be launched and taken to the site if you are connected to the Internet. Note that if you have a dial-up connection, you may have to connect first. The links bar gives you a copy of your Internet Explorer links. The desktop bar shows each item on your Desktop, giving you single-click access to these items even when you have other windows open obscuring the Desktop.
15
293
15.2
The Search Companion
XP's Search Companion adds extra oomph to Windows' file-finding capabilities. It's easy to forget where you placed a file. With Windows XP, it's just as easy to find it again. XP's Search Companion, is an almost overly friendly, wizard-style search which can track down music, video, pictures, documents, and other files. You can use the Search Companion in its standard, hand-holding mode or you can switch over to advanced mode to hurry the process along.
15.2.1
Search for beginners
To use Search Companion: 1) Click Start Search to open Search Companion or [F3] from the Windows Desktop. 2) Choose the type of search you want to conduct: pictures, music or video; documents; all files and folders (this is a broad search which includes all types of files, including programs, documents and multimedia); computers on your network or people in your contact list; Windows Help; or information on the Web. The latter two options open the Help and Support Center and a browser-based Web search respectively. The other options stay focused within the Search Companion. 3) Type the search criteria into the boxes provided. The search criteria change depending on the type of search. For example, if Figure 342: Windows XP Search Companion you're searching for multimedia files, you can specify whether you're looking for audio, video or images. If you're searching for a document, you can specify the time frame in which it was created and enter any part of the filename which may help identify it. 4) Click Search to start the search. 5) When the search has completed, you can either refine the search or click Yes, Finished Searching to close the search panel and display a task pane.
15
294
15.2.2
Advanced searching
More experienced users will find the Search Companion's step-by-step approach retards their progress. You can switch over to a more powerful and speedy mode: 1) Click Start Search. 2) Click Change Preferences. 3) Click Change Files And Folders Search Behavior and click Advanced. 4) Use the step-by-step search, or click Change Preferences to set up an advanced search. The Advanced search lets you locate a file by part of its file name or part of its contents and it lets you nominate where to search on your computer. There are three additional options: When Was It Modified, What Size Is It, and More Advanced Options. Click the double-headed arrow beside any of these to expand the section and fill in the blanks.
15.3
Useful Windows Shortcuts
Windows provides several shortcut keys to aid in being more efficient and productive. The following are just a few to make life a little easier:
= If your keyboard is Windows compatible, you will find one or two Windows ()
keys. These are located on the left and/or right side of the keyboard, between the CTRL and ALT keys. When using a shortcut key, press and hold the Windows key down while simultaneously pressing the second key, then release both at the same time.
= Start Menu + R = Display the RUN Dialog Box + M or D = Minimize all Windows and Reveal the Windows SHIFT + + M = Undo Minimize Windows + E = Start the Windows Explorer + F = Open the Windows Search Companion + PAUSE/BREAK key = Display System Properties

15
Desktop
15.4
Mouse & Keyboard in Windows
Many functions in Windows operate more efficiently with a mouse. A mouse is an input device that sits on a flat surface next to the computer. Laptop computers use a different type of mouse, usually built into the laptop keyboard. The mouse/touchpad is generally a flat area on the laptop where you cause the pointer to move by pressing your finger lightly on the pad and moving the finger to cause the pointer to move. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 295
15.4.1
Using The Mouse
The mouse allows you to click on menus, options, etc. without having to use
multiple keystrokes on the keyboard. The mouse may have two or three buttons on top, which are tapped (clicked) to execute specific functions and commands. To use the mouse, rest it on a flat surface or a mouse pad with your wrist resting on the desk surface. Put the palm of your hand over the mouse with your index and middle fingers resting lightly on the mouse buttons. As you move the mouse on the flat surface, a corresponding pointer moves on the computer screen. When using the mouse, there are some terms you need to understand: Point - position the mouse arrow or pointer to the specific command, button, or icon. Click - tapping one of the mouse buttons. Left - Click - tapping once on the left mouse button. Used interchangeably with Click. Right - Click - tapping once on the right mouse button. Double - Click - tapping twice on the left mouse button. Drag - press and hold the mouse button while moving the pointer to a specific location, then releasing the button.
15
The mouse pointer changes appearance, depending on the function being performed and where the pointer is positioned. Move Around Using The Mouse 1) Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the insertion point. 2) Click the Left mouse button. Sizing a Window Do any of the following: To resize a window, put the mouse pointer on a window edge, click, and drag to the desired size. Clicking on a corner, then dragging will resize both horizontal and vertical sides. 296 To minimize a window, click the minimize icon at the top right corner of the window. To maximize a window, click the maximize icon. To restore a window, click the restore icon. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
To close a window, click the close icon.
Moving A Window 1) Put the mouse pointer on the title bar (at the top of the window). 2) Drag the window to the desired location. Arranging Windows 1) Right-click a blank area of the task bar (bottom of the Windows Desktop). 2) Select Cascade, Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically.
15.4.2
Using The Keyboard

Move left one character Move right one character Move up one line Move down one line Move to the beginning of the line Move to the end of the line Move to the top of the document Move to the end of the document

Home End Ctrl+PageUp Ctrl+PageDown
15
15.5
Basic Windows Functions
Opening Windows Help & Support Center 1) Click the Start button, then select Help. 2) Double-click the topic you wish to view. 3) Continue to double-click help subtopics to continue searching. 4) Double-click the help topic to view information about your question. 5) Close the Help window by clicking . Shutting Down Windows 1) Click the Start button. 2) Select Turn Off Computer.
297
CHAPTER 15 USING WINDOWS 3) Click Turn Off. Making Selections In A Dialog Box TAB
Click the tab name to display the options for that tab.
CHECK BOX
Click in the check box to check (turn on) or uncheck

(turn off) the option.
OPTION BUTTON
Click in the option button to turn on (appears darkened)

or off (blank)
SPIN BOX
Type an entry in the spin box. Or click the spin arrows to

scroll through the text box values.
LIST BOX
Click the item you want in the list. Click the down arrow next to the item to display other selections. Then click the item you want.
15
DROP-DOWN LIST BOX
COMMAND BUTTON
Click the OK command button to confirm and carry out the command. Click the Cancel button to cancel the command.
Exiting Applications 1) Save all open documents. 2) Select File Exit. Delete A File 1) In the file browser, right-click the file you want to delete. 2) Select Delete 3) Click Yes. Undelete A file 1) Go to the Windows desktop. 298 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
2) Double-click the Recycle Bin icon. 3) Select the file(s) you want to undelete. 4) Click Restore This Item. Rename A File 1) In the file browser, right-click the file you want to rename. 2) Select Rename. 3) Type a new name and press Enter. Copy A File To Another Folder 1) In the file browser, right-click the file you want to copy. 2) Select Copy. 3) Change to the folder where you want to place the file. 4) Right-click in a blank area of the folder and file list. 5) Select Paste.
15.6
Windows Vista
Differences between Vista and XP Windows Vista is Microsoft's newest operating system. There are some differences in how it operates as compared to Windows XP. One notable difference is during the SmartCAT installation process. Installer You will notice, if you download the SmartCAT installer, the icon will have a slightly different look:
Figure 343: Vista Installer
15
It now has a little shield in the bottom right-hand corner. This is a part of Windows' new User Account Control designed to prevent unauthorized programs from accessing your computer. When you run the installer, you will see this screen:
When this prompt appears, the rest of your screen will dim and become unusable. You must click an option to continue. If you have downloaded a file from the Cheetah International Website, or are running a program from a CD you received from Cheetah International, then it is safe to select 'Allow'. Otherwise, exercise caution.
299
CHAPTER 15 USING WINDOWS Other UAC prompts You might also receive more User Account Control prompts during normal Windows use: When this prompt appears, the rest of your screen will dim and become unusable. you must click on option to continue. Please exercise caution.
Figure 344: Windows Vista UAC Prompt
Vista Start Menu The Windows Start Menu has been redesigned for Windows Vista. (Figure 345)
15
Figure 345: Vista Start Menu
300
To locate programs, simply click in the "Start Search" box, and type what you're looking for. If you type "smartcat" into the box, everything containing the word SmartCAT will appear in the start menu. Of course, you can always run SmartCAT from your desktop shortcuts.
15
Figure 346: Vista Search from Start Menu
301
15.7
Windows 7
You will not notice a difference in how SmartCAT functions in Windows 7 compared to Vista. For a full listing of what is new, refer to the Windows 7 user manual. Right away, you will notice a few things different about the Windows layout: Start Menu The Start Menu was modified slightly for Windows 7.
Quick Launch / Taskbar
Figure 347: Windows 7 Start Menu
The Start Button, Quick Launch Bar, Taskbar and System Tray were also modified for ease of use.
15
Figure 348: Windows 7 Taskbar
Figure 349: Windows 7 System Tray
302
CHAPTER 16 QUICK REFERENCE
CHAPTER 16
Quick Reference
Create a New Job Click Or 1) Select File [Alt+F] New Job [B]. 2) Select the style sheet to use. 3) Click OK [Enter] button. Or 1) Press [Insert]. 2) Select the style sheet to use. 3) Click OK [Enter] button. Opening a SmartCAT Job Highlight it in the job menu and press [ENTER] or double click on it or: 1) Select File [Alt+F] Open Job [J] or click the Open Job icon. to create a document based on the default style sheet.
16
2) Open the drive and folder containing the transcript. Use the Look In drop-down list to change drives and folder up icon to move up to a higher folder. 3) When you see the file listed, double-click it. Saving a Job 1) Select File [Alt+F] Save [S], [F9], [Shift+S] (default Turbokey) or click the disk icon. 2) Select the folder to save the document to. 3) Click Save. Closing a Document [F10] or
303
CHAPTER 16 QUICK REFERENCE File [Alt+F] Close File [C].
Preview a Document Select File [Alt+F] Print Preview [V].
Print a Document 1) Select File [Alt+F] Print [P] or click .
2) Choose an option ie; Whole Document or Range of Pages. 3) Make any changes to the print options. 4) Click the OK [Enter] button. View / Edit Job Properties Ctrl+T while in a job or File [Alt+F] Job Properties [T] either while in a job or with the job highlighted in the job menu.
Include (Get) File 1) Put the cursor where you to include the file.
16
2) Edit [Alt+E] Include (Get) File [D] Insert or Remove a Page Break 1) Put the cursor where you like to insert/remove a page break. 2) Select Edit [Alt+E] Insert/Remove Page Break [B]. Create a New Working Directory 1) In the Save As dialog box or from the open job/dictionary dialog, click 2) Type the name for the new folder. 3) Press [Enter]. How To Check Spelling Of The Entire Document 1) Select Tools [Alt+T] Check Spelling [C] or hit [Ctrl-M]. You can also batch spell check a job with Tools [Alt-T] start batch spellcheck of Job [J]. 2) To skip this occurrence but stop on the next one, click the Ignore button. To skip all occurrences of this word, click the Ignore All button. 3) To replace the word with one of the suggested spellings, click the spelling in the Suggestions List. Click Change to change this occurrence. 304 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
CHAPTER 16 QUICK REFERENCE
4) Click Add to Dictionary to add the word to the dictionary. How To Change The Look Of Text 1) Select the text you want to change. 2) Do any of the following: a) For bold text, click B. [Ctrl+B] b) For Italic text, click I. [Shift+F6] c) For underlined text, click U. [Ctrl+U] How To Align A Paragraph 1) Click within the paragraph you want to change. a) To center the text, click align-center. b) To left-align text, click align-left. c) To right-align text, click align-right. Create a New Dictionary Dictionary [Alt+D] New Dictionary [N] or Click the New Dictionary Icon in the toolbar.
Open a Dictionary Dictionary [Alt+D] Open Dictionary [O] or File [Alt+F] Open Dictionary [D] or Click the Open Dictionary Icon in the toolbar
16
Start Realtime Realtime [Alt+R] Start Realtime [R]
Stop Realtime Realtime [Alt+R] Stop Realtime [I]
Play Audio Audio [Alt+A] Play [P] or [Alt+F1]
Stop Audio Audio [Alt+A] Stop [S] or 305
CHAPTER 16 QUICK REFERENCE [Alt+F2]
Pause Audio Audio [Alt+A] Pause [A] or [Alt+F3]
Resume Audio Audio [Alt+A] Resume [E] or [Alt+F3]
Record Audio Audio [Alt+A] Record [R] or [Alt+F5]
Import Steno Notes File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Steno Notes [N] Tools [Alt+T] Import Steno Notes [N]
Transcribe Notes from Job Menu
16
Tools [Alt+T] Transcribe Notes [R]
View/Change Editing Preferences [Ctrl+Q] Setup [Alt+S] Editing Prefs [E]
Get SmartCAT Help [F1] Help [Alt+H] Help [H] Call Cheetah International at 1-800-869-6986
306
CHAPTER 17 TURBOCAT MIGRATION
CHAPTER 17
TurboCAT Migration
We have included extra utilities and notes for TurboCAT users to help ease the transition to SmartCAT.
Figure 350: TurboCAT vs. SmartCAT
Rule #1:
Try it the way you did it in TurboCAT. Most of SmartCAT's functions are modeled after TurboCAT, so most of the time, doing it (whatever it is) like you did in TurboCAT will produce the same result.
17
In This Chapter...
17.1 Control Lines ............................................................................................................. 308 17.2 Importing your Phonetics Dictionary ..................................................................... 309 17.3 Importing the RealEdit Dictionary ..................................................................... 310 17.4 Importing a Dictionary ............................................................................................. 311 17.5 Importing TurboCAT Transcripts and Style Sheets .............................................. 312
307
17.1
Control Lines
"Control lines" were lines inserted into a transcript that preformed useful functions. In SmartCAT "Control Lines" are no longer used. Go to the sections noted for the way to accomplish the same task in SmartCAT as in TurboCAT. Box # This control line told TurboCAT to begin printing a box or to change the type of box being printed. When selected this option would ask you to enter a box number (1-3) to print. You were limited to the three box styles and creating a custom box required a long and tedious process. Creating boxes in SmartCAT is simple whether you want a standard box or a custom box. Boxes are setup in the style sheet under the Boxes tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Change Page # Pages in SmartCAT can be reformatted from the current page number position. See Section 5.4.2 . Line Numbers Printing line numbers is set in the style sheet under the page tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Don't Print Line Numbers
17
The option to turn off the printing of line numbers is set in the style sheet under the page tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Print Page Numbers The option to start printing page numbers and what page to start on. See Section 5.4.2 . Don't Print Page Numbers The option to turn off the printing of page numbers is set in the style sheet under the page tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Spacing Line spacing is set in the style sheet under the Text tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Header Inserting Header information is done in the style sheet under the Header/Footer tab. See Section 5.4.2 . Footer Inserting Footer information is done in the style sheet under the Header/Footer tab. See Section 5.4.2 . 308 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
Suspend To suspend Realtime, use the suspend token. See Section 11.9.13. New Page Use the Edit [Alt+E] Insert/Remove Page Break [B] menu option. See Section 9.7. Index Marking index entries no longer require a control line. Just select the text to be indexed, press [CTRL+N] and choose the index to insert the marked item to. See Section 10.1. Index Setup Setting up indices can now be done in the style sheet under the Index tab. See Section 5.4.2 .
17.2
Importing your Phonetics Dictionary
This requires that you have TurboCat installed on your computer. If you do not have TurboCat installed on your computer, you can contact Technical Support (1-800-869-6986) for help. 1) Open Windows Explorer. 2) Navigate to the Cheetah folder. 3) Locate the file Default.phn. 4) Right click on the file to open the drop-down menu list of utilities. 5) Choose Copy. 6) Navigate to a TurboCAT working directory. 7) Click anywhere in the folder. 8) Right click and choose Paste. 9) The file is copied to the TurboCAT working directory. 10) Right click on Default.phn. 11) In the menu list, click Rename. 12) Rename the file to Default.lst. 13) Close Windows Explorer. 14) Start TurboCAT. 15) Go to the Utilities menu.
17
309
16) Press the letter i (eye) to enter the Import/Convert utility. 17) The file Default.lst is listed in the import file list. 18) Press the letter D to start the ASCII Dictionary conversion. 19) Press the letter C for Cimmaron 1 type dictionary. 20) As the conversion process takes place, TurboCAT returns a message saying no entries were created. This is normal; the dictionary is created. 21) Exit from the Utility menu in TurboCAT and go to the Dictionary menu in TurboCAT. 22) Verify the dictionary Default is listed in the column for permanent dictionaries. 23) Exit out of TurboCAT. 24) Start SmartCAT. 25) Import the new dictionary Default.dic as you would other TurboCAT dictionaries. 26) At the Save As dialog box, click in the File name: field and type default.phn. 27) Click on the down arrow in the Save as type: field to display the drop-down list of file types. 28) Click on Phonetic Dictionary file (*.phn). 29) Click Save to save the file as default.phn. 30) Choose the default phonetics file in Realtime Options.
17
17.3
Importing the RealEdit Dictionary
1) Click on the Tools [Alt+T] Import Dictionary [D] menu option or the File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Dictionary [D] Menu option (they do the same thing). 2) The Open dialog box appears: 3) Click on the down arrow to the right of the Look In: dialog box, then click on the drive the where the working directory containing the dictionary to be imported is located on. Find the dictionary in the directory, click on it, and hit Open [Enter]. 4) The Save As dialog box opens. Click on Save [Enter] button and wait a few moments while the dictionary is saved with the new name. After the dictionary is saved, it can be opened for editing, adding or deleting entries, or any other operation involving the dictionary. Now that your TurboCAT dictionary is imported, it can be set as the SmartCAT RealEdit dictionary. To do this go to Setup [Alt+S] Realtime Options [R].
310
5) Once the Realtime Options box comes up, click on the [...] button next to the RealEdit dictionary field.
Figure 351: Setting Your RealEdit Dictionary
6) The Open dialog box will come up. Simply select the RealEdit dictionary from the list and hit Open [Enter]. 7) The name of the RealEdit dictionary will now be displayed in the field. Press OK [Enter] to save the changes.
17
17.4
Importing a Dictionary
1) Click on the Tools [Alt+T] Import Dictionary [D] menu option or the File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Dictionary [D] Menu option (They do the same thing). 2) The Open dialog box appears. 3) Click on the down arrow to the right of the Look In: dialog box, then click on the drive the where the working directory containing the dictionary to be imported is located on. 4) Click on the dictionary name to import. The name of the Dictionary selected will turn blue. Click on the Open [Enter] button then wait as the dictionary imports into SmartCAT. 5) The Save As dialog box appears. Click on Save [Enter] button and wait a few moments while the dictionary is saved with the new name. After the dictionary is saved, it can be opened for editing, adding or deleting entries, or any other operation involving the dictionary.
311
Importing TurboCAT Transcripts and Style Sheets

17.5
Although the steps below show how to import TurboCAT transcripts, the steps are essentially the same to import a style sheet. 1) Click on the Tools [Alt+T] Import Transcript... [T] menu option or File [Alt+F] Import [M] Import Transcript [T] menu option (they both do the same thing). 2) The Open dialog box opens. 3) Use the Look in: drop down box to browse to the location of the TurboCAT work directory that contains the file to import. 4) Select the TurboCAT working directory. 5) Double-click on the working directory to view the contents. Click on the transcript to import and click the Open button. After choosing the transcript to import, the New Job dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate information for the job being imported. Click the OK [Enter] button and the job will appear on the job menu. Select the file and press Figure 352: New Job from Imported Transcript [Ctrl+T] or [Enter] on the computer keyboard to open the transcript.
17
312
GLOSSARY
Glossary
application - A term referring to any software package. Short for application program, it usually refers to the entirety of a package. Cheetah Internationals transcription software SmartCAT, for example, is an application consisting of many individual programs. ASCII - A virtually universal text file format for PC-compatible computers. ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. autoinclude - A SmartCAT file (such as a title or certificate page) designed to be copied into each transcript automatically using the <GET> dictionary entry. autosave - A setting that causes your work in the Transcript Editor to be automatically saved at regular time intervals. baud - A unit of measurement for the speed of a modem. The higher the modems baud rate, the faster that modem can transmit data. click - To press and release a button on a mouse. See also double-click. CAT - A type of software package that allows Computer-Aided Transcription of electronic steno notes, as well as other utilities for reporters. check boxes - A type of option that is active if there is a check mark in it. It is inactive if there is no check mark. In SmartCAT, check boxes are checked or unchecked by clicking in the check box. CIC - Short for Computer Integrated Courtroom, this is a type of software designed to let a court reporter transmit testimony in Realtime to several computers at once, and to let litigants view and annotate the testimony. Caseview and LiveNote are two examples. client - When running CIC software, like Caseview, a computer that is receiving testimony in Realtime. clipboard - A temporary storage area for text that has been cut or copied. Placing text on the clipboard deletes any text that was previously on it. command - An action (possibly consisting of a series of other actions) that is performed by a computer program. For example, saving data or closing a window. concordance - A listing of almost all words in a document, including the page and line numbers where each word occurs. conflict - When a steno outline has more than one corresponding English dictionary entry. context sensitive - In SmartCAT, on-line Help is context sensitive, meaning the help screen displayed is relevant to the dialog or screen on your monitor. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 313
GLOSSARY CPU - Central Processing Unit The heart of the computer.
cursor - Also known as the insertion point. It is the point where the next characters typed from the keyboard will appear on the display screen. The insertion point is usually represented by a blinking vertical line or a small rectangle in SmartCAT. dialog box - A window that is displayed to request or supply information. A dialog box contains buttons and options which you use to perform a task. They are usually a fixed size. default (value) - This is a data value that is already in place in a dialogue box or a wizard. If you do not want to use the value, change it. desktop - The background of your screen, on which windows, icons, and dialogue boxes appear. dictionary - A dictionary contains steno strokes and the English words, phrases, and/or tokens they represent. directory - A type of folder on a hard disk or diskette that lets you organize files into groups. They are the electronic equivalent to a drawer in a file cabinet. disc - A round, flat frisbee-like object made of plastic. In this manual, a CD(Compact Disc) or DVD(Digital Video Disc) is referred to as a Disc.They can be used a means to store computer data such as your transcripts and dictionaries. disk (diskette) - Files and directories are stored on the hard disk in your computer or on floppy diskettes. The hard disk is a fixed disk that contains most of your files, A floppy diskette is a removable disk, usually used for long-term storage of old files or to move files between computers. DOS - An older computer operating system, DOS was the software that controlled the most basic functions of your computer. It has been replaced by Windows operating systems. double-click - To press and release a button on a mouse two times rapidly in succession. See also click. duplex printing - Printing on both sides of a sheet of paper. field - In SmartCATs dialog boxes and other screens, an area reserved for you to type information. In most of SmartCATs dialog boxes, pressing [Tab] moves the cursor from field to field. file - A collection of information that has been given a name and which is stored on a disk. This information can be a document or a program. folder - Documents and programs are stored in folders, which you can see in My Computer and Windows Explorer. In versions prior to Windows 95, folders were called directories. footer - One or more lines of text that appear at the bottom of most or all pages of a document. global - In SmartCAT, a type of replace that affects all occurrences of the specified text. hard space - A hard space is an invisible character used when you do not want words to be split between two lines. For example, you wish to keep the words Mr. and Jones on the same line. 314 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
GLOSSARY
Adding the hard space between Mr. and Jones assures that both words appear together on the same line when printed. If visible in the editor they appear as a caret ^ symbol. Hayes-compatible - A style of modem based on the protocol standards of Hayes brand modems. header - One or more lines of text that appear at the top of most or all pages of a document. host - When running CIC software, like Caseview, the computer you are using to input Realtime text, which is distributing the text to one or more client systems. hotkeys - Programmable keys, like macros, that let you assign sequences of keystrokes to a single Ctrl+Alt or Shift+Alt key. icon - A small picture which represents something that you can manipulate, such as a folder or a document. job - In SmartCAT, a series of files associated with a single transcript. All files have the same file name but different extensions. job dictionary - A dictionary containing entries specific to a particular job or task. Entries in the job dictionary override conflicting entries in other dictionaries. license - A unique identification number generated to allow the SmartCAT software to run. log off - To stop using a computer program or a computer system for which you (or someone acting on your behalf) originally logged on. Also see log on. log on - To provide a user name and a password that identifies you. This is a security measure that stops unauthorized people from using the software. Sometimes you need to log on for different parts of a computer system. Also see log off. menu - A menu is a list of commands. Click the menu name to see the list of commands. menu bar - The horizontal bar which contains the names of all the menus. It appears below the title bar. merging - In SmartCAT, the process of combining the entries in two dictionaries into a single dictionary, automatically removing duplicated entries. modem - A device attached to the computer (either internally or connected externally with a cable) to allow the transmission of files to another computers modem over telephone or cable lines. (See also Hayes-compatible). mouse - A pointing device that lies on a flat surface and fits into the hand. Moving the mouse results in a corresponding movement of a pointer on the screen. On a laptop computer, the mouse is replaced by a touchpad. network - A software and hardware package that lets several computers communicate and share data. oneshot - A type of dictionary entry for use during Realtime, letting you perform single editing functions from your steno writer. Oneshot entries execute a sequence of keystrokes just like Hotkeys. CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL 315
GLOSSARY
ordinal - A number indicating position in a series (1st, 10th, etc.) pane - A separate area of a window that is split into two or more parts. parallel port - A type of port on the computer, usually reserved for a printer cable. pointer - The small marker (often ) on the screen that follows the movement of a mouse (or other pointing device) and indicates which area of the screen will be affected when you press the mouse button. The pointer changes shape during certain tasks. Some common shapes are , , and . Also know as a cursor. progress bar - A Progress bar in a dialog box displaying the systems status in completing its command. For example, when translating steno, the bar moves from 0% to 100%. print queue - A list of files waiting to be sent to a printer. query- In SmartCAT, the process of checking all your dictionaries for the English definition(s) of selected steno. radio button - A type of option in SmartCAT dialog boxes. A radio buttons option is activated when there is bullet in the circle. Radio buttons are grouped together and only one option in the group can be checked. When a new radio button is selected, all others are automatically turned off. In SmartCAT, radio buttons are activated by clicking on the appropriate options. RealEdit - A Realtime mode in which strokes on your steno writer are interpreted as keystrokes on your computers standard keyboard as though you pressed those keys in the Transcript Editor. Realtime - Near instantaneous computerized translation and display of electronic steno notes. refresh - When running CIC software, the process of sending an updated copy of the text to all of the client systems. RTF/CRE - Short for Rich Text Format/Court Reporting Extensions, it is a standardized file format specially designed for CAT software. Any file in RTF/CRE format can be read by any CAT system with the ability to import RTF/CRE files, regardless of what type of CAT system the file originated from. screen saver - A moving picture or pattern that appears on your screen when you have not used the mouse or the keyboard for a specified period of time. screen shot - A image showing all or part of the computer screen, like the ones used in this manual. scroll bar - A horizontal or vertical rectangle which has arrows at either end and which contains a box (of varying size). A scroll bar appears when there is too much information to display entirely in a pane or window. Use a scroll bar to move through (scroll) the information that is displayed. serial port - A type of port on your computer, used by your writer, modem, and other devices. Serial ports are generally either 9 or 25 pins. Modern computers do not have serial ports. USB-toserial adapters are used to connect hardware with serial cables to new computers.
316
GLOSSARY
server - On most networks, it is the host computer that all other networked computers communicate through. SmartCAT Cheetah International's full-featured, comprehensive professional transcription software system. split bar - The line that separates two panes in a window. The line can usually be moved. steno mark (tape mark) - A mark made on paper notes for quick reference, sometimes saved in your electronic steno notes as well, depending on your writer type. stitching - A method of spelling in which individual letters are separated by hyphens or other characters. J-A-C-K-S-O-N sub-menu - A menu of commands opened by selecting an option on another menu. system administrator - The person responsible for your computer system. tag-along - A Realtime mode in which the screen automatically scrolls down as you write new text. Also refers to the following along of the cursor when you playback audio in SmartCAT. task bar - An area, usually at the bottom of the desktop, which contains a button for each program that is running. timestamp (timecode) - An electronic time optionally attached to each translate of a Realtime text file. title bar- The horizontal bar at the top of a window that contains the title of the window or dialogue box. On many windows, the title bar also contains the program icon and the Minimize, Maximize/Restore, and Close buttons. toggle - To switch between two options. Typically, this involves using one button or key to change state, for example between on and off. token - A special dictionary entry representing either an attribute given to a word or phrase (e.g. for bold, <_> for underline), a punctuation mark (e.g. <. > for a period, <, > for a comma) the start of a new paragraph (e.g. <Q> for question, <C> for colloquy), or other special functions. toolbar - A series of shortcut buttons that provide quick access to commands. Usually located directly below the menu bar. Not all windows have a toolbar. TurboCAT Cheetah International's original transcription software. The final version ran on DOS and was produced in 2000. turbokeys - An editing mode in which SmartCAT treats the letters A through Z as commands rather than as characters to be typed. tree structure - A hierarchical view of the structure of data that allows you to go to items of interest by navigating through the tree. untranslate - An untranslate occurs when you stroke something for which no corresponding dictionary entry can be found.
317
GLOSSARY
USB to serial adapter - An piece of hardware used to connect a serial device to a USB port. Necessary for connecting an steno machine with a serial cable to a modern computer. window - A rectangular area on your screen in which you view an application (for example, a word processor) or a document (for example, a document in a word processor). You can open, close, move windows, and change the size of most windows. In Microsoft Windows you can open several windows at a time, and you can often reduce a window to an icon or enlarge it to fill the entire desktop. See also dialog box, pane. wizard - A series of related dialog boxes in which you enter information.
318
FIGURES
Figures
Figure 1: Security Warning ................................................ 7 Figure 2: SmartCAT Installer Icon ..................................... 7 Figure 3: Installer Security Warning .................................. 7 Figure 4: Windows Vista User Account Control ............. 8 Figure 5: Cheetah Installer Splash ..................................... 8 Figure 6: License Agreement ............................................. 8 Figure 7: Components ........................................................ 8 Figure 8: Release Notes ...................................................... 9 Figure 9: Install Destination Folder ................................... 9 Figure 10: Install Complete ................................................ 9 Figure 11: SmartCAT in Start Menu ................................ 10 Figure 12: SmartCAT Icons .............................................. 10 Figure 13: Icons and File Associations ............................ 11 Figure 14: Send to SC Work Directory w/ Right-Click ... 11 Figure 15: SmartCAT Relocalizer .................................... 11 Figure 16: Registration Screen ......................................... 12 Figure 17: Terminate License Option ............................... 13 Figure 18: Terminate SmartCAT License ......................... 13 Figure 19: Terminate Confirmation Dialog ...................... 13 Figure 20: Termination Code Dialog .............................. 14 Figure 21: Control Panel In Category View ..................... 14 Figure 22: Add or Remove Programs Dialog ................... 15 Figure 23: Move License Registration ............................. 15 Figure 24: Sheriff Administrator ...................................... 15 Figure 25: License Move Option ..................................... 16 Figure 26: Move Licence Dialog ..................................... 16 Figure 27: Move License Reference Code Dialog ........... 16 Figure 28: Setup Menu ..................................................... 18 Figure 29: SmartCAT Icon ............................................. 25 Figure 30: SmartCAT Main Menu ................................... 25 Figure 31: Job Menu ........................................................ 26 Figure 32: Job Dictionary ................................................. 29 Figure 33: Refresh Job Window ....................................... 31 Figure 34: Right-Click Job Menu ..................................... 31 Figure 35: Work Directory ............................................... 32 Figure 36: Browse for Work dir ....................................... 32 Figure 37: Title Bar .......................................................... 33 Figure 38: Menu Bar ........................................................ 33 Figure 39: File Menu ........................................................ 34 Figure 40: Edit Menu ....................................................... 34 Figure 41: View Menu ...................................................... 34 Figure 42: Dictionary Menu ............................................. 35 Figure 43: Realtime Menu ................................................ 35 Figure 44: Audio Menu .................................................... 35 Figure 45: Tools Menu ..................................................... 35 Figure 46: Setup Menu ..................................................... 35 Figure 47: Help Menu ...................................................... 35 Figure 48: Status Bar ........................................................ 39 Figure 49: Page Number Line Number Current/Total ..... 39 Figure 50: Absolute Page Current/Total ........................... 39 Figure 51: Strokes Current/Total ...................................... 39 Figure 52: Job Time/Audio Time ..................................... 40 Figure 53: No Time codes ................................................ 40 Figure 54: RT and REC in Status Bar .............................. 40 Figure 55: Typing Modes in Status Bar ........................... 40 Figure 56: Job Properties Dialog ...................................... 41 Figure 57: Open Dialog .................................................... 42 Figure 58: Drop-down list for "Look in:" ........................ 43 Figure 59: Radio Buttons ................................................. 43 Figure 60: Spin Box Example .......................................... 44 Figure 61: Context Menu Key ......................................... 44 Figure 62: Notes Context Menu ....................................... 44 Figure 63: TC Home Menu .............................................. 44 Figure 64: Context Menu ................................................. 45 Figure 65: Dialog With Command Buttons ..................... 47 Figure 66: Menu with Shortcut Keys ............................... 47 Figure 67: Accelerator Sample ......................................... 48 Figure 68: Rename Job File Dialog .................................. 49 Figure 69: Delete Job Confirmation Dialog ..................... 49 Figure 70: Delete Backups Confirmation ........................ 49
319
FIGURES
Figure 71: Delete Audio Confirmation ............................ 49 Figure 72: SmartCAT Work Directory ............................. 50 Figure 73: Create New Folder .......................................... 50 Figure 74: New Folder ..................................................... 50 Figure 75: Browse for Work Directory ............................ 51 Figure 76: Style Sheets Dialog ........................................ 54 Figure 77: Active Style Sheet ........................................... 54 Figure 78: Naming A New Style Sheet ............................ 54 Figure 79: Importing TurboCAT Style Sheets ................. 55 Figure 80: Choosing The Style Sheet ............................... 55 Figure 81: Naming The Imported Style Sheet ................. 55 Figure 82: Selecting A Style Sheet ................................... 56 Figure 83: Jobs and Style sheets ...................................... 56 Figure 84: Job Properties Info Tab ................................... 57 Figure 85: Job Properties Page Tab .................................. 58 Figure 86: Job Properties Margin Tab .............................. 58 Figure 87: Job Properties Settings Conflict ..................... 59 Figure 88: Header/Footer Tab .......................................... 60 Figure 89: Header/Footer Tokens .................................... 61 Figure 90: Page $P of $N - Example of Token Output .... 61 Figure 91: Example of Relative/Absolute Page Overflow . . . 61 Figure 92: Add Header Dialog ......................................... 62 Figure 93: Multi-Header Setup ........................................ 63 Figure 94: Edit Current Header Dialog ............................ 64 Figure 95: Boxes Tab ........................................................ 64 Figure 96: Box Lines of Varying Widths/Thickness ........ 64 Figure 97: Text Tab ........................................................... 65 Figure 98: Indexing Tab ................................................... 67 Figure 99: Standard Index Example ................................. 67 Figure 100: Folded Index Example .................................. 67 Figure 101: Index Set Up ................................................. 68 Figure 102: Folded Index Setup with Four Columns ....... 68 Figure 103: Subsequently Indented Index ........................ 69 Figure 104:Dictionary Selection ...................................... 70 Figure 105: Condensed Options ....................................... 71 Figure 106:Import Transcript Menu Option ..................... 74 Figure 107: Locating TurboCAT Transcript To Import .... 74 Figure 108: Import Transcript New Job Dialog Box ....... 75 Figure 109: Import Dictionary from File Menu ............... 76
SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL Figure 110: Import Notes Menu Option for Tools Menu . 78 Figure 111: Import Notes Dialog Showing File Formats . 78 Figure 112: Open Dialog showing RTF/CRE Files ........ 78 Figure 113: New Job Dialog ............................................. 79 Figure 114: Imports Notes Dialog Showing Diskette ...... 79 Figure 115: Create Job Form Diskette Dialog ................. 80 Figure 116: New Job Dialog ............................................. 81 Figure 117: Split Notes Dialog ......................................... 81 Figure 118: Split Notes Dialog showing Sections ........... 84 Figure 119: Marked Sections Saved in the Job Menu ...... 85 Figure 120: Transcribe Notes Menu Option .................... 85 Figure 121: Duplicate Dictionary Error ........................... 87 Figure 122: Translation Progress Dialog .......................... 87 Figure 123: Translation Complete .................................... 87 Figure 124: Realtime Options showing writer choices .... 91 Figure 125: Communications Port Settings ..................... 91 Figure 126: Main Menu .................................................... 94 Figure 127: File New Job ............................................ 94 Figure 128: New Job Dialog ............................................ 94 Figure 129: Display Notes / Split Screen ......................... 97 Figure 130: Timestamp Display in Second Position ........ 98 Figure 131: Setting Time Stamp Columns ....................... 99 Figure 132: Theory Settings ........................................... 102 Figure 133: Other Translation Options .......................... 103 Figure 134: Open Phonetic Dictionary .......................... 104 Figure 135: Format Number Dialog .............................. 105 Figure 136: Number Formatting Options ....................... 106 Figure 137: Trigger Dialog ............................................. 107 Figure 138: Trigger Dialog with Format Drop Down .... 108 Figure 139: Trigger with Expiration Drop down .......... 108 Figure 140: RealEdit Dictionary is Set ....................... 115 Figure 141: Open RealEdit Dictionary ....................... 115 Figure 142: Realtime Output Failed ............................... 118 Figure 143: Realtime Options ........................................ 119 Figure 144: Add Realtime Ouput ................................... 119 Figure 145: Total Access Setup ...................................... 121 Figure 146: TCP/IP Setup .............................................. 122 Figure 147: Realtime CaseView Setup .......................... 122 Figure 148: LiveNote Setup ........................................... 123 Figure 149: Summation Setup ........................................ 123
320
SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL Figure 150: Binder Setup ............................................... 123 Figure 151: As Keyboard Setup ..................................... 124 Figure 152: Realtime Bridge Setup ................................ 124 Figure 153: Recording Control Console ........................ 126 Figure 154: Audio Setup Dialog Box ............................. 127 Figure 155: Naming Audio Files .................................... 128 Figure 156: No Audio File Error Message ..................... 129 Figure 157: Job Audio Timecodes Editor ...................... 129 Figure 158: Audio Timecode Editor ............................... 129 Figure 159: Timecode status bar .................................... 129 Figure 160: Windows Recording Control Properties .. 130 Figure 161: Volume Control Fader ................................. 131 Figure 162: Audio Mixer Control ................................... 131 Figure 163: Auto-Brief Window .................................... 132 Figure 164: Auto-Brief Options ..................................... 133 Figure 165: Show/Hide Auto-briefs window ................. 134 Figure 166: Transcript Editor Screen ............................. 137 Figure 167: Editing Preferences - Editor ....................... 139 Figure 168: Autosave at 3 min. ...................................... 141 Figure 169: Menu Key ................................................... 142 Figure 170: Editing Preferences - Colors ....................... 144 Figure 171: Color Picker Window ................................. 145 Figure 172: Saving Color Settings ................................. 145 Figure 173: Display Zoom Settings ............................... 146 Figure 174: Turbokey Editing Screen ............................ 148 Figure 175: Hotkeys Menu Option ................................ 150 Figure 176: Hotkeys Window ........................................ 150 Figure 177: Hotkey Error ............................................... 151 Figure 178: Hotkey Editor .............................................. 154 Figure 179: Hotkey Editor Dialog Box .......................... 154 Figure 180: Hotkey Exporting ........................................ 155 Figure 181: Import Hotkeys ........................................... 155 Figure 182: Include(Get) File ......................................... 156 Figure 183: Locating and Opening a Get File ................ 156 Figure 184: Include Options ........................................... 157 Figure 185: Picklist Save As Dialog ............................. 158 Figure 186: Picklist of Counties ..................................... 158 Figure 187: Lawyers Picklist .......................................... 159 Figure 188: Picklist Marker ............................................ 159 Figure 189: Selecting Multi-Line Picklist Item ............. 160
FIGURES
Figure 190: PreEdit Options ........................................... 160 Figure 191: Resolving a Conflict in PreEdit .................. 161 Figure 192: Go to Selection in Edit Menu ..................... 163 Figure 193: Go To Page/Line ......................................... 163 Figure 194: Go To Line in File ....................................... 163 Figure 195: Go To Timecode .......................................... 164 Figure 196: Find Text Dialog Box ................................. 164 Figure 197: Selected Text .............................................. 165 Figure 198: Bookmark Dialog Box ................................ 166 Figure 199: Bookmarked Text ....................................... 166 Figure 200: Bookmark Find Window ............................ 166 Figure 201: Steno Notes Display in the Editor .............. 168 Figure 202: Notes Context Menu ................................... 169 Figure 203: Change Paragraph Type .............................. 170 Figure 204: Paragraph Formatting ................................. 171 Figure 205: Format Numbers Dialog ............................. 174 Figure 206: Replace Text Dialog .................................... 175 Figure 207: Redaction Pen ............................................. 178 Figure 208: Redacted Text .............................................. 178 Figure 209: Printed Transcript with Redacted Text ....... 179 Figure 210: Redacted Text In an ASCII ......................... 179 Figure 211: Text Global Dialog ...................................... 180 Figure 212: Verify Change Dialog ................................. 181 Figure 213: Steno Global Dialog ................................... 182 Figure 214: Dictionary Selection Dialog ....................... 183 Figure 215: Saving Globals from the Edit Menu ........... 183 Figure 216: Save a Global File ....................................... 184 Figure 217: Load Global File from Edit Menu .............. 184 Figure 218: Edit Globals Table ...................................... 185 Figure 219: Edit Global Dialog ...................................... 185 Figure 220: Attaching an electronic signature (Job) ...... 189 Figure 221: Attaching an electronic signature ............... 189 Figure 222: Image Signature .......................................... 190 Figure 223: Number Questions Menu Option ................ 193 Figure 224: Number Questions Dialog .......................... 193 Figure 225: SpellCheck Menu Options .......................... 195 Figure 226: Batch Spellcheck Window .......................... 195 Figure 227: Batch Spellcheck Change To... ................... 196 Figure 228: Start From The Beginning of the Job ......... 197 Figure 229: Spell Check Dialog ..................................... 197
321
FIGURES
Figure 230: Word Suggestions List ................................ 198 Figure 231: Double Word Dialog ................................... 199 Figure 232: Double Q/A Paragraph Types ..................... 199 Figure 233: Spell Check Complete ................................ 199 Figure 234: Setup Speller .......................................... 200 Figure 235: Spell Check Options and Dictionary .......... 200 Figure 236: Available Spelling Dictionaries / Lexicons 202 Figure 237: WordNet Lookup ........................................ 204 Figure 238: Save Confirmation Dialog .......................... 205 Figure 239: Index Example ............................................ 207 Figure 240: Folded Index Example ................................ 207 Figure 241: Insert Index Entry ....................................... 208 Figure 242: Edit Index Entries Menu Option ................. 209 Figure 243: Index Edit Dialog ........................................ 209 Figure 244: Insert Index Mark ....................................... 209 Figure 245: Build Index Error ........................................ 210 Figure 246: Disabled Index Error ................................... 210 Figure 247: Keyword Index Dialog Box ........................ 210 Figure 248: Adding Keywords / Phrase ......................... 211 Figure 249: Select Keyword Index File ......................... 212 Figure 250: Open With Dialog ....................................... 212 Figure 251: Keyword Index in Notepad ......................... 213 Figure 252: Concordance Menu Option ......................... 213 Figure 253: Concordance Dialog ................................... 213 Figure 254: Open the Concordance? .............................. 215 Figure 255: Concordance open in WordPad .................. 216 Figure 256: Print Menu .................................................. 217 Figure 257: Page Range Dialog .................................... 217 Figure 258: Naming/Saving Notes File For Printing ..... 218 Figure 259: Printed Steno Notes .................................... 219 Figure 260: Example of a Print Dialog Box .................. 219 Figure 261: Print Preview Menu Option ........................ 220 Figure 262: Print Preview ............................................. 220 Figure 263: 4 Pages Per Sheet Shown ............................ 221 Figure 264: Condensed Printing Using Exterior Margins .... 222 Figure 265: Return to Normal View ............................... 223 Figure 266: Select PDF Printer in Printer List w/ Icons 223 Figure 267: Windows Print Queue Manager ............... 224 Figure 268: XP Printer List w/ Default Check Marked . 224
SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL Figure 269: Exporting a Page Image ASCII .................. 225 Figure 270: Print Page Range ......................................... 225 Figure 271: ASCII Save As Dialog ............................... 226 Figure 272: Page Image ASCII File ............................... 227 Figure 273: Saving As SmartCAT .JOB document ........ 228 Figure 274: Saving As RTF ............................................ 229 Figure 275: Saving Notes As RTF .................................. 229 Figure 276: Example HTML File ................................... 231 Figure 277: Send To Email Recipient via Right-Click . . 232 Figure 278: Outlook Email Window ........................... 232 Figure 279: Outlook Send Button ............................... 233 Figure 280: Open / Import Dictionary ........................... 235 Figure 281: Saving Imported Dictionaries ..................... 235 Figure 282: Open Dictionary from the Tool bar ............ 236 Figure 283: Open Dictionary .......................................... 236 Figure 284: Dictionary Editor ........................................ 236 Figure 285: New Dictionary from the Toolbar .............. 236 Figure 286: New Dictionary Name ................................ 236 Figure 287: Blank Dictionary Edit Screen ..................... 237 Figure 288: Unsaved Dictionary .................................... 237 Figure 289: Save A Copy As Menu Option .................... 238 Figure 290: Save as Type Drop Down ........................... 239 Figure 291: A Printed Dictionary ................................... 239 Figure 292: Merge Dictionaries in Tools ....................... 240 Figure 293: Merge Dictionaries in Dictionary Menu ..... 240 Figure 294: Merge Dictionaries Dialog ......................... 240 Figure 295: Merge Dictionaries Confirmation Dialog ... 241 Figure 296: Locating Steno ............................................ 241 Figure 297: Add Entry .................................................... 242 Figure 298: Add Entry Dialog Box ................................ 242 Figure 299: Edit Entry in Dictionary Menu ................... 242 Figure 300: Selecting Insert (Add) Entry ....................... 243 Figure 301: Word Spelled Correctly Message ............... 243 Figure 302: Dictionary Spell Check ............................... 243 Figure 303: Sort Option in Dictionary Menu ................. 244 Figure 304: Delete Entry Tag ......................................... 244 Figure 305: Purge Entries Confirmation ........................ 245 Figure 306: Temp/Trash Tag .......................................... 245 Figure 307: Entry Marked as Used ............................. 245 Figure 308: Dictionary Filter Dialog Box ...................... 246
322
SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL Figure 309: Edit Speaker IDs ......................................... 256 Figure 310: ASCII Import Tool ...................................... 259 Figure 311: TurboCAT Unarchive Dialog Box .............. 261 Figure 312: Unarchive Decision Box ............................. 261 Figure 313: File Job Menu Actions Open Backup ...... 262 Figure 314: Selecting Files in Your Work Directory ...... 263 Figure 315: XP Writable CD Autoplay .......................... 265 Figure 316: XP Send To CD ........................................... 265 Figure 317: Files Ready to be Written to the CD ........... 266 Figure 318: CD Writing Wizard ..................................... 266 Figure 319: Vista Autoplay Menu .................................. 267 Figure 320: Vista - Prepare Blank Disc .......................... 267 Figure 321: Burn CD Button in Vista ............................. 267 Figure 322: Vista - Copying files to a CD ...................... 268 Figure 323: Vista - Close Session .................................. 268 Figure 324: Vista - Closing Session Notification ........... 268 Figure 325: Vista - Copying to disc is done ................... 268 Figure 326: Burn Button in Windows 7 ......................... 269 Figure 327: Windows 7 Burning Options ...................... 269 Figure 328: Windows 7: Burn To Disc Button ............... 269 Figure 329: Windows 7: Prepare Disc ........................... 270 Figure 330: Thumb Drive ............................................... 270
FIGURES
Figure 331: "Green Cheetah Face" ................................. 271 Figure 332: SmartCAT Utilities Folder .......................... 272 Figure 333: PDF 995 Folder ........................................... 272 Figure 334: PDF995 Setup ............................................. 273 Figure 335: WordNet Lookup Dialog ............................ 274 Figure 336: Logging Setup ............................................. 275 Figure 337: Fatal Error Dialog ....................................... 275 Figure 338: Desktop Context Menu ............................. 287 Figure 339: Display Settings Tab ................................... 287 Figure 340: Windows XP Start Menu ......................... 292 Figure 341: SmartCAT Shortcuts in Start Menu ............ 293 Figure 342: Windows XP Search Companion ............ 295 Figure 343: Vista Installer .............................................. 300 Figure 344: Windows Vista UAC Prompt ................... 301 Figure 345: Vista Start Menu ......................................... 301 Figure 346: Vista Search from Start Menu .................... 302 Figure 347: Windows 7 Start Menu ............................... 303 Figure 348: Windows 7 Taskbar ..................................... 303 Figure 349: Windows 7 System Tray ............................. 303 Figure 350: TurboCAT vs. SmartCAT ............................ 308 Figure 351: Setting Your RealEdit Dictionary ........... 312 Figure 352: New Job from Imported Transcript ............ 313
323
INDEX OF TABLES
Index of Tables
Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 1 Realtime Tagalong Status ............................................................................................. 95 2 Phonetics Dictionary Entry Samples .......................................................................... 101 3 Intelligent Number Formatting ................................................................................... 109 4 Number Formatting With Tokens ............................................................................... 110 5 Oneshots for preceding words .................................................................................... 112 6 Oneshots for numbers ................................................................................................. 113 7 Oneshots To Resolve Conflicts ................................................................................... 113 8 Oneshots for Untranslates ........................................................................................... 113 9 Miscellaneous Oneshots ............................................................................................. 114 10 RealEdit Dictionary Sample Entries ..................................................................... 118 11 Hotkey Syntax Table ................................................................................................. 151 12 Sample Hotkeys ........................................................................................................ 153 13 Paragraph Types ....................................................................................................... 170 14 Punctuation Types ..................................................................................................... 176 15 Punctuation Tokens ................................................................................................... 248 16 Literals ...................................................................................................................... 251 17 Paragraph Tokens ..................................................................................................... 251 18 Attribute Tokens ....................................................................................................... 252 19 Turbokey Definitions ................................................................................................ 279 20 Turbokey Definitions Continued .............................................................................. 280 21 Transcript Editor Keystrokes .................................................................................... 282 22 Dictionary Editor Keystrokes ................................................................................... 283
324
INDEX
Index
A
accelerators, 48 adding blank lines, 172 adding bookmarks, 165 adding dictionary entries, 242 adding punctuation, 175 advantages of Realtime, 90 alignment, 171 all caps, 71 an/and conflict, 103 answer paragraph, 170 archiving, 262 area code, 107 ASCII, amicus, 227 export space, 142 importing, 76 page image, 225 summation, 227 assigning dictionaries, 70 Asterisk, for correction, 102 for paragraph, 102 multiple, 102 attribute tokens, 252 attributes, text, 177 Audio, backups, 132 files, 127 hardware, 125 meter, 128 microphone, 126, 130 overview, 125 recording / playing, 128 setup, 127 sound card, 126 speakers, 126 status bar, 40 synchronizing, 129 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL tagalong, 127 troubleshooting, 130 auto save, 141, 262 Auto-Briefs, clearing unused, 134 options, 133 overview, 132 viewing, 134 automatic a/an resolution, 88 automatic punctuation, 88
B
Backups, audio, 132 auto save, 262 dictionary, 237 feature, 262 retrieving, 31, 262 selecting files, 263 batch spellcheck, 195 batch translation, 86 binder, 123 Blank Lines, adding, 172 inserting, 172 split paragraph, 172 bold paragraph types, 66 bold text, 37, 177 Bookmarks, adding, 165 moving to, 166 overview, 165 removing, 166 token, 250 box, See Transcript Boxes, 64 bridge, 124 burn to disc, 30 burning CDs, 264 buttons, 47 325
INDEX
C
capitalization, 173 caseview, 122 cd burning, 30 centered paragraph, 170 changing paragraph types, 170 changing punctuation, 176 changing the work directory, 32 characters per line, 59 check boxes, 43 Cheetah, forums, 3 sales inquiries, 4 support, 3 tech support, 4 clearing unused auto-briefs, 134 close without saving, 205 colloquy paragraph, 65, 170 colors in SmartCAT, 143 columns display, 143 combine dictionaries, See Merge Dictionaries, 240 commands, 46 commas, 177 Concordance, excluding words, 214 generating, 213 printing, 215 saving, 216 Condensed Printing, default, like transcript, 221 options, 71 printing, 221 remove interior spacing, 222 settings, 71 using exterior margins, 222 Conflicts, a/an conflict resolution, 88 find next, 167 finding, 162 highlighting resolved conflicts, 167 Oneshots, 113 resolving, 167 restoring, 167 conflicts - oneshot, 113 connecting the writer, 93 context menu, 44 326
continuation paragraph, 65, 170 convert, See Importing, 73 copy text, 37, 187 correcting accidents, 187 Create, dictionary, 236 include (get) files, 155 picklists, 158 Realtime job, 94 style sheet, 54 work directory, 49 cursor line centered, 141 customizing keystrokes, 148 cut text, 37, 187
D
date formatting, 107 Deleting, jobs, 49 punctuation, 176 text, 186 deleting jobs, 49 deleting punctuation, 176 deleting text, 186 dialog boxes, 41 Dictionaries, assigning, 70 backups, 237 creating, 236 exporting, 238 identifying for translation, 70, 86 importing, 76, 235 keystrokes, 283 maintenance, 241 merging, 240 opening, 236 printing, 239 RealEdit, 93, 116 saving and exiting, 237 theory settings, 102 translation options, 103 Dictionary Maintenance, adding entries, 242 editing entries, 242 filters, 246 locating entries, 241
INDEX spellcheck, 194 split paragraphs, 173 stitching, 173 text attributes, 177 transcript editor, 137 typing modes, 147 untranslates, 168 WordNet, 203 working with notes, 169 zoom / enlarge, 146 editing dictionary entries, 242 editing globals, 184 Editing Modes, insert mode, 147 TurboKeys mode, 147 typeover mode, 147 Editing Prefs, colors, 143 editor, 139 job menu options, 142 overview, 138 timestamps, 99 Electronic Signature Image, attaching, 189 creating, 188 overview, 188 placing, 190 emailing, 232 English language dictionary, See WordNet, 203 enlarge display, 146 enter starts new paragraph, 141 exiting SmartCAT, 52 Exporting, ASCII, 225 dictionaries, 238 save a copy as, 228
sorting entries, 244 spellcheck, 243 tagging entries, 244 tokens and special entries, 248 digital signature, 273 display enlarge/zoom, 146 display in all caps, 71 double paragraph check, 199 double word check, 199 download SmartCAT, 6 drop-down boxes, 43 drop-down menus, 47 dumb suffix, 250
E
Editing, bookmarks, 165 capitalization, 173 commas, 177 conflicts, 167 cut, copy paste text, 187 deleting text, 186 formatting numbers, 174 from steno keyboard, 155 globals, 180 hyphenation, 173 include (Get) files, 155 joining jobs with include, 156 modifying text format, 190 moving around, 161 numbering questions, 193 Oops! undo key, 187 page break, 157 paragraph formatting, 171 paragraph types, 169 parentheses, 177 picklists, 157 plurals, 176 PreEdit, 160 preferences, 138 quotes, 176 redaction, 178 replace text, 175 saving and exiting, 205 selecting text, 172 smart punctuation, 175
F
file compression, 270 filtering a dictionary, 246 find steno, 169 find text, 38, 164 find the next number, 163 finger spelling, 253 Finishing, concordance, 213
327
INDEX emailing, 232 exporting, 225 indexing, 207 keyword index, 210 printing, 217 save a copy as, 228 flash drive, 270, 285 folded index, 67, 207 font size and type, 66 footers See Headers / Footers, 60
syntax, 150 writing your own, 150 hyphenation, 173
I
image, See Electronic Signature Image, 189 Importing, ASCII, 76, 259 dictionary, 312 notes, 76 RealEdit dictionary, 311 RTF, 75 TurboCAT dictionaries, 76 TurboCAT style sheets, 55, 313 TurboCAT transcripts, 74, 313 indentation, 171 index line spacing, 66, 192 Indexing, editing entries, 208 generating, 209 inserting entries, 207 keyword index, 210 marks, 209 setup, 67 info tab, 57 insert mode, 40, 147 insert mode auto-off, 140 insert page breaks, 157 Installation, features, 10 from CD, 7 from download, 6, 7 licensing, 11 system requirements, 6 uninstalling, 13 installing, 7 instruction panel, 32 italicize text, 37, 177
G
get token, 255 Globals, editing, 184 loading, 184 saving, 183 steno, 182 text, 180 glossary, 314 Go to page, line or timecode, 163
H
hard space, 249 hardware requirements, 6 Headers / Footers, bold, 61 editing, 62 file creation date, 61 italicize, 61 overview, 60 printing, 60 spacing, 59 timecode, 61 tokens, 60 underline, 61 witness, 61 Help, crash assistance, 275 help file, 2 Hotkeys, editing, 154 exporting/importing, 154 overview, 149 recorder, 153 samples, 151 328
J
job dictionary, 29 Job Menu, 26 actions, 28 changing work directory, 51 colors, 143 columns, 143 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
INDEX creating, 210 displaying, 212 entering keywords, 211 loading, 212 printing, 212 removing keywords, 211 saving, 211, 212
copy jobs, 30 deleting jobs, 49 instruction panel, 32 job sort order, 51 keystrokes, 28 mark jobs complete, 30 move jobs, 30 multiple job select, 32 options, 142 refreshing, 31 rename job, 49 retrieving job backups, 31 send files to cd or dvd, 30 sorting, 51 Job Properties, all caps, 71 customizing, 58 dictionaries, 70, 86 headers / footers, 60 indexing, 67 info, 57 margins, 58, 98 Options, 71 overview, 56 page number, 43 text formatting, 65 transcript boxes, 64 Joining Jobs, using Include (GET) File, 156 joining paragraphs, 173
L
lexicons, 202 licensing, 11, 19 Licensing, moving, 15 terminating, 13 line indent, 65, 191 line spacing, 171 lines per page, 66, 192 literals, 250 livenote, 123 loading globals, 184 locating dictionary entries, 241 locating jobs, 271 logging, 20, 275
M
macros, See Hotkeys, 149 main menu, 25 maintaining a dictionary, 241 maintaining storage media, 285 manual conventions, 3 margin paragraph, 170 Margins, absolute line numbers, 59 line numbers, 59 printing, 60 spacing, 66, 192 Marking, dictionary entries, 244 jobs complete, 30 text for indexing, 207 Menu Bar, 46 choosing commands from, 46 menu button, 44, 142 merging dictionaries, 240 microphone volume meter, 39 minuscript, 71 329
K
keyboard layout, 277 Keystrokes, accelerators, 48 customizing, 148 default turbokeys, 279 hotkeys, 149 in dictionary, 283 in transcript editor, 281 keyboard layout, 277 oneshots, 155 shortcut keys, 47 turbokeys, 148 underlined letters, 42, 43 Keyword Index,
INDEX modifying text format, 190 mouse, 40 moving around in the editor, 161 moving license, 15
N
new dictionary, 36, 236 new job, 36 new Realtime job, 94 normal text, 178 Notes, batch translation, 86 extracting, 86 importing, 76, 78 overview, 24 search steno, 82 split screen, 82, 88 splitting, 81 translating, 87 translation statistics, 87 viewing, 168 working with, 169 null token, 255 number bar, 102 Number Formatting, options, 106 realtime, 105 tokens, 110 triggers, 107 types, 109 numbering questions, 193 numbers - Oneshots, 113
O
Oneshots, realtime, 111 samples, 112 OOPS! key, See Undo, 187 open dictionary, 36 open job, 36 opening a transcript, 137 opening dictionary, 236 output as keyboard, 124 output in Realtime, 118
P
330
page breaks, 157 page number, 58 page setup, 58 paper size, 58 9.13.2 Paragraph Formatting, 171 alignment, 171 indentation, 171 line spacing, 171 overview, 171 stick to next, 171 paragraph tokens, 251 Paragraph Types, changing, 170 overview, 169 witness, 171 parentheses, 177 parenthetical paragraph, 66, 170 paste text, 37, 188 pause audio, 39 PDF, 223 period following Q&A, 65 phone number options, 107 Phonetics, customizing, 100 dictionary, 104 enabling, 100 options, 103 sample table, 101 untranslates, 99 Picklists, creating, 158 markers, 159 multi-line, 158 overview, 157 play audio, 38, 128 plurals and possessives, 176 preceding words - Oneshots, 112 PreEdit, options, 142 overview, 160 replace, 160 steno global, 160 text global, 160 Preferences, audio, 127 editing, 138 job properties, 56 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
INDEX
number formatting, 105 phonetics, 103 printing, 20, 216 Realtime, 90 spelling, 200 theory settings, 102 zoom, 146 prefixes, 249 print, 36 Print Preview, exit preview, 223 intro, 220 magnification, 223 multiple / condensed, 220 options, 221 zoom, 223 print with redaction, 36, 178 Printing, all caps, 71 dictionary, 219, 239 margin printing, 60 minis, 220 options, 219 overview, 217 PDF, 223 preview / condensed, See also Condensed Printing, 220 print queue manager, 223 printer installation, 20 printer setup, 20 printing transcripts, 217 steno notes, 218 timestamps, 98 troubleshooting, 223 Punctuation, changing, 176 deleting, 176 smart punctuation, 175 typing, 175
R
radio buttons, 43 range of pages, 217 readback paragraph, 66, 170 RealEdit, dictionary, 116 using, 115 Realtime, audio, 125 auto-briefs, 132 connecting your writer, 93 device setup, 18 equipment, 90 new job, 94 notes display, 93 number formatting, 105 oneshots, 111 output, 93 overhead projectors, 125 overview, 89 RealEdit, 115 setup, 90, 91 split screen, 97 starting, 96 starting and stopping, 96 status bar, 40 steno machine, 90 stopping, 96 tagalong, 95 theory settings, 102 timestamps, 97 translation options, 103 Realtime Output, as keyboard, 124 binder, 123 bridge, 124 caseview, 122 client format, 119 clients, 121 connection settings, 120 overview, 118 setup, 118 summation, 123 suspend token, 255 suspending, 121 tcp/ip, 122 331
Q
question paragraph, 170 quick reference, 304 quit without saving, 205 quotation marks, 176 quotes token, 249
INDEX total access, 121 record audio, 39, 128 recording Hotkeys, 153 recording Turbokeys, 149 redacted ASCII, 179 Redaction, ascii, 179 conceal on ASCII, 226 overview, 178 printing, 178 text, 178 the redaction pen, 178 token, 178 redaction pen, 37 redaction printing, 36 refresh job menu, 31 remove page breaks, 157 removing bookmarks, 166 renaming jobs, 49 repeat find, 165 replace text, 38, 175 resolving conflicts, 167 retrieving job backups, 31 reverse globals, 186 Rich Text Format, See RTF, 228 Right Click, See context menu, 44 RTF/CRE, exporting / save a copy as, 228 importing, 75 understanding, 229 ruby slippers, 51 running SmartCAT, 25
S
save, 36 Save a Copy As, html, 230 job, 228 overview, 228 rtf, 228 rtf notes, 229 text, 230 saving dictionary, 237 saving globals, 183 Scan to next,
conflict/untranslate/bookmark, 162 number, 163 options, 142 search for files, 295 selecting files to copy, 263 selecting jobs, 29, 32 selecting text, 172 send files to disc, 30 Setup Menu, Audio, 127 Editing Prefs, 18, 138 Hotkeys, 149 Number Formatting, 106 Realtime, 90 speaker IDs, 256 Spelling, 200 Theory Settings / Translation Options, 102 Turbokeys, 19, 148 shortcuts, 47, 296 show hard spaces, 140 show smart periods, 140 smart punctuation, 175 smart word endings, 141, 250 SmartCAT, check boxes, 43 commands, 46 context menu, 44 dialog box, 41 elements, 25 exiting, 52 list boxes, 42 main menu, 25 menu bar, 33 radio buttons, 43 spin boxes, 44 starting, 25 status bar, 39 text boxes, 42 title bar, 33 toolbar, 36 sorting dictionary, 244 sorting jobs, 51 spaces before and after Q/A, 65, 191 spacing between stitched words, 255 Speaker IDs, in header/footer, 61 tokens, 256 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
332
INDEX stop audio, 38 stop Realtime, 96 Style Sheet, applying, 56 condensed, 71 custom, 54 default, 54 importing, 55 job properties, 56 suffixes, 250 summation, 123 super and subscript text, 177 surround text, See Selecting Text, 172 suspend token, 255 suspending realtime, 121 swap words, 172 synchronizing audio, 129 system requirements, 6
Spellcheck, adding words, 202 batch, 195 current word, 198 custom spelling dictionaries, 202 dictionary, 243 double word/ paragraph, 199 lexicons, 202 overview, 194 removing words, 203 right click, 198 setup, 200 standard, 197 WordNet, 203 spelling, finger, 253 spin boxes, 44 Split Notes, exiting, 85 marking sections, 83 moving around, 82 naming sections, 84 saving sections, 85 section information, 84 transcribing, 85 split screen, 88, 97 splitting paragraphs, 173 start menu, 292, 301 start Realtime, 96 starting a new Realtime job, 94 starting SmartCAT, 25 Status Bar, audio, 129 column number, 39 line number, 39 page number, 39 strokes, 39 timecode, 40 steno globals, 182 Steno Writer, connecting, 93 overview, 18 realtime, 90 troubleshooting, 91 stick to next, 171 stitching, 173 Stitching, lower case, 103 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
T
tab spacing, 66, 192 tagalong, 95, 127, 141 tcp/ip, 122 technical support, 2 terminating the license, 13 text alignment, 37 Text Attributes, bold, 177 italics, 177 normal, 178 overview, 177 super/subscript, 177 underline, 177 text boxes, 42 text formatting, 65 text globals, 180 The Computer System, CD / DVD, 263, 285, 286 flash drive, 263, 270, 285, 286 floppy disk, 263, 270, 285, 286 hard disk, 285, 286 input devices, 287 monitor / LCD screen, 287 mouse, 40 storage, 285 theory settings, 102
333
INDEX time formatting, 107 Timestamps, printing, 98 realtime, 97 viewing, 99 Tokens, attribute, 252 autoinclude <GET>, 255 bookmarks, 250 finger spelling, 253 hard spaces, 249 header / footer, 60 literals, 250 null, 255 number formatting, 110 paragraph, 251 prefixes, 249 punctuation, 248 quotes, 249 speaker IDs, 256 suffixes, 250 suspend, 121, 255 Toolbar, 46 choosing commands from, 46 total access, 121 Transcript Boxes, begin printing on page, 65 line type, 64 line weight, 64 position, 64 Transcript Editor, all caps, 71 colors, 143 exiting, 205 finding text, 164 Go to, 163 keystrokes, 281 moving around, 161 opening a transcript, 137 quit without saving, 205 saving, 205 saving and exiting, 205 viewing notes, 168 Transcription, overview, 24 transferring files, 271 transferring jobs, 262 334
Translating, automatic conflict resolution, 88 automatic punctuation, 88 batch translation, 86 identifying dictionaries, 86 notes file, 87 options, 103 translating with phonetics, 99 troubleshooting audio, 130 TurboCAT migration, 308 TurboKeys, customizing, 148 editing mode, 147 list of defaults, 279 recorder, 149 typeover mode, 40, 147 Typing Modes, status bar, 40
U
unarchiving, 261 underline text, 37, 177 undo, 187 uninstalling, 13 Untranslates, editing with Oneshots, 113 find next, 167 phonetic translation, 99 Utilities, ASCII Import Tool, 259 backups, archiving and transferring, 262 PDF995, 272 unarchiving TurboCAT files, 261 WordNet, 274
V
viewing auto-briefs, 134 viewing notes, 168 viewing timestamps, 99
W
Windows, 130, 164, 224 7 CD Burning, 268 basics, 298 dialog boxes, 41 CHEETAH INTERNATIONAL
INDEX word endings, smart, 250 word index, See Concordance, 213 WordNet, overview, 203 setup, 21 using, 204 Work Directory, changing, 51 changing in job menu, 32 creating, 49 deleting jobs, 49 rename jobs, 49 send to, 11 working with notes, 169
differences, 300 display settings, 287 folders, 48 keyboard, 298 mouse, 297 search, 295 selecting files, 263 shortcuts, 296 terms, 289 Vista, 300 Vista CD Burning, 267 Vista start menu, 301 Windows 7, 303 XP CD Burning, 265 Windows 7, 303 witness paragraph, 171 witness token, 61
Z
zoom, 146
335
Training
We might be coming to your area for a SmartCAT Training! Call or go online now to get locations and dates for future trainings. Early registration discounts are available.
For Information: CALL US @ 1-800-869-6986 Ext. 2 Or Register online @ www.CheetahInternational.com
Hands-on practice from start to transcript completion with ample time for Q&A
**SmartCAT Trials Available!!**
Notes

SmartCAT Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SmartCAT Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Welcome to the SmartCAT user manual!

Do not print this page. The manual is designed to be printed double-sided.

Printed in the United States of America.

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 4 Getting Started.................................... 23

CHAPTER 3 Configuring SmartCAT...................... 17

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 5 Style Sheets......................................... 53

CHAPTER 7 Working With Notes........................... 77

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 9 Editing.............................................. 136

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

9.15.2 9.15.3 9.15.4 9.15.5

CHAPTER 10 Finishing Tools / Printing................ 206

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 11 Dictionaries...................................... 234

CHAPTER 13 Keystrokes......................................... 276

CHAPTER 14 The Computer System...................... 284

CHAPTER 15 Using Windows.............................. 288

CHAPTER 12 Utilities.............................................. 258

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Glossary............................................ 314 Figures.............................................. 320 Index of Tables................................. 325 Index................................................. 326

CHAPTER 16 Quick Reference............................... 304 CHAPTER 17 TurboCAT Migration....................... 308

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Resources and Assistance

In-Program Help [F1]

Technical Support Hot Line

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Conventions Used In This User Manual

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Critical Sticky Note

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Downloading and Installing

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Figure 2: SmartCAT Installer Icon

Figure 3: Installer Security Warning

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Figure 4: Windows Vista User Account Control

Figure 6: License Agreement

Install SmartCAT, Copy Extras

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Install SmartCAT, Copy and Install Extras

Installs SmartCAT only.

Figure 8: Release Notes

Figure 10: Install Complete

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Figure 11: SmartCAT in Start Menu

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Figure 13: Icons and File Associations

SmartCAT Relocalizer Utility

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Licensing over the phone

Figure 16: Registration Screen

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Terminating The License

Figure 18: Terminate SmartCAT License

SMARTCAT PROFESSIONAL USER MANUAL

Figure 20: Termination Code Dialog

Removing SmartCAT From The Computer

4) Scroll through the list of programs until you see SmartCAT. 14

Figure 21: Control Panel In Category View